FCR Prima PDF

Safety Information
Product Overview
Taking and Reading

X-ray of a Subject
Searching Patients and

Referring Studies
Verifying and
Processing Images
Using Report Function

(CR-IR 391CL)
Reference Guide Image Storage
from Each Window
3rd Edition November 2010
Image Print
from Each Window
Editing Study Information
Verifying with the Indicators
Changing Display Settings

of the “Main” Window and
“Image Viewer”
Using “Study Utilities”
Configuring “Client Utilities”
Setting “User Utilities”
This Reference Guide describes details on how to operate the FCR PRIMA Console
(CR-IR 391CL) and cautions to be observed when operating it. Please read the Troubleshooting
Reference Guide thoroughly before actually operating the FCR PRIMA Console
(CR-IR 391CL) system. After reading this manual, store it nearby the FCR PRIMA Daily Inspection and
Console (CR-IR 391CL) so that you can see it whenever necessary. Please also Maintenance
read the “FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) Operation Manual” which provides
detailed information on the operation of the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL). Appendix
Index
897N101440B
Introduction
This Reference Guide applies to the following software.
• FCR PRIMA Console Software V2.0(B)
This Reference Guide offers the reader a summary insight into the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR
391CL) and proceeds to present information prerequisite to using the product, including operating
instructions and precautions, and tips on daily inspections and care.
FCR PRIMA Console is a CR workstation intended to provide diagnostic quality images and measuring
function to aid the doctor in diagnosis, and also is a viewer for US referral images.
CAUTION
1 No part or all of this manual may be reproduced in any form without prior permission.
2 The information contained in this manual may be subject to change without prior notice.
3 FUJIFILM Corporation shall not be liable for malfunctions and damages resulting from
installation, relocation, remodeling, maintenance, and repair performed by dealers other than
those specified by FUJIFILM Corporation.
4 FUJIFILM Corporation shall not be liable for malfunctions and damages of FUJIFILM Corporation
products due to products of other manufacturers not supplied by FUJIFILM Corporation.
remodeling, maintenance, and repair using repair parts other than those specified by
FUJIFILM Corporation.
negligence of the precautions and operating methods contained in this manual.
7 FUJIFILM Corporation shall not be liable for malfunctions and damages resulting from use
under environment conditions outside the range specified for this product, such as the
power supply, installation environment, etc., as described in this manual.
natural disasters, such as fires, earthquakes, floods, lightning, etc.
Caution: R
x Only in the United States (Federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician)
This system is classified as a medical device under EC Directive 93/42/EEC.

This equipment has been designed on the assumption that the patient would not come into direct
contact with it or for operation by appropriately trained operator.
Process waste correctly, as stipulated by local law or any regulations that apply.
When discarding the CR-IR 391CL that incorporates the lithium battery, be sure to contact a licensed
waste disposal contractor because it cannot be disposed of as a general waste.
Trademarks
FCR is a trademark or a registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation.
Other holders’ trademarks

Windows Vista and Windows 7 are the registered trademark of US Microsoft Corporation in the U. S. A.
and other countries.
Windows is the registered trademark of US Microsoft Corporation in the U. S. A. and other countries.
Microsoft Internet Explorer logo is the registered trademark of US Microsoft Corporation in the U. S. A.
and other countries.
All other company names and product names described in this manual are the trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective holders.
Copyright © 2009-2010 FUJIFILM Corporation. All rights reserved.
ii FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B

How to Read This Guide
■ Basic Page Organization

The pages of this document is basically organized into the following elements:
Lead
Section title
Describes information that
A brief explanation of
is about to be explained in
the operation that is
this section together with
covered in the section.
supplementary information.
Item Title
7.2 Displaying Dialogs for Saving
A brief explanation of
the operation that is Saves images from the “Refer” window, “Image Viewer”, and “Study Utilities”.
covered under the item. 7.2.1 Starting from the “Refer” Window
Searches the patient and saves the images shown in the “Refer” window to each media.
This section describes how to display dialogs for saving from the “Refer” window according to the
Index
Explanatory Text
storage media.
A list of headings
A summary introduction to ■ Operation Window ■ Displaying Dialogs for Saving that offers you a
quick clue to opening
the topic described under ● “Main” Window - “Refer” Window 1. Search the patient.
chapters of interest.
the item, with precautions Select the patient and the image to be “4.2 Searching for Patients”
referred.
that should deserve 2. From the “patient list” (A), select the patient
special notice, if any. in a “Verified” study status.
7
→ The image is displayed in the “Refer” window (B).
3. Select the image (B) to be saved.
Image Storage from Each Window

4. Click the desired button (C) according to the
storage media.
Functions of Each Button
Display Windows Buttons Functions
Operation procedure
A window that opens Save to storage disks*1
(A) “7.3 Saving to Storage Disks” A sequence of
during an operation. Transmit to the DICOM Server*1
numbered operational
“7.4 Transmitting Studies to DICOM Server”
Save to PDI Disks*1

steps to guide the user
“7.7 Saving to PDI Disks” through an operation.
(B)
*1 The image whose study status is “Verified“ cannot
be saved or transmitted.
(C) *1
If the selected studies except for “Verified” are
selected, a message displays to verify.
To continue excluding the studies which are not able
*1 When the buttons (C) are not displayed, operation
to process, click [OK].
items must be added in the “Display Settings”.
“11.1.7 Display Settings of “Refer” window”
FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B 7-3
Page number
An indication of the
order of a particular
page in a chapter.
FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B iii

■ Marks Used in This Guide
Marks are used in the descriptions to mark supplementary information and information that must be observed while
using the FCR PRIMA Console. For your safety and correct use, always observe a Warning or Caution.
Marks Contents
Indicates a dangerous situation which, if you ignored or could not follow for
WARNING some reason, could result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if you ignored or could not follow for
CAUTION some reason, could result in a slight or moderate degree of personal injury or
material damage.
Indicates information that should be noted.
Indicates information that may be helpful.
Indicates an item that provides details of the procedure or related information.
■ Manners of Description
In this Reference Guide, button names, menu actions, window names and messages appearing in the
operational windows are designated in the following manners:
● Buttons (example)
[Complete]
Names of buttons in the operational windows are enclosed
in brackets [ ], regardless of their shape.
● Menus (example)
[Annotation] – [Rectangle]
Menu names are enclosed in brackets [ ].
Sequences of menu choices are designated in the
format [ ] – [ ].
In this example, users are supposed to choose
[Annotation] first, then [Rectangle].
● Windows (example)
“Read Image” window
Window names are enclosed in quotation marks “ ”.
iv FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B

Contents
Introduction.............................................................................................................................ii
How to Read This Guide......................................................................................................iii
■ Basic Page Organization...............................................................................................................iii
■ Marks Used in This Guide.............................................................................................................iv
■ Manners of Description..................................................................................................................iv
Contents..................................................................................................................................v
Chapter 1 Safety Information
1.1 Precautions Before Operating This Equipment............................................. 1-2

1.2 Notes on Using Medical Electrical Equipment
(for Safety Assurance and Risk Prevention)................................................... 1-3
1.3 Safety..................................................................................................................... 1-4
■ Preventing Explosion..................................................................................................................1-4
■ Preventing Electrical Shock........................................................................................................1-4
■ Connection Instruction................................................................................................................1-4
■ Electromagnetic Compatibility Instruction..................................................................................1-5
1.4 Precautions in Using the FCR PRIMA Console.............................................. 1-7
■ Precautions when Using.............................................................................................................1-7
■ Precautions when Installing........................................................................................................1-8
■ Precautions when Reading Images...........................................................................................1-9
■ Precautions when Managing Data...........................................................................................1-10
■ Precautions when Processing Image......................................................................................1-10
■ Precautions when Exposing.....................................................................................................1-11
■ Precautions when Saving Data................................................................................................1-11
■ Precaution when Outputting.....................................................................................................1-11
1.5 Labels.................................................................................................................. 1-12
■ FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) Labels..........................................................................1-12
Chapter 2 Product Overview
2.1 FCR PRIMA Console Highlights........................................................................ 2-2

■ Main Features of FCR PRIMA Console.....................................................................................2-2
■ System Configuration Example..................................................................................................2-3
■ Restrictions..................................................................................................................................2-4
2.2 Name and Window of Each Part....................................................................... 2-5
■ Display Window...........................................................................................................................2-5
2.3 Flow for Utilizing the System............................................................................. 2-6
FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B v

2.4 Version Information............................................................................................. 2-8
■ Operation Windows....................................................................................................................2-8
■ Checking Version Information....................................................................................................2-8
2.5 Starting up and Exiting....................................................................................... 2-9
2.5.1 Starting up FCR PRIMA Console........................................................... 2-9
■ Operation Device / Operation Windows....................................................................................2-9
■ Starting up.................................................................................................................................2-10
■ Starting up the Server Application ...........................................................................................2-11
■ Starting up the Client Application.............................................................................................2-11
■ Starting up Each Function from the Server Application Icon..................................................2-11
2.5.2 Exiting FCR PRIMA Console................................................................. 2-12
■ Operation Windows..................................................................................................................2-12
■ Logging off the Current User....................................................................................................2-13
■ Exiting the Client Application....................................................................................................2-13
■ Exiting the Server Application .................................................................................................2-13
■ Shutting down the PC...............................................................................................................2-14
2.6 Protecting the PC when Temporarily Leaving the Site................................ 2-15
■ Locking the PC..........................................................................................................................2-15
■ Unlocking the PC......................................................................................................................2-15
2.7 Before Using Disks........................................................................................... 2-16
■ Precautions...............................................................................................................................2-16
■ Disk Types.................................................................................................................................2-17
■ Drive Types................................................................................................................................2-18
2.8 Setting up Disks................................................................................................ 2-19
■ Setting up Disks........................................................................................................................2-20
■ Ejecting Disk..............................................................................................................................2-21
■ Copying Disks...........................................................................................................................2-22
■ When a Disk Becoming Full.....................................................................................................2-23
Chapter 3 Taking and Reading X-ray of a Subject
3.1 Flow of Taking and Reading X-ray.................................................................... 3-2

3.2 Registering the Patient Information to be Exposed....................................... 3-3
■ Operation Window......................................................................................................................3-3
■ Registering New Patient Information.........................................................................................3-3
■ Registering through DICOM MWM Server (Optional)..............................................................3-4
3.3 Exposing Images................................................................................................. 3-5
■ Taking X-rays...............................................................................................................................3-5
vi FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B

3.4 Reading and Viewing.......................................................................................... 3-7
■ Read Images in the Cassette.....................................................................................................3-7
■ Viewing Read Images.................................................................................................................3-8
■ Finishing Exposure / Reading....................................................................................................3-9
3.5 Import Various Images and Refer................................................................... 3-10
■ Operation Window....................................................................................................................3-10
■ Importing DICOM Images from the Media or Folder (Import DICOM Off-line)......................3-10
Chapter 4 Searching Patients and Referring Studies
4.1 Flow for Searching / Referring ......................................................................... 4-2

4.2 Searching for Patients........................................................................................ 4-3
■ Searching for Patients.................................................................................................................4-3
4.3 Referring Images................................................................................................. 4-5
■ Manipulating Studies...................................................................................................................4-5
Chapter 5 Verifying and Processing Images
5.1 Flow of Verifying and Processing Images....................................................... 5-2

5.2 Outline of "Image Viewer" Window.................................................................. 5-3
5.3 Selecting and Arranging Images....................................................................... 5-4
■ Descriptions of Functions...........................................................................................................5-4
■ Switching Displayed Images......................................................................................................5-5
■ Adding a Sub-window and Displaying the Image......................................................................5-5
■ Displaying Multiple Sub-windows Lined up...............................................................................5-6
■ Displaying Multiple Images Lined up in the Sub-window..........................................................5-6
■ Maximizing the Sub-window.......................................................................................................5-6
■ Switching the Display Position...................................................................................................5-7
■ Displaying/Hiding Thumbnail Images.........................................................................................5-7
■ Displaying/Hiding Various Information on the Image................................................................5-7
■ Displaying as a Cine Display Mode...........................................................................................5-8
■ Registering Displayed Images as a Key Image........................................................................5-8
■ Clearing Images..........................................................................................................................5-8
5.4 Adjusting Image Display.................................................................................... 5-9
■ Descriptions of Functions...........................................................................................................5-9
■ Changing the Gradation (Contrast and Density).....................................................................5-10
FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B vii

■ Magnifying/Reducing................................................................................................................5-11
■ Magnifying Images by Magnifying Glass.................................................................................5-12
■ Moving Images..........................................................................................................................5-12
■ Reversing Images.....................................................................................................................5-13
■ Rotating and Flipping................................................................................................................5-13
■ Editing FCR Image Processing Parameters............................................................................5-14
■ Registering Preset Image Processing Settings.......................................................................5-16
■ Applying Preset Image Processing Settings...........................................................................5-17
■ Linking Image Processing Among Multiple Images................................................................5-17
■ Resetting the Image Processings............................................................................................5-17
5.5 Adding Annotations on Images...................................................................... 5-18
■ Descriptions of Functions.........................................................................................................5-18
■ Adding Arrows/Shapes (Ellipses, Rectangles, and Polygons)...............................................5-19
■ Adding Texts..............................................................................................................................5-20
■ Adding Markers.........................................................................................................................5-20
■ Adding Measured Lengths.......................................................................................................5-21
■ Adding Measured Simplified Cardiothoracic Ratios................................................................5-21
■ Adding Measured Cardiothoracic Ratios.................................................................................5-22
■ Adding Measured Interline Angles...........................................................................................5-23
■ Adding Measured Dual Angles.................................................................................................5-24
■ Adding Measured Cobb Angles...............................................................................................5-25
■ Adding Measured Pixel Values................................................................................................5-25
■ Adding Measured Various ROIs...............................................................................................5-25
■ Editing the Added Annotations.................................................................................................5-26
■ Deleting Added Annotations.....................................................................................................5-27
5.6 Free Drawing on “Image Viewer” for Informed Consent............................ 5-28
■ Using the Free Drawing Function.............................................................................................5-28
5.7 Saving/Verifying/Suspending Images............................................................ 5-30
■ Saving the Image Processing Result and Annotation.............................................................5-30
■ Verifying/Suspending Images...................................................................................................5-30
Chapter 6 Using Report Function
6.1 Outline of “Report” Window.............................................................................. 6-2

6.2 Creating/Editing the Report............................................................................... 6-3
■ Creating/Editing the Report........................................................................................................6-4
■ Saving/Verifying a Report...........................................................................................................6-5
■ Deleting Reports.........................................................................................................................6-5
viii FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B

6.3 Editing the Schema or Fixed Phrase................................................................ 6-6
■ Editing the Schema.....................................................................................................................6-7
■ Editing the Fixed Phrase.............................................................................................................6-7
■ Registering the Fixed Phrase.....................................................................................................6-7
Chapter 7 Image Storage from Each Window
7.1 Relationships between Windows and Storage Destinations....................... 7-2

7.2 Displaying Dialogs for Saving........................................................................... 7-3
7.2.1 Starting from the “Refer” Window......................................................... 7-3
■ Displaying Dialogs for Saving.....................................................................................................7-3
7.2.2 Starting from the “Image Viewer”.......................................................... 7-4
7.2.3 Starting from the “Study Utilities”......................................................... 7-5
7.3 Saving to Storage Disks..................................................................................... 7-6
■ Saving the Screen.......................................................................................................................7-6
7.4 Transmitting Studies to DICOM Server (Optional)......................................... 7-7
7.5 Saving to Work Disks.......................................................................................... 7-8
7.6 Saving in a General-Purpose File Format (Optional)................................... 7-10
■ Saving the Screen.....................................................................................................................7-11
7.7 Saving to PDI Disks........................................................................................... 7-13
■ Saving the Screen.....................................................................................................................7-14
Chapter 8 Image Print from Each Window
8.1 Printing Types and Flow..................................................................................... 8-2

■ Types of Printing.........................................................................................................................8-2
■ Printing Flow................................................................................................................................8-3
FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B ix
8.2 Displaying Print Dialogs..................................................................................... 8-4
8.2.1 Starting from the “Refer” Window......................................................... 8-4
■ Displaying Print Dialogs..............................................................................................................8-4
8.2.2 Starting from the “Image Viewer”.......................................................... 8-5
8.2.3 Starting from the “Study Utilities”......................................................... 8-6
8.3 Printing on a Film (Optional).............................................................................. 8-7
■ Printing on a Film........................................................................................................................8-7
8.4 Free Layout Printing........................................................................................... 8-9
■ Free Layout Printing..................................................................................................................8-10
■ Creating Additional Image Information Formats......................................................................8-12
■ Editing Additional Image Information Formats.........................................................................8-12
■ Deleting Formats.......................................................................................................................8-12
■ Finishing....................................................................................................................................8-12
8.5 Printing Report................................................................................................... 8-13
■ Printing a Report.......................................................................................................................8-13
■ Saving the Report as PDF File.................................................................................................8-13
Chapter 9 Editing Study Information
9.1 Starting up the Editing Function....................................................................... 9-2

■ Starting up...................................................................................................................................9-2
9.2 Adding Exposure Menus.................................................................................... 9-4
■ Adding an Exposure Menu.........................................................................................................9-4
9.3 Changing Exposure Menus............................................................................... 9-5
■ Changing an Exposure Menu.....................................................................................................9-5
9.4 Deleting Exposure Menus/Canceling the Deletion........................................ 9-6
■ Deleting an Exposure Menu/ Canceling the Deletion...............................................................9-6
9.5 Inactivating Exposed Images/Activating the Inactivated Images................ 9-7
■ Inactivating/Activating Exposure Menus....................................................................................9-7
x FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B
9.6 Registering Re-exposure Menus...................................................................... 9-8
■ Registering a Re-exposure Menu..............................................................................................9-8
9.7 Exchanging Images............................................................................................ 9-9
■ Exchange Incorrectly Read Images to the Correct Exposure Menus......................................9-9
9.8 Setting for Printing, Saving, and Transmitting............................................. 9-10
■ Setting up the Destination and Timing for Outputting and Saving..........................................9-10
■ Changing the Detailed Settings................................................................................................9-11
9.9 Editing Patient Information.............................................................................. 9-13
■ Editing Patient Information........................................................................................................9-14
9.10 Changing the Order of Menus in the “Read Image” Window..................... 9-15
Chapter 10 Verifying with the Indicators
10.1 Viewing Indicators and Activating Functions............................................... 10-2

10.1.1 Viewing Indicators.................................................................................. 10-2
■ Position of “Indicator” Window ................................................................................................10-2
■ Indicator State and Corresponding Notice...............................................................................10-2
10.1.2 Activating Functions from Indicators.................................................. 10-3
■ Opening “Indicator” Windows...................................................................................................10-3
10.2 Verifying the Status of Image Reader and Cleaning Procedures.............. 10-4
■ Verifying the Status of the Image Reader................................................................................10-4
■ Cleaning the Scanner of the Image Reader............................................................................10-4
■ Verifying the status of the Image Reader and Exiting Scanner Cleaning..............................10-4
10.3 Verifying Disk Status and Maintenance......................................................... 10-5
■ Verifying Disk Status.................................................................................................................10-5
■ Disk Maintenance.....................................................................................................................10-6
■ Verifying Disk Status of the Image Reader and Exiting Scanner Cleaning............................10-6
10.4 Verifying NAS Status (Optional)...................................................................... 10-7
■ Verifying NAS Status.................................................................................................................10-7
■ Exiting the Verification of NAS Status......................................................................................10-7
FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B xi

10.5 Verifying Film Printer Status (Optional)......................................................... 10-8
■ Verifying Film Printer Status.....................................................................................................10-8
■ Verifying the Status of the Film Printer.....................................................................................10-8
10.6 Verifying Image Output Status ....................................................................... 10-9
■ Verifying Image Output Status..................................................................................................10-9
■ Canceling Image Output...........................................................................................................10-9
■ Outputting an Image Again that Has Once Failed to be Output.............................................10-9
■ Exiting the Verification of Image Output Status.......................................................................10-9
10.7 Verifying Events (Errors, Warnings or Information).................................. 10-10
■ Operation Windows................................................................................................................10-10
■ Verifying Events......................................................................................................................10-10
■ Exiting Events Verification......................................................................................................10-10
Chapter 11 Changing Display Settings of

the “Main” Window and “Image Viewer”
11.1 Display Settings of the “Main” Window......................................................... 11-2

11.1.1 Starting up and Shutting Down the Display Setting Function........ 11-2
■ Starting up.................................................................................................................................11-2
■ Shutting Down...........................................................................................................................11-2
11.1.2 Initial Display Settings of the “Main” Window................................... 11-3
■ Setting the Initial Display when Started up..............................................................................11-3
11.1.3 Display Settings of “ID input” Window............................................... 11-4
■ Setting Items and Their Order to be Displayed in the “ID input” Window...............................11-4
11.1.4 Display Settings of “Patient List” Window......................................... 11-5
■ Setting the Display Contents in the “Patient List” Window......................................................11-5
11.1.5 Display Settings of “FCR-Menus” Window........................................ 11-6
■ Setting the Display Contents in the “FCR-Menus” Window....................................................11-6
11.1.6 Display Settings of Exposing and Reading........................................ 11-7
■ Setting Behavior on Selecting an Exposure Menu and
on Reading Images with the “Image Viewer”..........................................................................11-7
11.1.7 Display Settings of “Refer” window.................................................... 11-8
xii FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B

■ Setting Modalities to be Displayed in the Study List................................................................11-8
■ Setting the Operation Icons in the Study List...........................................................................11-8
11.1.8 Setting the Font Size in the “Main” Window...................................... 11-9
■ Setting the Font Size for the “Main” Window...........................................................................11-9
11.2 Changing Settings of “Image Viewer” Window.......................................... 11-10
11.2.1 Starting the Customize Function....................................................... 11-10
■ Operation Window..................................................................................................................11-10
■ Starting Up...............................................................................................................................11-10
11.2.2 Initial Settings of Annotation...............................................................11-11
■ Operation Window.................................................................................................................. 11-11
■ Setting the Display/Tag Display of Annotations..................................................................... 11-11
11.2.3 Setting the Attribute Information........................................................ 11-12
■ Setting Image Attribute Information........................................................................................11-12
11.2.4 Setting Reading Protocol.................................................................... 11-13
■ Setting the Default Display Layout of each Modality.............................................................11-13
11.2.5 Display Settings of Toolbar................................................................. 11-14
■ Setting the Display of Toolbar.................................................................................................11-14
11.2.6 Display Settings of Report.................................................................. 11-15
■ Setting the Display of Report..................................................................................................11-15
■ Creating a Format...................................................................................................................11-16
■ Adding/Editing Template Tags................................................................................................11-17
■ Editing Formats.......................................................................................................................11-17
11.2.7 Display Setting of “Image Viewer” Window..................................... 11-18
■ Setting Actions during Image Display or Storage..................................................................11-18
11.2.8 Returning to Standard Settings.......................................................... 11-20
■ Returning to Standard Settings..............................................................................................11-20
11.2.9 Importing/Exporting Settings............................................................. 11-21
■ Import Settings........................................................................................................................11-21
■ Export Settings........................................................................................................................11-21
FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B xiii

Chapter 12 Using “Study Utilities”
12.1 Functions of “Study Utilities”.......................................................................... 12-2

12.2 Starting up and Exiting “Study Utilities”....................................................... 12-5
■ Operation windows...................................................................................................................12-5
■ Starting up “Study Utilities”.......................................................................................................12-5
■ Exiting........................................................................................................................................12-5
12.3 Searching for Studies and Creating New Queries....................................... 12-6
12.3.1 Searching for Studies............................................................................ 12-6
■ Searching for Studies................................................................................................................12-6
■ Narrowing down Search...........................................................................................................12-7
12.3.2 Creating New Queries............................................................................ 12-8
■ Creating New Queries..............................................................................................................12-8
12.3.3 Editing Queries..................................................................................... 12-11
■ Editing Queries........................................................................................................................12-11
12.4 Manipulating Studies...................................................................................... 12-12
■ Descriptions of Functions.......................................................................................................12-12
■ Starting up the “Image Viewer”...............................................................................................12-13
■ Reconducting a Study and Editing its Study Information......................................................12-14
■ Locking and Unlocking Studies..............................................................................................12-14
■ Completing and Verifying Studies..........................................................................................12-14
■ Loading Images from a Disk...................................................................................................12-15
■ Deleting Studies......................................................................................................................12-16
■ Saving, Printing, and Transmitting Study Images..................................................................12-17
Chapter 13 Configuring “Client Utilities”
13.1 Setting Items of “Client Utilities”.................................................................... 13-2

13.2 Starting up and Exiting “Client Utilities”....................................................... 13-2
■ Starting up the “Client Utilities”.................................................................................................13-3
■ Exiting the “Client Utilities”........................................................................................................13-3
13.3 Maintaining Patient Information...................................................................... 13-4
■ Registering New Patient Information.......................................................................................13-4
■ Searching Patient Information..................................................................................................13-5
■ Editing Patient Information........................................................................................................13-6
xiv FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B

■ Deleting Patient Information.....................................................................................................13-6
■ Finishing Maintenance of Patient Information.........................................................................13-6
13.4 Verifying the IP Use Frequency....................................................................... 13-7
■ Verifying the IP Use Frequency................................................................................................13-7
■ Finishing Verification of IP Use Frequency..............................................................................13-7
13.5 Setting User Information (For Administrator)............................................... 13-8
13.5.1 User Information Maintenance............................................................. 13-8
■ Registering New User Information...........................................................................................13-9
■ Editing User Information.........................................................................................................13-10
■ Changing Display Order of Users..........................................................................................13-11
■ Deleting User Information.......................................................................................................13-11
■ Exiting User Information Maintenance...................................................................................13-11
13.5.2 Changing User Group Operational Authorities............................... 13-12
■ Descriptions of Functions.......................................................................................................13-12
■ Changing User Group Operational Authorities......................................................................13-13
■ Exiting the Change of User Group Operational Authorities..................................................13-13
13.5.3 Setting Images for Display in the “User Selection” Window......... 13-14
■ Adding Images for Display in the “User Selection” Window.................................................13-14
■ Deleting an Displayed Image from the “User Selection” Window........................................13-15
■ Exiting the Setup of Display Image........................................................................................13-15
13.6 Editing Information about the Logged-in User........................................... 13-16
■ Editing Information on the Logged-in User............................................................................13-16
13.7 Verifying History Information........................................................................ 13-17
■ Verifying the Login/Logoff History...........................................................................................13-18
■ Verifying the Study Access History.........................................................................................13-18
■ Verifying the Image Storage/Print History..............................................................................13-19
■ Verifying the Backup/Restoration History..............................................................................13-19
■ Exiting Verification of History..................................................................................................13-19
13.8 Disk Maintenance ........................................................................................... 13-20
■ Updating Display of Disk Information.....................................................................................13-21
■ Replacing Disks......................................................................................................................13-21
■ Setting Disks as “Write Enabled” or “Write Disabled”............................................................13-22
■ Restoring Disks after Mismatch Occurred.............................................................................13-22
■ Restoring Information in Disks to Database..........................................................................13-23
■ Exiting Disk Maintenance.......................................................................................................13-23
FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B xv

Chapter 14 Setting “User Utilities”
14.1 Setting “User Utilities”...................................................................................... 14-2

14.2 Starting up and Exiting the “User Utilities”................................................... 14-3
■ Starting up the “User Utilities”...................................................................................................14-3
■ Exiting the “User Utilities”..........................................................................................................14-4
14.3 Setting the Exposure Menu and Study Menu............................................... 14-5
14.3.1 Setting the Exposure Menu................................................................... 14-6
■ Creating New “Exposure Menu”...............................................................................................14-6
■ Editing Exposure Menu..........................................................................................................14-13
■ Deleting Exposure Menu........................................................................................................14-13
14.3.2 Setting Study Menu.............................................................................. 14-14
■ Creating New Study Menu.....................................................................................................14-14
■ Editing Study Menus...............................................................................................................14-17
■ Deleting Study Menus.............................................................................................................14-17
14.3.3 Setting the Display Menu Group........................................................ 14-18
■ Creating New Display Menu Group.......................................................................................14-18
■ Editing Display Group Menu...................................................................................................14-19
14.4 Setting the Character String Annotated on a Film..................................... 14-21
■ Registering/Editing Character String Annotated on a Film...................................................14-21
■ Deleting Character String to be Annotated on Film...............................................................14-22
■ Changing Position of a Character String Button....................................................................14-22
■ Applying Settings to Film Mark...............................................................................................14-22
14.5 Setting of Printing, Saving and Transmitting Images................................ 14-23
■ Setting the Output Destination...............................................................................................14-23
14.6 Auto-Determine Settings................................................................................ 14-27
■ Set the Auto-Determine Time Period.....................................................................................14-27
14.7 Image Deletion Settings................................................................................. 14-28
■ Changing the Time Period for Data Storage.........................................................................14-28
14.8 Backup Notification Settings......................................................................... 14-29
■ Setting Backup Notification.....................................................................................................14-29
14.9 Automatically Startup Settings..................................................................... 14-30
xvi FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B

■ Client Application Startup Settings.........................................................................................14-30
14.10 Prefix Display Settings................................................................................... 14-31
■ Setting Patient Prefix..............................................................................................................14-31
14.11 Setting Image Incidental Information Display Contents........................... 14-32
14.12 Loading Patient Information.......................................................................... 14-33
■ Patient Information Input Format............................................................................................14-33
■ Creating a File of Patient Information to Import.....................................................................14-34
■ Importing Patient Information.................................................................................................14-36
14.13 Media Consistency Check............................................................................. 14-37
■ Media Consistency Check......................................................................................................14-37
■ Result and Remedy................................................................................................................14-38
14.14 History Information Consistency Check..................................................... 14-40
■ History Information Consistency Check.................................................................................14-40
14.15 Automatically Logoff....................................................................................... 14-41
■ Setting Automatic Logoff.........................................................................................................14-41
14.16 Adding/Deleting User Marker........................................................................ 14-42
■ Registering User’s Markers....................................................................................................14-42
■ Removing User’s Markers......................................................................................................14-42
14.17 Preset Setting................................................................................................... 14-43
■ Assigning Preset.....................................................................................................................14-43
Chapter 15 Troubleshooting
15.1 PC does Not Start.............................................................................................. 15-2

15.2 PC is Inoperative............................................................................................... 15-3
15.3 PC does Not Shut down................................................................................... 15-4
15.4 Event Indicator is Blinking............................................................................... 15-5
15.5 Error Message is Displayed............................................................................. 15-6
15.6 Image is Streaked.............................................................................................. 15-7
15.7 Message “Not Logged In” is Displayed
when Trying to Operate the Screen................................................................ 15-8
15.8 Window Disappears.......................................................................................... 15-9
FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B xvii

15.9 Disk cannot be Removed............................................................................... 15-10
15.10 Toolbar is Not Displayed on “Image Viewer”.............................................. 15-11
15.11 Study was Scheduled or Registered but Patient List is Unchanged...... 15-12
15.12 Unintended Studies Appear on Patient List................................................ 15-13
15.13 Unable to Print or Save Images from “Image Viewer”.............................. 15-14
15.14 The “Webpage unavailable while offline” Dialog is Appeared................. 15-15
Chapter 16 Daily Inspection and Maintenance
16.1 Daily Inspections and Maintenances............................................................. 16-2

16.2 Backing up Information of Patient, Setting, Log, and Report.................... 16-3
■ Starting up the “Backup Utilities”..............................................................................................16-4
■ Backing up.................................................................................................................................16-5
■ Restoring...................................................................................................................................16-6
■ Collecting Maintenance Log.....................................................................................................16-7
■ Shutting down the “Backup Utilities”........................................................................................16-8
16.3 Maintenance Record Sheet.............................................................................. 16-9
16.4 Maintenance and Inspection.......................................................................... 16-10
■ Maintenance and Inspection Items Assigned to Specified Dealer.......................................16-10
Appendix A Main Specifications
A.1 Specifications......................................................................................................A-2
■ PC............................................................................................................................................... A-2
■ Standard Monitor........................................................................................................................ A-3
■ DIN Standard-Compliant Monitor.............................................................................................. A-4
A.2 External View and Weight..................................................................................A-5
■ PC............................................................................................................................................... A-5
xviii FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B

Appendix Z Precautions for Exposure
Z.1 Precautions to Take Before Exposure............................................................. Z-2

Z.2 Precautions to Take in Each Mode................................................................... Z-3
Z.2.1 Precautions for Exposure in the AUTO MODE.................................... Z-3
Z.2.2 Precautions for Exposure in the SEMI-AUTO MODE.......................... Z-6
Z.2.3 Precautions for Exposure in the FIX MODE......................................... Z-6
Z.3 Other Precautions............................................................................................... Z-7
Index
FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B xix

xx FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B
1
Safety Information
Chapter
Safety Information
1.1 Precautions Before Operating This Equipment................ 1-2

(for Safety Assurance and Risk Prevention)..................... 1-3
1.3 Safety....................................................................................1-4
1.4 Precautions in Using the FCR PRIMA Console................. 1-7
1.5 Labels..................................................................................1-12

1.1 Precautions Before
1
Operating This Equipment
Safety Information
Before using this equipment, please read “Precautions Before Operating This Equipment” carefully so
that you can operate it correctly.
Whenever you operate this equipment, be sure to observe those precautions. Failure to do so may
cause injuries or property damages.
The institution where the equipment is installed is responsible for its use and
maintenance.
In addition, this equipment should not be used by persons other than doctors
or suitably trained staff.
Process waste correctly, as stipulated by local law or any regulations that

apply.
1-2 FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B

1
(for Safety Assurance and Risk Prevention)
Safety Information
Please read through these notes before using the equipment.
● Notes on Using Medical Electrical Equipment (for Safety Assurance and Risk Prevention)
1 Allow only skilled personnel to use the equipment.
2 Take notice of these precautions in installing the equipment:
(1) Locate the equipment to guard against splashes of water.
(2) Locate the equipment to protect against any ambient conditions that could adversely affect its
performance, such as atmospheric pressure, temperature, humidity, ventilation, sunlight, dust
and air containing salt or sulfur content.
(3) Locate the equipment to keep it stable, protected from tilting, vibration, impact (including
impact during transit) and so on.
(4) Do not install the equipment where chemicals are stored or in or near sources of gases.
(5) Observe the line frequency and voltage and the allowable current (or power consumption).
(6) If the equipment is powered from batteries, check their status (standing, polarities and so on).
(7) Connect the ground wire properly.
3 Before using the equipment, take notice of these precautions:
(1) Check the switches for contact, polarities and dial settings, the meters and so on to ensure
that the equipment works properly.
(2) Check that the ground wire is fully connected.
(3) Check that all cords are connected correctly and fully.
(4) Remember fully that combined use of equipment could cause incorrect diagnoses, unsafety, or else.
(5) Recheck the external circuits that are directly connected to the patient.
(6) If the equipment is powered from batteries, check the batteries.
4 While the equipment is in operation, take notice of these precautions:
(1) Be careful not to exceed the specified time and dosage limits for diagnostics or treatment.
(2) Keep a constant eye on the equipment in general and the patient to ensure that they remain normal.
(3) Whenever the equipment or the patient is found abnormal, take appropriate remedial action,
such as shutting down the equipment with care to cause no harm to the patient.
5 After using the equipment, take notice of these precautions:
(1) Reset the switches, dials and other controls to their initial status in specified routines before turning off the equipment.
(2) Do not use undue force in disconnecting cords, as by pulling them out of position.
(3) Take notice of these precautions in storing the equipment:
I Store the equipment to guard against splashes of water.
II Store the equipment to protect against any ambient conditions that could adversely affect
its performance, such as atmospheric pressure, temperature, humidity, ventilation,
sunlight, dust and air containing salt or sulfur content.
III Store the equipment to keep it stable, protected from tilting, vibration, impact (including
impact during transit) and so on.
IV Do not store the equipment where chemicals are stored or in or near sources of gases.
(4) Clean the components, cords, directors and so on and then sort and keep them in order.
(5) Keep the equipment clean to prepare for the next sessions of operation.
6 If the product fails, do not tamper with the product but mark it properly and have it repaired by professionals.
7 Do not make unauthorized modifications to the equipment.
8 Maintenance and inspection
(1) Inspect the equipment and parts periodically.
(2) Before putting the equipment back to reuse after it has been left out of service for a certain
length of time, check that the equipment works normally and safely.
9 Other
Abide by instructions in the Operation Manual for proper equipment handling.

1.3 Safety
1
Read this section before using the equipment to ensure proper handling.
Safety Information
■ Preventing Explosion
WARNING
Because this equipment is not explosion-proof, do not use combustible and explosive gases
near the equipment.
■ Preventing Electrical Shock

WARNING
To prevent electrical shock, observe these precautions by all means.
● Never open the equipment covers. Hands touching a high-voltage zone inside may cause
electrical shock.
● Install the equipment where it will not be splashed with water.
● Check that the equipment is fully grounded.
● Check that all cords are connected correctly and safely.
● While this equipment is in operation, pay due attention not to have the patient come into
direct contact with it.
■ Connection Instruction
CAUTION
Use external devices of specified types to connect to the equipment.

■ Electromagnetic Compatibility Instruction
This equipment complies with the following electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) standard by comforting 1
to the requirements of IEC 60601-1-2:2001+A1:2004/EN 60601-1-2:2001+A1:2006.
Safety Information
EMC Standard: CISPR 22:2005/EN 55022:2006
CISPR 24:1997 + A1:2001 + A2:2002/EN 55024:1998+A1:2001+A2:2003
IEC 61000-3-2:2005/EN 61000-3-2:2006
IEC 61000-3-3:1994 + A1:2001 +A2:2005
However, there is no guarantee that harmful electromagnetic interference will not occur in any
installation environment.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy. In a particular environment,
e.g., the equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions or any device that is
not compliant with the EMC Standard is used in a surrounding area, harmful interference may result,
causing the equipment or surrounding device to malfunction. If this equipment causes harmful
interference to other equipment or receives harmful interference from other equipment, you are
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
● Reorient or relocate the equipment.
● Increase the separation between the equipment and the affected equipment.
● Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the affected
equipment is connected.
If the problem persists, discontinue the use of the equipment and consult the manufacturer of the
affected equipment or our official dealer.
CAUTION
Keep the equipment away from sources of strong electromagnetic radiation.
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic emissions
The CR-IR 391CL is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified
below. The customer or the user of the CR-IR 391CL should assure that it is used in
such an environment.
Emissions test Compliance
Noise terminal voltage

Class B
CISPR22
Electric field noise strength

Class B
CISPR22
Harmonic emissions
Class D
EN61000-3-2
IEC61000-3-2
Voltage fluctuations/
flicker emissions
Complies
EN61000-3-3
IEC61000-3-3

Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic immunity
1 The CR-IR 391CL is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below.
The customer or the user of the CR-IR 391CL should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Safety Information
Immunity test EN/IEC 60601 test level Compliance level
Electrostatic discharge ±2kV contact ±2kV contact

(ESD) ±4kV contact ±4kV contact
±2kV air ±2kV air
EN61000-4-2 ±4kV air ±4kV air
IEC61000-4-2 ±8kV air ±8kV air
Electrical fast transient/burst

±1kV for power supply lines ±1kV for power supply lines
EN61000-4-4
±0.5kV for input/output lines ±0.5kV for input/output lines
IEC61000-4-4
±0.5, ±1kV ±0.5, ±1kV

Surge
differential mode differential mode
EN61000-4-5
±0.5, ±1.0, ±2.0kV ±0.5, ±1.0, ±2.0kV
IEC61000-4-5
common mode common mode
<5% UT <5% UT
(>95% dip in UT) (>95% dip in UT)
for 0.5 cycle for 0.5 cycle
Voltage dips, short interruptions and
voltage variations on power supply
70% UT 70% UT
input lines
(30% dip in UT) (30% dip in UT)
for 25 cycles for 25 cycles
EN61000-4-11
IEC61000-4-11
<5% UT <5% UT
(>95% dip in UT) (>95% dip in UT)
for 250 cycles for 250 cycles
Power frequency (50/60Hz)

magnetic field
1 A/m 1 A/m
EN61000-4-8
IEC61000-4-8
NOTE: UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic immunity
The CR-IR 391CL is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below.
The customer or the user of the CR-IR 391CL should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Immunity test EN/IEC 60601 test level Compliance level
Conducted RF 3 Vrms
EN61000-4-6 150 kHz to 80 MHz 3 Vrms
IEC61000-4-6
Radiated RF 3 V/m
EN61000-4-3 80 MHz to 1 GHz 3 V/m
IEC61000-4-3

1.4 Precautions in Using the FCR PRIMA
1
Console
Safety Information
■ Precautions when Using
● Operating Precautions
• When working steadily on the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) over an extended period of time,
take breaks for 10 to 15 minutes after every hour to rest your eyes and hands.
• Verify that time and date which displayed on the “Indicator” window is correct before using the FCR
PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL). Time and date which displayed on the “Indicator” window are
recorded as a time and date at the time of saving images to the disk.
• Turn the power of this equipment or the computer installed this software off at least once a day with
the shutting down operation.
The FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) is not built for continuous running.
• Use a screensaver when displaying the same image for extended period of time. If your screensaver
fails to start up, consult our official dealer.
If the same image is displayed for a long time, the burn-in or residual image of the previous image
may result when switching the display on the monitor.
• When selling this software alone, keep the CD cover of this software in a safe place because
important matters such as production number are written on it.
● Hardware Precautions
• Be careful not to splash the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) and its peripheral devices with
water and other liquids. Do not handle the equipment with wet hands.
• Before disposing of the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL), erase patients’ personal information
stored on it completely.
• Do not turn off the PC or DVD drive while FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) is in use. Images
saved on the PC or DVD drive might be damaged.
• Do not handle the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) with Windows Explorer running. The FCR
PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) or PC may freeze.
• When connecting FCR PRIMA Console and other study equipment, use the UTP (Unshield Twist Pair)
cable.
• Do not disconnect the network cable of the hub or the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) from the
port while image reading is in progress. If the network cable is accidentally disconnected, reinsert it
into the port immediately. Do not shut down the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) at this time. If
you disconnect the network cable of the hub or the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) from the port
and insert it back into position while image reading is in progress, the image reading process, might
take about 10 minutes to resume. If you shut down the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) or Image
Reader, the images being read might be lost.
• The FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) might be accidentally powered off due, for example, to a
power failure while image reading is in progress. When this happens, restart the PC and log in again
to reload the images. Make sure that the correct images have been read in response to your
exposure menu choice. After starting up and logging in the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL),
when double-clicking and starting to expose the study which was reading images at the time of
shutting down from the patient list on the “Main” window, images can be started to read again.
If the images loaded do not match your exposure menu choice, exchange or otherwise manipulate the
images to synchronize the exposure menu choice and the images with each other.

• Before you use an uninterruptible power supply with the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL), verify
1
its performance characteristics, such as the battery life. Replace the battery as required.
If the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) is forced to shut down while it is in operation due to
electric power failure or other causes, data could be lost.
Safety Information
You need to have a security, backup or any other relevant procedure programmed separately to save
images safely. Use of an uninterruptible power supply is recommended to protect against
emergencies.
• Do not connect any additional hardware to the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) in addition to the
hardware already connected to it.
It will result in malfunction.
•Do not connect the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) to a wide area network. It will result in
malfunction.
• If you need to install this software to the store-brought PC, contact our authorized dealer.
Also, use our company’s recommended computer for installing this software. Contact our authorized
dealer for the detailed specifications of the computer and the peripheral equipment.
• Use a commercial personal computer and monitor that passed our compatibility test with FCR PRIMA
Console (CR-IR 391CL). If non-approved ones are used, Fujifilm Corporation does not guarantee that
the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) will operate normally.
A commercial personal computer and monitors verified for compatibility are listed in Appendix A.
● Software Precautions
• Do not modify the Windows setting of the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL). Image input/output
might be disabled.
• While using the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL), do not double-click any file associated with any
other application software.
If you attempt to open a file associated with any other application software by double-clicking it, the
file would take a considerable time to open. If it is absolutely necessary to open that file, start up the
associated application software first and then control the application software to open the target file.
• Do not install any software in the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) in addition to the preinstalled
software. Do not uninstall any preinstalled software. Because the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR
391CL) comes with certain software preinstalled, installing additional software could interfere with the
preinstalled software, resulting in malfunction.
• Operate the disk drive with the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) applications.
• When selling this software alone, Fujifilm Corporation will not be responsible for any malfunction or
damage of the personal computer or the monitor.
■ Precautions when Installing

• Do not install the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) monitor in a place that is exposed to direct or
reflected intense light, such as sunlight or other bright illumination. If the monitor is installed at or near
sources of intense light, images may not be read correctly.
• Do not install the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) in a dusty place, such as on a floor. If it is
unavoidable to install the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) close to a floor, keep it at least 5 cm
above the floor.
If the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) is installed in a dusty environment, dust accumulating in
the power supply unit or other components could result in smoke or fire.
• Locate the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) unit so noises emitted from the unit while in
operation will not adversely affect the performance of medical examinations.
• When relocating the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) or the computer installed this software,
contact our authorized dealer.

■ Precautions when Reading Images
• Reading of images on the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) monitor should be carried out at the 1
responsibility of a user who is conscious of the intended use of the images and inherent differences
from film-based diagnostics.
Safety Information
• Verify the information that accompanies images and use it to aid in their reading. Pay particular
attention to patient information.
• When reading an image, be sure to verify the image flip information (front or back) and the actual
exposure condition of patient.
• Configure the image processing parameters for the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) to suit
display images.
Improperly configured image processing parameters could make correct image reading difficult.
• Adjust the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) to display images in a proper size.
The FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) may subject original images to interpolation processing
(display processing) to enable you to view the images in an optional display size. As a result, images
displayed in an improper size may not impart their intrinsic information.
• Multi-frame images may not be displayed in the set frame rate in case of cine play mode.
Confirm images after confirming the display of measured value of the frame rate.
● Monitor-related Precautions
• Luminance and contrast can be changed depending on the monitor types but never change them.
If it changed, an image may not be verified properly.
• Use the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) with proper screen contrast (high/low) settings.
Improper screen contrast (high/low) settings could make image reading difficult.
• Before reading images on FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL), make sure that the monitor is set at
the right angle for viewing. If the monitor is not set at the right angle, adjust it.
An improperly angled monitor could make it difficult to read images properly.
• Do not change the display setting (for portrait or landscape) of the LCD monitor that was set at time of
installation. If you need to change the display orientation setting, contact our authorized dealer.

■ Precautions when Managing Data
1 • Print and retain original images on a film (called an “original film”). The hard disk or disk mounted on
the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) unit is not intended for permanent storage of diagnostic
images.
Safety Information
● Media Management
• Do not leave disks for the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) in dusty places, hot or damp places,
places exposed to direct sunlight or in places that are subjected to sharp temperature differences.
• Duplicate (copy) every disk to which images are stored.
Check disks for consistency by following the instructions found in “13.13 Media Consistency Check”.
Images stored to the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) hard drive or disks could be lost as a result
of equipment or media faults. Further, some characteristics of a disk could make images stored on the
disk inaccessible for reading or writing if the disk has deteriorated over an extended period of usage,
even though it has been stored properly. An improperly stored disk could make images stored on it
inaccessible for reading or writing within months.
Neither FUJIFILM Corporation nor the vendor assumes any liability or responsibility for any loss of
images and data.
● Image Data Management

• Images that have been saved as “Processed” being selected can be reloaded into the FCR PRIMA
Console (CR-IR 391CL), but cannot be printed on a film (optional).
• Before deleting images on FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL), make sure that there is no problem if
the images are deleted. Although FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) allows you to delete images, if
you delete required images by mistake, you would have to make a re-exposure of the subject and
recapture the images.
■ Precautions when Processing Image

• Evaluation of the results of measurement performed on the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) is
your responsibility.
Images used for measurement on the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) may contain errors in
relation to the actual length of the subject, depending on how the images have been captured and
other conditions.
• When specifying coordinates on the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) monitor, specify them
correctly.
Incorrectly specified coordinates will deliver incorrect measurement results.

■ Precautions when Exposing
• When exposing an area where it is difficult to distinguish the exposed direction and the symmetric 1
body part, mark it using markers for example to avoid the confusion of the exposed direction and body
part.
Safety Information
• Erase manually a remaining image on an imaging plate exposured at large X-ray dose.
Incomplete erasing of an image on the imaging plate could make image reading difficult.
■ Precautions when Saving Data

● Common
• When importing image or study data into FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) (optional) or saving
from FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) to media such as CD, be very careful to check the image
or study data and patient information.
● Media
• Do not use the disks that are dedicated to image storage on the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL)
for any other use. Images stored on those disks would be made inaccessible for browsing.
• Use disks that meet the requirements listed in “2.7 Before Using Disks”.
• Be careful not to confuse the DVD disk with the CD-R or DVD-R disk for PDI because the CD-R or
DVD-R disk for PDI to be given to the patient is created using the DVD drive to create DVD disks.
When creating a CD-R or DVD-R disk for PDI, write information (patient name, patient ID, birth date,
disk creation date, study date, facility name) on the front of the CD-R or DVD-R disk in order to
distinguish it from DVD+RW/-RW disk.
When giving the created disk for PDI to the patient, advise the patient that the contents of the disk is
for reference.
• Do not handle the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) in a Windows Explorer operation, unless
otherwise specified in this Reference Guide.
If you eject a disk in a Windows Explorer operation, the data stored on the disk could be corrupted as
a consequence of the disk having been ejected while images were being written to or read from it, or
your application might not be able to eject it.
Further, when you browse through information stored on the disk, the information might take time
before it shows up.
● NAS
• When the caution about lack of HDD space is displayed, add NAS. In such cases, consult our
authorized dealer.
• When an error of NAS is displayed in the indicator for Event, consult our authorized dealer.
■ Precaution when Outputting

• Be careful not to confuse the patient when printing several images on a film for several patients and
reading of images on the film should be carried out at the responsibility of a user who is conscious of
the intended differences from the image quality by displayed image size.
• Be careful that the height displays and outputs in meters, and the weight displays and outputs in kilograms.

1.5 Labels
1
The FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) labels are shown below.
Safety Information
■ FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) Labels
2010-06
Sample year of manufacture
The following symbols are used on this equipment.

Their meanings are described below.
This symbol indicates compliance of the equipment with Directive 93/42/EEC.
This symbol indicates that this product is not to be disposed of with your household waste,
according to the WEEE Directive (2002/96/EC) and your national law. This product should be
handed over to a designated collection point.
Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible negative impact on the environment
and human health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated with
EEE.
At the same time, your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the
effective usage of natural resources.
For more information about waste, please contact FUJIFILM dealers.

2
2
Chapter
Product Overview
Product Overview
2.1 FCR PRIMA Console Highlights......................................... 2-2
2.2 Name and Window of Each Part......................................... 2-5
2.3 Flow for Utilizing the System.............................................. 2-6
2.4 Version Information............................................................. 2-8
2.5 Starting up and Exiting........................................................ 2-9

2.5.1 Starting up FCR PRIMA Console................................... 2-9
2.5.2 Exiting FCR PRIMA Console........................................ 2-12
2.6 Protecting the PC when Temporarily Leaving the Site... 2-15
2.7 Before Using Disks............................................................ 2-16
2.8 Setting up Disks................................................................. 2-19

2.1 FCR PRIMA Console Highlights
This section describes the features of FCR PRIMA Console and an example of its system
configuration.
2
■ Main Features of FCR PRIMA Console
Product Overview
The FCR PRIMA Console is a diagnostic imaging workstation that not only simplifies the workflow
ofdiagnosing X-ray images, but also offers a fully integrated solution to managing modality, as well as
X-ray,study images.
X-ray images captured by the image reader are transmitted to the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL).
Transmitted or captured images are displayed on the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) monitor
screen, which provides information to aid in reading the images.
A summary description of the key features of the system is as follows:

1. Digital image enhancements make X-ray images easier to view and better suited for diagnostic
purposes.
2. The FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) lets you enter patient information and view images. For
X-ray studies, you can enter exposure information (such as exposed body parts and exposure
menus) , as well as patient information.
3 Image data can be backed up to DVD.
4. The FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) keeps images obtained from various studies under fully
integrated management.
5. Study images can be saved on CD-R or DVD-R in the PDI format and made available to the
patients for collaborative diagnostic purposes.

■ System Configuration Example
Network connections allow FCR PRIMA Console to connect to an Image Reader and read FCR study
images in.
FCR PRIMA Console is used from start of the FCR study until interpretation of the radiogram.
FCR PRIMA Console can be configured on a single personal computer 2
An example of a system configuration is shown below. Optional functions depend on whether the
option is installed.
Product Overview
Image Reader
PC Imager
FCR PRIMA Console
(CR-IR 391CL)
Hub
NAS

■ Restrictions
● Restrictions of Study Images Handled by FCR PRIMA Console
Types of images that are handled by FCR PRIMA Console are listed below.
2 Operation methods and usable functions may differ depends on types of study images.
Types of study image Explanations

Product Overview
Unprocessed X-ray images created by FUJIFILM CR equipment have the FUJIFILM-unique

FCR study images image processing parameters added on the image data. Unprocessed FCR
images are images on which only the parameters were adjusted to enable image
editing such as changing gradation (contrast or density) and reversing the display
for obtaining a better view on screen or film, while keeping the original image data
as is. Therefore, the original images before editing can be restored.
These images cannot be displayed in the DICOM viewer.
Processed X-ray images created by FUJIFILM CR equipment have the FUJIFILM-unique

FCR study images image processing parameters added on the image data. The Processed FCR
images are images whose original data was processed along with the parameter
change. Therefore the original images cannot be restored.
Images can be viewed in the DICOM viewer.
Other than X-ray images loaded from a DICOM study disk created in another facility.
FCR study images

2.2 Name and Window of Each Part
This section describes the name and display window of each parts for FCR PRIMA Console main unit.
2
■ Display Window
Product Overview
By installation conditions for option or by system setting at the time of installation, there are buttons
and menu which cannot be selected. Buttons and menus which cannot be selected are displayed in
gray or are hidden.
Main window Image Viewer window
Patient information Indicator window

Study summary
Operation for Patient information edit button

Main window Study pane
Study status ([Suspend] [Verify])

Input and refer to
patient information
Sub-window
Study operations
FCR PRIMA Console

(CR-IR 391CL)
menu bar for operation Image cart Thumbnail images

2.3 Flow for Utilizing the System
This section divides FCR PRIMA Console functions into “Regular Tasks”, “Semi-Regular Tasks”, and
2 “Non-Regular Tasks” and describes the flow of utilizing these functions.
Product Overview
Regular Tasks
Take and Read X-ray Images
Chapter 3 Taking and Reading X-ray of a Subject
Patient Registration
Read
Exposure
Search Patient and Refer Studies
Chapter 4 Searching Patients and

Referring Studies
Search
Refer
Semi-Regular Tasks
Edit Study Information Verifying by Viewing Indicators Change Display Settings
Chapter 9 Editing Study Information Chapter 10 Verifying with the Indicators Chapter 11 Changing Display Settings of the
“Main” Window and “Image Viewer”
Modify Study Menu
Inactivate Images Verify Unit Status, Output Buttons on “Main Menu” / “Image Viewer”
Errors, Alerts... etc and Change of Display Settings
Re-Exposure
Print/Storage Settings
Edit Patient Information

...etc

2
Product Overview
Verify and Process Images Using Report Function
Chapter 5 Verifying and Processing Images Chapter 6 Using Report Function
Process Images Schema
Thumbnail
Comment
Verify Images
Save Images from Each Windows

Chapter 7 Image Storage from Each Window
Storage Disks
DICOM Server
Work Disks
.jpg
General-Purpose
PDI Disks .bmp File Format
Print Images
Chapter 8 Image Print from Each Window
Film Print
富士フイルム病院富士フイルム病院 04001676 A0000A020
04001676 A0000A020
Report Print
Free Layout Print
G 1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q0.5 R->L G1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q1.0
頭蓋概観外科 Surgi
L 4.0S200C＊1.2＊1.0AP 0000000001 フジハナコ [女] 23才
撮影日1992. 11. 27 [17:43] 縮率:50% RT-04
01
G1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q1.0
G 1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q0.5 R->L
頭蓋概観外科 Surgi 0000000001 フジハナコ [女] 23才
4.0S200C＊1.2＊1.0AP
撮影日1992. 11. 27 [17:43] 縮率:50% RT-04
01
L
Non-Regular Tasks
Study Utilities Settings of Client Utilities Settings of User Utilities
Chapter 12 Study Utilities Chapter 13 Configuring “Client Utilities” Chapter 14 Setting “User Utilities”
Delete Patient Information/Studies Patient Information Maintenance

Edit/Add Exposure Menu and Study Menu
Set User Information

Save Images... etc
Environment Settings of
FCR PRIMA Console
Conﬁrm History
Verify History Information
Information
Handle Disks
etc

2.4 Version Information
Verifies the version of the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) application software and the options installed.
2
■ Operation Windows ■ Checking Version Information
Product Overview
● “Main” Window 1. Select - [Version] (A).

→→The “Version” window opens.
2. Check the version (B) and the options

installed (C).
3. Click [OK] (D) after completion

→→The “Version” window exits.
(A)
● “Version” Window
(B)
(C)
(D)
The displayed information in the window differs

depending on the version of the application software.

2.5 Starting up and Exiting
2.
This section describes the workflow of starting up and exiting FCR PRIMA Console.
2.5.1 Starting up FCR PRIMA Console

2
Product Overview
This section also describes the normal startup procedures, each procedure for starting up the server
application and client application after backing up from the backup notification message, and
procedures for starting up each function from the server application icon.
■ Operation Device / Operation ● “Select Server Application Behavior”

Dialog
Windows
● Monitor and Main Unit (H)

(A)
(I)
(B)
(C)
● “Login” Window (User Selection)
(D)
(E)
● “Login” Window (Enter a Password)
(F)
(G)

■ Starting up 4. Select a user (D) to log in to FCR PRIMA
Console.
Starts up FCR PRIMA Console.
1. Turn on the monitor. • Guidance that leads you through the operating
2 process is displayed in the “User Selection”
2. Turn on the server PC power (B). window and “Password Entry” window.
• Users displayed in the “Login” window (user
Product Overview
→→The startup window of FCR PRIMA Console

opens, and then the server application starts up. selection) can be newly added, edited and deleted
by using the “Client Utilities”.
The server application icon displays in the task
tray at the lower right-hand corner of the screen. New registration, deletion, editing of the user :
”13.5 Setting User Information (For Administrator)”
Counter-measure when the application does
not start: “■ Starting up the Server Application”
→→The “Login” window (enter a password) opens.
→→After the server application starts up, the client
application starts up. 5. Enter a password (F).
Counter-measure when the application does
not start: “■ Starting up the Client Application” 6. Click [Login] (G).
→→FCR PRIMA Console starts up.
→→When the client application starts up, “Login”
window (user selection) opens.
• If you have not backed up the disk for a certain

3. Turn on the Image Reader and printer (optional). period of time or longer, FCR PRIMA Console may
display a backup prompt message before it starts
up.
• To connect with the Image Reader, start up FCR Click [OK] in response to the backup prompt
PRIMA Console before turning on the Image message and the “Backup Utility” will launch to
Reader. perform the requested backup operation.
• For information about starting up the peripheral Back up notification: “14.8 Backup Notification
devices connected to the FCR PRIMA Console Settings”
system, refer to the Operation Manual pertaining
Backup: “16.2 Backing up Information of
to the peripheral devices.
Patient, Setting, Log, and Report”
• FCR PRIMA When the backup operation is completed, start up
the server application and client application again.
“■ Starting up the Server Application”
“■ Starting up the Client Application”
• With the server application running, you can shut

down, restart Windows OS and log off from
Power switch Windows OS.
I. Turn on the main power switch of Image

Reader.
→ Image Reader starts up.
• DRYPIX 2000
Power button
I. Press the power button.

→ Printer starts up.

■ Starting up the Server Application ■ Starting up Each Function from
Starts up each server application separately the Server Application Icon
after performing backup in response to backup When the FCR PRIMA Console server
notification message or when FCR PRIMA
Console is terminated while the PC is running.
application starts up, it displays server
application icon in the task tray in the
2
lower right-hand corner of the screen.
1. Double-click on the desktop.
Product Overview
→→The startup window of FCR PRIMA Console
1. Double-click the server application icon .
opens, and then the server application starts up.
→→The “Select Server Application Behavior” dialog
appears.
• On the PC, the auto startup for the client
application can be set. 2. Select the operation to be performed from the
“14.9 Automatically Startup Settings” pull-down menu ( I ), and then click [OK] (K).
• You can do the same by selecting [Start] - [All Selection Items
Programs] (P) - [Fuji Film] - [FCR Application].
Items Contents
Shutdown the PC Shuts down the PC.

“2.5.2 Exiting FCR PRIMA
■ Starting up the Client Application Console”
If no operation window (“User Selection” Exit Exits the “Server Application”.
window) is displayed while the server “2.5.2 Exiting FCR PRIMA

application icon appears in the PC’s task tray, Console”
starts up the client application. Start up Client Starts up the “Client Application”.
Application
1. Double-click on the desktop. User Utilities Starts up the “User Utilities”.
→→The client application starts up. “Chapter 14 Setting “User
When the client application starts up, the “User Utilities””
Selection” window opens.
Backup Utilities Starts up the “Backup Utilities”.
“16.2 Backing up Information
• On the PC, the auto startup for the client of Patient, Setting, Log, and
application can be set. Report”
“14.9 Automatically Startup Settings” Disk Copy Starts up the “disk copy tool”.
• You can do the same by the following steps:
“2.8 Setting up Disks”
1) Double-clicking server application icon in the
task tray at the lower right-hand corner of the Event Display Displays the “Event Log” window.
screen. “10.7 Verifying Events
→The “Select Server Application Behavior” dialog (Errors, Warnings or
appears. Information)”
2) Selecting “Start up Client Application” from the
Version Display Displays the version.
pull-down menu.
3) Clicking [OK]. “2.4 Version Information”

2.5.2 Exiting FCR PRIMA Console
Exits FCR PRIMA Console with the following methods:
• Log off the current user

2 Exits FCR PRIMA Console to change its users.
• Exit the client application

Product Overview
Exits FCR PRIMA Console to close the “Main” window temporarily and using a utility tool.
• Exit the server application

Exits FCR PRIMA Console completely and switches to another application.
• Shut down the PC

Shuts down the PC after exiting the Client Application of FCR PRIMA Console.
Before exiting FCR PRIMA Console, terminate the study in progress.

If you are browsing an image in the “Image Viewer”, exit the “Image Viewer”.
■ Operation Windows ● “Select Server Application Behavior”

Dialog
● “Main” Window
(E)
(F)
(A) (B)
● “Login” Window
(C)
(D)

■ Logging off the Current User ■ Exiting the Server Application
When exiting the server application, FCR
1. Click (B) on the lower left of “Main” PRIMA Console exits completely.
window.
→→A message displays to verify. 2
Exit the client application before exiting the server
2. Click [OK] in the confirmation dialog. application.
Product Overview
→→The “Main” window closes and the “Login” window
(user selection window) opens. 1. Double-click the server application icon
placed in the task tray.
• To start up another client application, select a user
appears.
(C) from the “Login” window (user selection
window) and log in.
• To exit the current client application, click [Finish]
2. Select [Exit] from the pull-down menu and
(D) in the “Login” window (user selection). click [OK].
→→The server application exits and the server
application icon disappears from the task tray.
■ Exiting the Client Application The message displays when there is a study whose
study status is Not Verified.
To exit the server application with the current study
The server application of PC keeps running, even status unchanged, click [OK].
when exiting the client application.
1. Click (A).
→→“Main” window closes, and the client application
exits. When the client application exits, the “Image
Viewer” window also closes.
appears.
To use various utility tools: “2.5.1 ■ Starting up
Each Function from the Server Application
Icon”
To exit the server application: “■ Exiting the
Server Application”-2.

■ Shutting down the PC
Shuts down the PC after exiting the client
application of FCR PRIMA Console.
2 1. Click (A).
Product Overview
appears.
2. Select [Shutdown the PC] from the pull-down

menu (E) and click [OK] (F).
→→The PC shuts down.
In case of Windows Vista, the following window opens

if the PC is shut down in invalid procedure.
In this case, click [Cancel] and then double-click the

server application icon placed in the task tray to
display the “Select Server Application Behavior”
dialog.
Close the PC from the “Select Server Application
Behavior” dialog.
Also if “Shut down now” is accidentally clicked when
DRYPIX PRIMA is connected, the power of DRYPIX
PRIMA will not be linked and turned off. Turn off the
power by holding the stand-by switch on the
operation panel.

2.6 Protecting the PC when Temporarily
Leaving the Site
Protects the PC with password to prevent unauthorized use when temporarily leaving the site while 2
working. FCR PRIMA Console is protected with the current operation status retained.
Product Overview
■ Operation Windows ■ Locking the PC
Protect the PC by password.
● Windows Task Tray
You can do the same when the PC runs without any

operation in a certain time.
(A) “14.15 Automatically Logoff”
● Login Window for Windows 1. Click (A) displayed in the task tray.
→→The login window for Windows opens.
■ Unlocking the PC
1. Enter a login password (B) for Windows and
click (C).
(B) (C)
The default password for user of fujicr is “system”.
→→FCR PRIMA Console becomes ready.

2.7 Before Using Disks
This section describes precautions in handling disks in FCR PRIMA Console, compatible disk types,
drive types, and how to manage.
2
■ Precautions ● Disk Management
Product Overview
Before using a new disk, you are advised to

● Precaution in Handling Disks put the save start date on the label seal.
For disks that are not used for further writing,
Before using disks, read instructions on the
enter the label name (media identification
disk package.
number) in the label seal. You should also put
● Precautions in Handling Files Stored to the save end date on the label seal.
Disks Write protection : “13.8 ■Setting Disks as “Write
Enabled” or “Write Disabled””
• Do not save new files to a disk on which other
files are already stored.
• Do not delete, move or modify files stored on
● Windows Explorer
the disks. Do not attempt to access the disk drive from
Windows Explorer. The drive might take a
considerable time to access.
Failure to do so could result in data unknown to the
FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) or result in a ● FCR PRIMA Console Shutdown
failure to save data or loss of saved data. Do not turn off the FCR PRIMA Console while
writing to or reading from the disk is in
● Compatible Disk Type progress (with the drive lamp illuminating).
Non-cartridge disks can be used with the FCR

PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL).
● Disk Identification
When a disk is inserted in the disk drive, it will
• Single-sided 4.7GB
take about 30 seconds before it is identified to
• UDF 1.5 format or UDF 2.01 format
the FCR PRIMA Console.
• 8-cm disks cannot be used.

• Unformatted disks cannot be used. To use an
unformatted disk with the FCR PRIMA Console
(CR-IR 391CL), format the disk in the “Disk”
window of “Indicator”.
Switch disks : “13.8 ■Replacing Disks”
● Ejecting Disks
Do not force the ejection of a disk by pressing
the disk drive EJECT button.
When a disk needs to be ejected, perform in
the “Disk” window of “Indicator”.
Remove disks : “2.8 ■Setting up Disks”
If you use an application other than the FCR PRIMA

Console to eject the disk, the PC may freeze or the
disk may become invalid.

■ Disk Types ● Work Disks
FCR PRIMA Console uses different types of These disks are used to temporarily save
disks for use. images from the FCR PRIMA Console system
Disk type can be classified into “Image storage for such purposes, such as the provision of
disks”, “Work disks”, “Other disks” and “PDI images to other facilities and collection of 2
disks” depending on its use. images depicting various diseases. It saves
DICOM-compatible format disks. FCR PRIMA
● Image Storage Disks
Product Overview
Console also treats disks storing images
provided by other facilities and DICOM-
Disks intended for image storage are called
compatible format disks storing images
storage disks.
captured by the FCR system as work disks.
These disks are used to manage images. FCR
PRIMA Console remembers which images are
stored on which storage disks. Even though
FCR PRIMA Console does not remember which
images are deleted from the FCR PRIMA
images are stored on which work disks.
Console database, FCR PRIMA Console can
FCR PRIMA Console treats the images imported
still import the copies of the same images from from the work disk as unrelated images with those in
the storage disks. the FCR PRIMA Console system.
• As the free space of the PC falls below a certain ● Other Disks

limit, stored images are automatically deleted from These disks are used to store images in the
the FCR PRIMA Console database in sequence in JPEG, bitmap or DICOM format for
ascending time order of the browsed studies.
presentations and purposes alike.
• With images imported from disks, you cannot:
FCR PRIMA Console cannot display the
- Rotate or reverse the images,
names of such disks and the amount of
- Save FCR image processing parameters,
available space on them.
- Edit markers,
- Update study information, and
- Verify or suspend studies.
● PDI Disks
CD-R or DVD-R disk for providing study result
images to the patient for diagnostic
cooperation with other facilities.
Studies that are deleted automatically when the number Save to PDI disks: “7.7 Saving to PDI Disks”
of studies stored in the FCR PRIMA Console database
exceeds a certain limit set on FCR PRIMA Console,
studies stored on a storage disk are automatically
deleted from the oldest study browsed. Once studies
are removed from the FCR PRIMA Console database,
they no longer appear in the “Main” window.
Studies which will not be deleted are:
• To be verified,
• Being displayed in the “Image Viewer”,
• Printing or being saved, or
• Locked.
Image data and study information associated with
the images are stored on a storage disk, thereby
studies can be backed up in the FCR PRIMA
Console database by “Disk Restoration”.
Restore Disks: “13.9 ■Restoring Information in
Disks to Database”
If too many studies have been registered and there
are no studies that can be deleted, a message displays.
Delete unnecessary studies from the “Main” window.
“12.4 ■Deleting Studies”

■ Drive Types
There are two types of DVD disks: for control
drive and normal drive. The PC consists of two
types of equipment configuration, one is a
2 control drive only or with a control drive and a
normal drive.
Product Overview
Images in the disk can be loaded from both the

control drive and normal drive.
● Control Drive
Control drive can write data to storage disk,
work disk, other disks, and PDI disk.
Type of disk on the control drive is displayed in
the “Disk” window of the “Indicator” and the
“Disk Operation” window of the “Client
Utilities”. “Start Disk Handling” is performed on
the control drive.
● Normal Drive
Normal drive can write data to other disks and
PDI disk, but cannot write data to storage disk
or work disk.
Normal drive is not displayed in the “Disk”
window of the “Indicator” nor the “Disk
Operation” window of the “Client Utilities”.

2.8 Setting up Disks
Before proceeding with a study, inserts a disk into the drive and set up.
Disk handling is started on the control drive of the PC.
If the last written disk remains inserted in the disk drive, disk handling will start automatically (without
2
the operation described here).
Product Overview
This section describes the following operations:
• Setting up disks
• Ejecting a saved disk
• Copying a disk
• When the disk becomes full
The PC may freeze or the disk may become invalid if you use an application other than the FCR PRIMA Console.
Verify precautions for using disks before setting up disks.
“2.7 Before Using Disks”
■ Operation Windows ● “Replacing Disks” Dialog

● “Indicator” Window
(A) (F)
● “Indicator” Window - “Disk” Window

(B)
(G)
(H)
(I)
(C) (D) (E)
(J)
(K)

● “Select Server Application Behavior”
Dialog
■ Setting up Disks
If the disk has not been inserted into the drive,
inserts the disk and then set up.
2 (L)
Put necessary information on the disk label such as

usage, name of disk, and recording start date.
Product Overview
(M)
1. Click the “Disk” indicator (A) in the

● “Login” Window “Indicator” window.
→→The “Disk” window of the “Indicator” window
opens.
(N)
(O) 2. Select a disk drive in “Device Name” (B).

→→The status of the disk inserted into the selected
drive displays.
(P) →→Nothing appears until the disk operation is

performed.
● “Disk Copy Tool” 3. Click [Replace] (D).

(window on which copies are made)
→→The “Replacing Disks” dialog appears and the disk
(Q) drive tray opens.
(R)
4. Place a disk in the disk drive tray and close
the tray.
(S)
5. When the disk drive pilot lamp illuminates
green, click [Next] (F).
● Disk Copying Process Window →→If the replaced disk is an image storage or work
disk that has once been used with FCR PRIMA
Console, the disk replacement operation has
completed.
→→If the replaced disk is unformatted, the
confirmation message displays to format the disk.
Click [OK] (G) to start up the software to format the
disk.
(T)
Proceed to 6. after formatting completed.
● “Indicator” Window - “Event” Window For using method of softwares to perform

formatting, see the instruction manual attached
to disk drive.
→→If the replaced disk is a new formatted disk,
storage disk or disks other than for work, “Set Disk
(U) Usage” dialog appears.
Proceed to 6..
(V)

6. Select the way you want to handle the disk
inserted in the disk drive (H).
■ Ejecting Disk
Selection Items
Items Contents Do not use the Open/Close (Eject) button on the
For Image Storage Storage disk

drive mechanically because the PC may freeze or
the disk may become invalid if an application other
2
than the FCR PRIMA Console has been used.
Not For Image
Product Overview
Storage The disk in the normal drive of the client PC can be
ejected by Windows operation or by using the drive’s
DICOM- Work disk Open/Close (Eject) button mechanically.
Compatible
Format
Other Other disk 1. Click the “Disk” indicator (A) in the

“Indicator” window.
Disk Types: “2.7 Before Using Disks” →→The “Disk” window of the “Indicator” window
opens.
7. Click [Next] ( I ).
→→If you select “For storage” or “DICOM-Compatible 2. Select a disk drive from Device Name (B) if
Format”, a “Disk Name Entry” dialog appears. the disk drive is added.
Go to 7..
→→Selecting “Other” returns to the “Disk” window of 3. Click [Eject] (E).
the “Indicator” window. The disk replacement →→The disk drive tray opens.
operation has completed.
4. Remove the disk from the disk drive tray and
8. Enter a disk name (J). close the tray.
9. Click [Next] (K).

→→The disk replacement operation has completed.
When the disk replacement operation completes, be

sure to click [Update] to check that the disk has been
replaced. Simply replacing a disk will not refresh the
disk information.
10. Click [Update] (C) and verify that the contents

of disk which has been set up is displayed.
Display Items
Items Contents
Device Disk name and space (%)

Status
Use*1 Purpose of using the disk

• For Image Storage
• For Work
Writing Writing setting for the disk

Setting • Enable
• Disable
*1 Nothing appears for other disks.

■ Copying Disks ● Copying Disks
Duplicates image storage disks against Inserts a disk into the disk drive and starts to
possible failures to read them as a result of copy it.
their data breakage or deterioration by using
2 the “disk copy tool”.
If the drive in the PC is used, the source and target
drives are the same. Data on the source disk is
Product Overview
temporarily saved to the hard drive in the PC before

• FCR PRIMA Console will exit when you attempt to
it is finally written to a target disk that is replaced
start up the “disk copy tool”.
with the source disk.
Before starting up the copy tool, check that all the
windows have closed. Check also that if any
different user is operating the FCR PRIMA
Console system.
1. Select Source drive name for copying (Q) and
then click [Eject] (R).
• Store backup disks in a secure place that is not
accessible to third parties. →→The source disk drive tray opens.
• Disks may take up to 210 minutes at the longest to
be copied. Avoid copying disks during the periods 2. Place a source disk in the disk drive tray and
of the day in which a study needs to be started close the tray.
immediately.
3. Click [Execute] (S).
● Starting up the Copy Tool →→Data on the source disk is temporarily saved to the
hard drive in the PC. When the saving to the hard
1. Double-click the server application icon drive completes, a message is displayed
To cancel the disk copying process, follow these
appears. steps:
1) Click [Cancel] (T). All data that has been recorded
2. Select [Disk Copy] (L) and click [OK] (M). on the target disk is deleted.
→→The “Login” window opens after a message 2) When the message “Copying Incomplete” is
displayed. displayed, click [OK]. The target disk drive tray
opens.
3. Select the User Name (N) to log in. 3) The message “Place a target disk and click [OK]”
is displayed.
4. Enter the Password (O) and click [OK] (P). To resume the disk copying process, place a disk
in the target disk drive and close the tray.
→→If the user is authenticated, the “Disk Copy Tool” When the disk drive pilot lamp illuminates green,
window opens. click [OK].
When the disk access lamp is ON, never press the

[Eject] button on the disk drive.

4. Place a target disk in the disk drive tray and
close the tray.
■ When a Disk Becoming Full
When the disk in the control drive of the PC
becomes full, the drive tray opens. The disk
5. When the disk drive pilot lamp illuminates
indicator turns off if the disk is an image
green, click [OK].
→→The disk copying process starts. When the
storage disk. 2
copying process completes, the message displays. Goes off
Product Overview
(for an image storage disk)
6. Click [OK].
→→The target drive tray opens and a message
displays.
● Verifying that the Disk is Full

To continue copying data to another disk, replace the First, views the “Event” window to verify that
current target disk with another one. When the disk
the disk is full. Then, ejects the full disk and
drive pilot lamp illuminates green, click [OK].
starts the handling of a new disk. Whenever a
disk becomes full, takes relevant action as
instructed on the right.
Save the data to the storage disk when the disk The following steps describe how to handle
copying process completes. new disks.
Switching procedure: “■Setting up Disks”
1. Click the “Event” indicator to display the
“Event” window.
2. Select the latest warning on display disk

storing failed (c) and click [Details] (d).
3. Check that the message reporting a full disk

is displayed in the “Error Details” window.
4. Remove the full disk from the disk drive tray.

5. Start the handling of a new disk.
“■Setting up Disks”
Simply placing a disk in the disk drive and closing

the tray will not start the handling of the disk. Set up
the disk.

● Handling Full Disks
Store backup disks in a controlled place that is not
accessible to third parties.
2
1. Start up the “User Utilities” to perform a
Product Overview
media consistency check.

“14.13 Media Consistency Check”
2. Verify the message displayed after the check

and take suggested action.
3. Start up the “disk copy tool” to create a

backup copy of the disk.
“■Copying Disks”

Chapter 3 3
Taking and Reading X-ray of a Subject

Taking and Reading
X-ray of a Subject
3.1 Flow of Taking and Reading X-ray...................................... 3-2
3.2 Registering the Patient Information to be Exposed.......... 3-3
3.3 Exposing Images................................................................. 3-5
3.4 Reading and Viewing........................................................... 3-7
3.5 Import Various Images and Refer..................................... 3-10

3.1 Flow of Taking and Reading X-ray
Starting the Exposure Reading Images
3 4) Select the
exposure menu
1) Register or
select the
patient
information
5) Insert the cassette

“3.2 Register the Patient Information to Expose”
“3.3 ■Read Images in the Cassette”

2) Select the
exposure menu
6) Confirm images
3) Start the
exposure
“3.3 ■Viewing Read Images”
“3.3 ■Taking X-rays”

3.2 Registering the Patient Information
to be Exposed
Patient information consists of the patient name, sex, date of birth and other related information. Each
set of patient information is managed with reference to a unique ID (Patient ID). FCR PRIMA Console
searches through the database for registered patient information using its patient ID as a keyword and,
if the information is found, it is displayed in the patient list. 3
■ Operation Window ■ Registering New Patient Information

● “Main” Window - “Input ID” Window 1. Input the patient information in the patient
information input column (A).
Input Items
Items Contents
Input ID*1*2 Enter a patient ID
Patient name Enter a name of patient

(A)
Sex Select a sex
Date of birth Enter a date of birth
Height Enter a height
Weight Enter a weight
Patient comment Enter a comment
*1 Enter the patient ID with single-byte alphanumeric

(B)
characters. The allowable length is determined by
a system setting.
*2 The following characters cannot be used.
• In the “Display Settings” of Utilities, whether or not "#%&`+?/\*@<
to display the window at the time of starting the However, the space can be used but the patient ID
“Main” window can be set. which consists of solely space is not allowed.
“11.1 Display Settings of the “Main” Window”
• In the “Display Settings” of Utilities, whether or not
to display the input item in the patient information When the patient ID which already registered in the
input column can be set. FCR PRIMA Console database is entered in the
patient ID column, an applicable patient information
“11.1.3 Display Settings of “ID input” Window”
displays. In such cases, verify the patient information
and start the exposure.
2. Check the contents which have been input,

and click (B) .
→→ The new patient information is registered.

■ Registering through DICOM
MWM Server (Optional)
Searches the patient information through
MWM server and, if the information is found, it
is displayed in the "Input ID" window. When
searching the patient information through
MWM server, use the patient ID which has
3 been registered in MWM server.
To search patient information, the following two
methods can be used.

• Search the MWM server prior to others
• Search the FCR PRIMA Console database
prior to others
The method to be used depends on the
system settings at the time of installation.
Here describes the procedures of priorly

searching the MWM server as an example.
Changes to the studies executing at FCR PRIMA

Console or the patient information displayed in the
patient list at the MWM server side will have no effect
on the patient list.
In these cases, change the mentioned patient information
as well.
“13.3 Patient Information Maintenance”
1. Input the patient ID in the ID input column of

the patient information input column (A).
→→The MWM server is searched with the input patient
ID. The patient information whose ID is input is
displayed in the patient information column.
If failed to connect to DICOM MWM server, a

message displays.
Check whether or not the network cable is
connected or whether or not the unit works normally.
Please contact the maintenance personnel if the
situation did not improve after taking the above-
mentioned actions.
To search the MWM server again, perform procedure
1. again.
2. Check the patient information which is

displayed, and click .
→→The new patient information is registered.

3.3 Exposing Images
FCR PRIMA Console offers groups of exposure menus on which the specific exposure conditions and
method required for a body part are preset. Selects an exposure menu for X-ray studies to start taking
X-ray. Exposure menu also can be scheduled.
■ Operation Window ■ Taking X-rays 3

● “Main” Window - “FCR” Window 1. Select the “Exposure Menu” (A).

→→The “Read Image” window opens.
To expose the scheduled study, select the study in a

(A)
“Scheduled” study status from the “Patient List”
window and double-click it.
2. Select an exposure menu for the image to be

read.
“3.4 Reading and Viewing”
• The frequently used exposure menu can be 3. Using a cassette containing a blank IP, take
registered as a shortcut menu in the “FCR” an X-ray of the subject.
window.
“11.1.5 Display Settings of “FCR-Menus”
Window”
Before starting exposures, be sure to read through the
• The contents of “Others” which are displayed in
precautions.
the “FCR” window can be created, edited and
deleted. “Appendix Z Precautions for Exposure”
“14.3.1 Setting the Exposure Menu”

● Scheduling an Exposure Operation ● Exposing a Study which has not
Completed the Exposure
Performs the following operations from the
To select an exposure menu and schedule an
“Patient List” window in the “Main” window.
exposure, you need to set up. In the “FCR-
Operations” window of “Display Settings”, set up an
operation at the time of selecting the exposure menu 1. Select a study in a “Scheduled” or “Started”
to schedule a study. study status from the patient list, and then
3 “11.1.6 Display Settings of Exposing and Reading” double-click it.
1. Select the “Exposure Menu” (A).

→→The message displays to verify whether or not to
schedule a study.
2. Click [OK].
• To proceed to schedule another study, input the

patient ID in the patient ID column of “Input ID”
window.
• To verify the status of scheduled studies, view the
→→The “Read Image” window of the selected study
“Patient List” window for a list of studies in the
"Scheduled" study status. opens.
• Once a study is scheduled, an exposure operation

can be started from the “Patient List” window.
Click [Cancel] to cancel waiting the image reading.

3.4 Reading and Viewing
Reads X-ray images corresponding to an exposure menu.
Takes an X-ray of a subject prior to reading. When inserts the cassette used for the exposure into the
Image Reader, the X-ray image of the subject opens in the FCR PRIMA Console monitor for viewing.
■ Operation Window ■ Read Images in the Cassette 3

● “Read Image” Window (Detail View) 1. Select an “Exposure Menu” (A) for the image

Before reading an image to be read.
The exposure menu for the image to be read is

(A)
identified by image read icon .
2. Check that the Cassette Ready Lamp is lit on

the operation panel.
The Cassette Ready

After reading an image Lamp is on.
(A’)
(B)
3. Insert a cassette into the equipment in

alignment with the guide on the right, with the
(C) cassette’s barcode window facing as
illustrated below.
When [Simple] is clicked, “Read Image” • Remove the exposure marker from the cassette
window switches from Detail view to Simple before inserting the cassette in the Image Reader.
view. • Insert the cassette in the Image Reader after
confirming that the top surface of the cassette is
faced up and in the right direction. Moreover, insert
the cassette straight and slowly.
If a cassette is inserted upside down, back to front
or at a slant, the Image Reader can be damaged.
• Do not shake the Image Reader or the cassette
while reading the image.
Uneven image, which will prevent image reading,
might be generated.
• After inserting a cassette into the Image Reader,
do not touch the cassette until the Cassette
Removal Lamp lights.
Touching an inserted cassette during image
reading may cause the Image Reader failure.

■ Viewing Read Images
When inserting a cassette, check the patient name When inserts a cassette into the Image Reader
displayed on the operation panel of the Image
and the image is read, it is displayed in the
Reader.
FCR PRIMA Console monitor.
When an image is read, it is thumbnailed on
the lefthand side of the exposure menu. When
selects an exposure menu, the selected image
3 opens on the lefthand side of the window.
Read images are saved on the FCR PRIMA
Console system.
Cassette guide
Barcode window
1. Select the “Exposure Menu” (A’) after reading
an image.
Insert straight carefully
2. View an displayed image (B).

The following functions can be used for read
4. Check that the Cassette Removal Lamp is
images or exposure menu.
blinking on the operation panel and then
remove the cassette.
The Cassette Removal

Lamp is blinking.
Buttons Functions
*1 Rotate images 90 degrees to

the left.
*1 Rotate images 90 degrees to

the right.
*1 Rotate images 180 degrees.
*1 Flip images horizontally.
Reverse rotated images to the

default.
Modify*2 Display the “Main Menu

Modification” window and
modify the study information.
(previous page) Display the previous or next

(next page)*3 page on the current page.
Simple • Progress bar

A progress of image
reading can be verified.
• [Detail]
“Read Image” window
switches to “Detail” view.
• [Image Viewer]
Start up the “Image
Viewer”.
• [Complete]
Finish the exposure of this
study.

Buttons Functions ■ Finishing Exposure / Reading
Suspend*4 Close the “Read Image”
window and return to the 1. Click [Completed] (C).
“Main” window.
The current study is left in the →→The “Read Image” window closes and returns to
“Started” study status. the “Main” window.
Image Viewer Close the “Read Image”
window and display the
“Image Viewer” window Before ending exposure on the “Read Image” 3
"Chapter 5 Verifying and window, check the patient information, exposure
Processing Images" menu, and image association.

If exposure menus for which images have not been
*1 The rotation or reversal of an image is reflected in exposed are existed, the message displays. To
the image when it is printed on a film (optional), delete exposure menus for which images have not
when it is saved on the disk, or when it is been read and start up the “Image Viewer”, click
transmitted to the DICOM server (optional). [OK].
*2 “Main Menu Modification” window: “Chapter 9
Editing Study Information”
*3 When manipulating hidden registered exposure
menus into view. • In this case, the study status sets to “Completed”.
*4 The “Read Image” window can be displayed to If FCR PRIMA Console is configured to print the
resume the exposure. image on a film with the film print (optional) upon
completion of the exposure, the image is printed or
saved automatically.
If there are multiple exposure menus, proceed to • To reconduct a study, add additional menus or
take X-rays, insert cassettes into the “Image Reader” complete the re-exposure procedure and display
and view the resultant images with regard to the rest the “Read Image” window.
of the exposure menus. “Chapter 9 Editing Study Information”

3.5 Import Various Images and Refer
In the “Import” window of “Main” window, DICOM images can be imported. Imported data and images
can be referred in the “Refer” window.
• Specify the media or folder and import DICOM images.
3 ■ Operation Window ■ Importing DICOM Images from

the Media or Folder (Import
● “Main" Window - "Import" Window DICOM Off-line)
1. Click (A).
(A)
→→The "Import DICOM off-line" window opens.
2. Select the drive (C) which DICOM images are

saved and click (D).
→→The study information displays in the "Study list"
(E).
Display Items
Displays Contents
Study date The date on which the

● ”Import DICOM off-line” Window exposure was started
(C) Study time The time at which the

exposure was started
(D)
Modality The modality of study
(E) Number of Number of images which are
images exposed
(F) Multi-frame Existence of multi-frame
images
(G)
3. Select the study to import from "Study list" (E).

(H)
• To select all of studies which displayed, click (F).
• To cancel all of selections, click (F).
(I) (J) • To see contents of files, click (F). Select
the file to open when the "Open" window opens,
and then click [Open].

4. Edit the patient information (G) if necessary.
Input/Display Items
Items Contents
Overwrite the Put a check mark if the patient

patient ID and name of DICOM image
information and to import is to be overwritten to
import the patient ID and name of
FCR PRIMA Console database
and to be imported. 3
(Left side) The information of DICOM

Patient ID image to be imported is
Patient Name displayed.
(Right side) Input the information in the

Patient ID system.
Patient Name
For others (sex Put a check mark if overwriting

etc.), overwrite the sex of the DICOM image to
with the be imported to the sex
information in the registered in the system and
system importing it.
• If the information input in the right side column is

different with the information in the system, the
confirmation window to overwrite the information in
the system with the information input in the right
side column opens.
• If "Import DICOM off-line" window is opened while
the patient is selected in "Main" window, the
patient information selected in the "Main" window
inserted automatically into the right side column.
• Contents in the left can be pasted in the right by
clicking .
5. Select "Intended use for import" (H).
• To import for storing, select "It will be managed by

storing on the hard disk".
• To import as a reference, select "It will be retrieved
temporality for reference and then deleted after-
day(s).". Input the date to save in the column.
6. Click [Start retrieving] ( I ).
The image data can be imported and can be referred

to in the Image Viewer at the same time by clicking
[Viewer startup] (J).

3

Chapter 4
4
Searching Patients and
Searching Patients and Referring Studies

Referring Studies
4.1 Flow for Searching / Referring . .........................................4-2
4.2 Searching for Patients......................................................... 4-3
4.3 Referring Images.................................................................. 4-5

4.1 Flow for Searching / Referring
The study images imported in FCR PRIMA Console after being exposed can be referred if searching by
a study status or modality in the “Image Viewer” window.
This section describes the flow of referring the images for a study after searching for patients in the
“Image Viewer” window.
Searching for Patients Referring Images
4
1) E
nter the search
queries
2) Search
3) Display the 4) Select a

search results patient
5) Select a
study
6) Refer images
“4.2 Searching for Patients” “4.3 Referring Studies”
To the Image Viewer Window
“Chapter 5 Verifying and Processing Images”

4.2 Searching for Patients
Specifies the requirements such as the study status and modality to search a patient.
■ Operation Window ■ Searching for Patients

● “Main” Window - “Patient List” Window
If a search query is entered, results are
displayed in “Patient List” (C).
The study which matches with the selected
search queries displays as a Patient List. 1. Select “Search Requirement display column”
Further, width of “Main” window may differ from (A) to display “Search panel” (B). 4
the following figure depends on the system
2. Enter or select each search query in “Search

settings at the time of installation.
panel” (B).
Input and Selection Items
Items Contents
(A)
Study Status Progress of the study
Scheduled An exposure operation is

scheduled with patient
information and exposure
(B) menus are registered.
Started An exposure operation is in

progress or suspended.
Completed All the images are read and

[Upon Completion] is selected.
(C) *1
Verified The image quality of images
read is verified and [Upon
Verification] is selected.
Modality Study modality

*1 In default, the study that the registration date is set
to today is displayed in the list. • CR
Requesting The exposure requesting

Physician physician.
When move the mouse pointer on the desired
Registration The date on which the study
button, the button name and description of functions date*1 *2 was registered (scheduled).
are displayed as a pop-up message.
Registration The date on which the
time*1 *2 exposure was started.
Patient ID or Patient ID or Patient Name of

Patient Name the patient studied.
*1 When the starting date and finishing date are

specified, the specified period will be the search
query.
*2 When specifying the registration date and study
date, the calendar displays. When clicking another
area on the window without selecting the date in
the calendar, display of calendar may remain. To
hide the calendar, select the date in the calendar.

• Click to save the search query. • Display order of patient list can be reset.
• When the search panel closes automatically at the The ascending order (▲) and descending order
time of searching, put a check mark to the “Close (▼) are changed if select a heading based on the
the panel automatically” check box. display order.
• Click to reset the search query to its • The orders for items in the patient list can be
defaults. changed.
Drag the items to change the order with selecting
it, and drop it into the rows of destination to
change.
3. Click .
4 →→The study which matches with the selected search
• Items or orders to be displayed in the patient list
can be set in the customize.
query displayed in “Patient List” (C).
“11.1.4 Display Settings of “Patient List” Window”
Display Items
• The following functions are available in “Patient
Items Contents List”.
Study Status The status of progress of the : Protect the privacy

study When this button is clicked with the condition
: Scheduled which the patient is selected, the patient
: Started information except the selected patient will
change to gray.
: Completed
: Verified : Reset sort
Sex Sex of a patient Display order of patient list will be reset.
When the sort is reset, the patient list will be
Patient Name Name of a patient
sorted by descending of registration time and
Patient ID ID number of a patient studied date.
Registration date The date on which the study
was registered (scheduled) : Manual update of list
The patient list is updated manually with the
Registration time The time at which the study
was registered (scheduled) search query displayed in the column which
displays the search queries.
Study date The date on which the
Study time The time at which the

Modality The modality of study
Requesting The exposure requesting

Physician physician
Date of Birth The date of birth of patient

studied

4.3 Referring Images
Selects a study of the patient found to refer the study image in “Image Viewer” window.
■ Operation Window ■ Manipulating Studies

● “Main” Window - “Patient List” Window, 1. Search a patient to refer the image.
“Refer” Window “4.2 Searching for Patients”
Select a patient to refer the image.
2. From the “Patient List” (A), select the patient 4
in a “Completed” or “Verified” study status.

→→The study of the selected patient is displayed in
“Refer” window (B).
3. Select a study (B) to be referred.
4. Click (C).
→→The selected study is displayed in the “Image
Viewer” window.
“5.1 Flow of Verifying and Processing Images”
(A)
You can do the same by:
• Double-clicking the study to refer in “Patient List”
(A).
• Dragging and dropping the thumbnail image
displayed in the “Image Viewer”.
• Starting up the “Image Viewer” from the “Study
(B) *1
Utilities”. However when the “Image Viewer” is
started up from the “Study Utilities”, the simplified
“Image Viewer” which limits the output function of
(C) image and so on opens.
“12.4 ■Starting up the “Image Viewer””
If a “Scheduled” or “Started” study status is in the

*1 displays on the image which the report is selected studies, a window opens to verify whether
registered. to continue or not.
By clicking , input contents can be confirmed. Click [OK] if a study status is other than “Scheduled”
“6.2 Creating/Editing the Report” or “Started” displayed in the “Image Viewer” window.
When (C) is not displayed at the bottom of the

“Refer” window, add operation items in the “Display
Settings”.

The following functions are also available for a study.
: Reconduct a Study and Editing Information

A restudy can be set to perform additional and
re-exposure operations.
Also, the study information such as the menu
change of the exposure images can be modified.
“9.1 Starting up the Editing Function”
: Saving to a PDI Disk
4 Images for a study are saved in a CD-R disk or a

DVD-R disk in PDI format.
“7.7 Saving to PDI Disks”
: Printing on a Film (optional)

Print the study images on a film.
“8.3 Printing on a Film (Optional)”
: Saving to a Storage Disk

Images for a study are saved in a storage disk which
is set in the DVD drive of a PC.
“7.3 Saving to Storage Disks”
: Transmitting Studies to DICOM Server

(optional)
Transmit images for a study to DICOM server.
“7.4 Transmitting Studies to DICOM Server
(Optional)”
Click , when the item is not displayed in the

bottom of “Refer” window.

Chapter 5
Verifying and Processing 5
Images
Verifying and Processing Images

5.1 Flow of Verifying and Processing Images......................... 5-2
5.2 Outline of "Image Viewer" Window.................................... 5-3
5.3 Selecting and Arranging Images........................................ 5-4
5.4 Adjusting Image Display..................................................... 5-9
5.5 Adding Annotations on Images........................................5-18
5.6 Free Drawing on “Image Viewer” for Informed Consent... 5-28
5.7 Saving/Verifying/Suspending Images.............................. 5-30

5.1 Flow of Verifying and Processing Images
This section describes the flow of verifying and processing images that are exposed/read or searched/
referred.
Expose/Read Search/Refer
“Chapter 3 Taking and Reading X-ray of a “Chapter 4 Searching Patients and Referring Studies”
Subject”
Select and arrange images Adjust image display

5
Select images Adjust gradation, rotate/flip
Adjust place and display pattern Magnify/reduce, apply presets
“5.3 Selecting and Arranging Images” “5.4 Adjusting Image Display”
Adding annotations on images Verify/suspend images
Verify/suspend
Arrow, marker, measured value of length, CTR, and
angle between two line segments “5.7 Saving/Verifying/Suspending Images"
Free Drawing for Informed Consent
“5.5 Adding Annotations on Images” Print/Save

“5.6 Free Drawing on“ Image Viewer” for Informed Consent”
“Chapter 6 Using Report Function”
“Chapter 7 Image Storage from Each Window”
“Chapter 8 Printing Images”

5.2 Outline of "Image Viewer" Window
This section describes the outline of names of each part and functions for "Image Viewer" window.
1) Display Check Box

2) Patient Information 7) [Edit Patient Information]
8) [Customize]
3) Tool bar 9) [Restore]/[Retry]
4) Study Summary
5
10) Report

5) Image Cart
6) Sub-window
1) Display Check Box 6) Sub-window

Display/Hide each window of toolbar, study Sub-window to display images.
summary, image cart, and report. Multiple sub-windows can be displayed, and
multiple images can be displayed in the sub-
2) Patient Information window.
The patient ID, name, sex, date of birth and "5.3 ■Displaying Multiple Sub-windows Lined up"
age of the displayed image displays.
"5.3 ■Displaying Multiple Images Lined up in the
Sub-window"
3) Toolbar
Each function of button to place a image into
7) [Edit Patient Information]
sub-window, to adjust display of image, and so
The patient information of the displayed image
on displays.
can be modified.
"5.3 Selecting and Arranging Images"
"9.9 Editing Patient Information"
"5.4 Adjusting Image Display"
8) [Customize]
4) Study Summary Display settings of "Image Viewer" window can
The study image of the patient selected in the be changed.
"Main" window displays as a list.
"11.2 Changing Settings of “Image Viewer” Window"
"5.3 Selecting and Arranging Images"
By selecting the modality in the pull-down 9) [Restore]/[Retry]
menu, the study which displays in the image Image adjustment, such as changing gradation
summary can be narrowed. and so on, can be undone/redone.
"5.4 Adjusting Image Display"
5) Image Cart
A window to put images to save or print. 10) Report
Images in the image cart can be saved/printed. Report can be created by adding comments to
"Chapter 7 Image Storage from Each Window" study images, putting annotations to schema
images. Only one report can be created for
each study image.
"Chapter 6 Using Report Function"

5.3 Selecting and Arranging Images
Displays images that are exposed/read, searched/referred in the “Image Viewer” window.
Switches image, changes the display pattern of images, or displays past study images side by side
with the current image to adjust image display, process images or add annotations on images.
■ Descriptions of Functions ■ Operation Windows

● Switching images ● “Basic Operation” Tool Bar
Images which display on the sub-window can
be switched by the image unit inside the study
or study unit. Also, images can be displayed by
5 adding a window.
"■Switching Displayed Images"
"■Adding a Sub-window and Displaying the Image"
● Displaying Sub-windows and Images

Lined up
When comparing multiple studies and so on,
images can be displayed and lined up in
columns by lining up multiple sub-windows or
dividing the sub-window.
"■Displaying Multiple Sub-windows Lined up" (A)
"■Displaying Multiple Images Lined up in the

Sub-window" ● “Other” Tool Bar
● Switching and Maximizing Sub-windows,
Displaying information, etc.
Images can be displayed easier to see by
switching the display position of sub-window,
maximizing sub-window itself, and switching
the display of images and sub-windows.
"■Maximizing the Sub-window"
"■Switching the Display Position"
"■Displaying/Hiding Thumbnail Images"
"■Displaying/Hiding Various Information on the Image"
"■Displaying as a Cine Display Mode"
"■Registering Displayed Images as a Key Image" (B)

● “Study summary” Window ■ Switching Displayed Images
(E) (D)
Switches images which display in the sub-
(C) window by the image unit inside the study or
(F) study unit.
1. Select the study or image (G) in the "Study

Summary".
(G)
By selecting the modality in the pull-down menu of

"Study Summary" (F), the study of "Study Summary"
can be narrowed with the selected modality.
2. Click [Switch] (C) in the "Study Summary". 5

● “Sub-window” →→Display on sub-window switches on the selected

study image.
(H)
(I) • Displayed images can be switched by the following

operations.
- Double-click the study of "Study Summary" or
image
- Drag and Drop the study of "Study Summary" or
image into the sub-window
• If one study has multiple images (study view/series
view etc.), displayed images can be switched by
clicking [Previous page]/[Next page] or rotating
mouse wheel on the image.

■ Adding a Sub-window and

Displaying the Image
Displays an image in a new sub-window.
An image displayed previously moves onto the
previous page.
1. Select the study or image in the "Study

Summary".
By selecting the modality in the pull-down menu of

"Study Summary" (F), the study of "Study Summary"
can be narrowed with the selected modality.
2. Click [Add] (E) in the "Study Summary".

→→The new sub-window added and the image
displays.
Sub-window can be switched by [Previous page]/

[Next page] in the toolbar.

■ Displaying Multiple Sub-windows ■ Displaying Multiple Images
Lined up Lined up in the Sub-window
When multiple studies are compared, multiple If one study has multiple images (series
sub-windows displayed lined up in columns. images etc.), the sub-window is divided and
multiple images are displayed lined up in
columns.
Maximum of 4x4 (16 windows) sub-windows can be
displayed lined up in columns.
• Maximum of 6x6 (36 windows) images can be
displayed lined up in columns on one sub-window.
1. Click [Layout] (A) on the "Basic operation" • To display how many images lined up as a default
tool bar.
display can be set by each modality.
→→The display pattern displays under the button.
5
"11.2.4 ■Setting the Display of each Modality"
2. Move the mouse on the display pattern and

click the display pattern of the sub-window to 1. Click ( I ) in the sub-window.
arrange. →→The display pattern displays under the button.

→→The sub-windows display lined up.
2. Move the mouse on the display pattern and
click the display pattern of the sub-window to
• If only one sub-window is displayed, the sub- arrange.
window reduces for fitting with the selected display
→→The sub-window is being divided and images are
pattern. To display images lined up, add a sub-
displayed lined up.
window.
■ Maximizing the Sub-window

"■Adding a Sub-window and Displaying the
Image"
• Also, the displayed sub-window and selected
When sub-windows are displayed smaller, for
image can be displayed lined up by selecting the
study (image) in the "Study Summary" and clicking example multiple sub-windows are displayed
[Compare] (D) when the sub-window is displayed. lined up in columns, maximize one sub-window
by hiding the buttons on toolbar except tabs.
By maximizing the sub-window, magnification/

reduction of the image can be reset.
1. Click (H) on the sub-window.

→→Buttons on toolbar hides and the sub-window
maximizes.
• The sub-window can maximize by double-clicking

the image.
• By clicking (H) once again, the window returns
to layout which displays sub-windows lined up.

■ Switching the Display Position ■ Displaying/Hiding Various
When multiple sub-windows are displayed Information on the Image
lined up and when the sub-window is divided Set the following information to display/hide.
and multiple images are displayed lined up, • Attribute Information
position of each sub-window (image) can • Annotation
switch. • Ruler
"■Displaying Multiple Sub-windows Lined up" • Patient Positioning
"■Displaying Multiple Images Lined up in the • Reference Line
Sub-window"
• Attribute information does not display when the

The switched display position will not save. If the layout of an image is small.
image is displayed again, it will display as a previous • The ruler, patient positioning, and reference line
condition. may not display due to the DICOM information of 5
an image.
1. Select the sub-window (or image) to be

dragged. 1. Click [Overlay] (B) on the "Other" tool bar.
→→The sub-window is being selected (In case of →→The item to display/hide displays.
images, the frame turns to green.).
2. Put a check mark to the information to
2. Drag and drop the sub-window onto the display.
desired position of other sub-window (or
Selection Items
image).
Items Contents
→→The position of two images switches.
Attribute Image incidental information of
Information exposure menu name,
The display order of thumbnail images will not magnification rate, and etc.
change from the previous condition. Annotation Arrows, figures, texts, measuring
values, etc.
■ Displaying/Hiding Thumbnail Ruler
Patient
A ruler
Position of the patient on the

Images Positioning image
Switches the display/hide of the thumbnail of Reference line Reference line on the image
study images.
1. Click [Thumbnail display] (A) on the "Basic

operation" tool bar.
→→The thumbnail image displays under the sub-
window.
Each time of clicking, display/hide of thumbnail

images can be switched.
Reference line
→→The information which put a check mark on

displays on the image.

■ Displaying as a Cine Display ■ Registering Displayed Images
Mode as a Key Image
Cine display mode can display and switch Registers the displayed image as a key image.
images automatically in the order when one
study has multiple images.
By registering the key image, only the key image can
Display images after setting the switching
be easily displayed from the pull-down menu of the
speed and repeating. sub-window.
1. Click [Cine display] (B) on the "Other" tool

bar.
→→The control bar displays under the sub-window
and switches to the cine display mode.
5 2. Set the display method.

fps measured value
1. Select the image.
→→The frame of the selected image turns to green.

Reverse
2. Click [Register key image] (A) on the "Basic

Cine progress bar Repeat play →→The image registers as a key image.
Number of images Play speed
For the key image, an icon displays on the upper left

of the image.
Images may not play in a set speed even fps has
been set. Confirm images after confirming the
measured value of fps.
The range of frame of images displays in the sub-

window can be changed by dragging the start
position of the frame of cine progress bar (▲ on the
left side) and last position of the frame cine progress
■ Clearing Images
bar (▲ on the right side) to the left or right.
1. Click [Clear image] (A) on the "Basic
3. Click (play).
→→The sub-window closes, and images displayed will
be cleared.
• When is ON, images are playing reversely.
• When is ON, images are playing repeatedly.
4. To stop, click .

5.4 Adjusting Image Display
Adjusts gradation, rotates/flips, magnifies/reduces selected or arranged images.

Images that are displayed in the “Image
Viewer” window can be subjected to the image ● “Basic operation” Tool Bar
processing listed below.
● Changing the Gradation

(Contrast and Density) of Images
Changes the contrast and density temporarily.
"■Changing the Gradation (Contrast and Density)" 5
● Magnifying/Reducing Images and

Moving the Display Position
Magnifies and reduces images temporarily.
The display position can be moved by
dragging while the image is magnified.
Also, one part of the image can be magnified
by magnifying glass. (A)
"■Magnifying/Reducing"
"■Moving Images" ● “Image rotation/reversal settings”
Window
"■Magnifying Images by Magnifying Glass"
● Reverse/Rotate and Flip (B)
Reverses and rotates/flips the image.

"■Reversing Images"
"■Moving Images" (C)
● Changing the FCR Image Processing

Parameters
For the image of FCR study (unprocessed),
FCR image processing parameters can be
changed. Also, the changed parameters can (D)
be registered as a preset settings and images
which are displaying by applying the registered
preset settings can be processed at once. ● “Changing FCR Image Processing
Parameters” Window
"■Editing FCR Image Processing Parameters"
"■Registering Preset Image Processing Settings"
"■Applying Preset Image Processing Settings"
● Linking the Image Processing Settings (E)

Among Multiple Images
Applies the image processing, which have
been done to one image, to other images at
once by linking multiple images.
(F) (H)
"■Linking Image Processing Among Multiple Images"
● Resetting the Image Processings (I) (G) (J)

Resets the image processings and reverses
the image status.
"■Resetting the Image Processings"
● “Organize preset list” 3. Drag the mouse pointer up, down, to left or to
right.
(K) Operation Items
(M) Items Contents

(N) Move up Increase contrast (GA)
(L)
(O)
Move down Reduce contrast (GA)
(P)
(Q) Move to left Reduce density (GS)
(R) Move to right Increase density (GS)
● “Register Preset Name” Up: Increased GA
5 (S)
Left: Reduced GS Right: Increased GS
(T)
Down: Reduced GA
■ Changing the Gradation →→The image changes contrast (GA) and density (GS).
(Contrast and Density)

Changes the image contrast temporarily. • In case of monochrome images other than FCR
images, the gradation changes as follows by
dragging up, down, to left, or to right.
Only the monochrome image can change the Operation Items
gradation.
Items Contents
Drag up Window center (WC) increases

Changes of contrast and density are temporary. To Drag down Window center (WC) decreases
save the changing result of gradation, change it by
FCR image processings. Drag to left Window width (WW) becomes
narrower
"■Editing FCR Image Processing Parameters"
Drag to right Window width (WW) becomes
wider
1. Click [Gradation] (A) on the "Basic operation"
• The mode changes in the following order by
tool bar.
right-clicking with holding the left mouse button on
→→The system enters the gradation change mode. the image.
Gradation Change Mode → Magnification/
Reduction Mode → Panning Mode → Gradation
You can do the same by right-clicking image pane Change Mode → ...
and selecting "Gradation".
4. To exit the gradation change mode, click

2. Move the mouse pointer over the image. [Gradation] (A) once again.
→→The shape of the mouse pointer will turn to .
You can do the same by right-clicking the image

pane and selecting “Gradation” once again.
→→The shape of the mouse pointer will return to .

■ Magnifying/Reducing
• When magnifying, the display position can be
moved by dragging the image.
Magnifying/Reducing images do not reflect for "■Moving Images"
printing or saving. • The mode changes in the following order by
right-clicking with holding the left mouse button on
the image.
Gradation Change Mode → Magnification/
Images will come up having their original status next Reduction Mode → Panning Mode → Gradation
time they are displayed.
Change Mode → ...
Images can be magnified or reduced in 2

methods: gradually magnifies or reduces, and 4. To exit the magnification/reduction mode,
magnifies or reduces with set conditions (fit to click [Magnification/reduction] (A) once
the window, in full size, or in pixel scale). again. 5
● Gradually Magnifying or Reducing

With the magnification/reduction mode, images You can do the same by right-clicking the image pane
can be magnified/reduced by dragging up or and selecting "Magnification/reduction" once again.
down on the image.
1. Click [Magnification/reduction] (A) on the
"Basic operation" tool bar. ● Magnifying or Reducing with the Set
→→ The system enters the magnification/reduction mode. Conditions
Magnifies or reduces with the following settings.
• AutoFit to Window :
You can do the same by right-clicking image pane
Displays images in a width fit to the image
and selecting "Magnification/reduction".
pane.
• 100%-Size Image :
2. Move the mouse pointer over the image. Displays images in actual life size (100%)
→→The shape of the mouse pointer will turn to . magnification based on the aspect ratio of an
image.
3. Drag the image and move the mouse pointer • Pixel Scale :
up or down. Displays images with their picture elements
Operation Items being represented each as one pixel of
monitor resolution.
Items Contents
Move up Magnifies 1. Select a image you want to magnify or

reduce.
Move down Reduces
→→The selected image pane will appear in bold
frame.
Size of images cannot reduce any smaller than its 2. Select [▼] of [Magnification/reduction] (A) on
original size. the "Basic operation" tool bar, select "Fit to
window", "100%-Size Image", or "Pixel
→→The image magnifies or reduces.
Scale".
→→The image is magnified or reduced with the
selected setting.

and selecting "Fit to window", "100%-Size Image",
or "Pixel Scale".

■ Magnifying Images by ■ Moving Images
Magnifying Glass
You can move the image only when the image is

The size of magnifying glass can be changed. magnified.
"11.2.2 Initial Settings of Annotation" "■Magnifying/Reducing"
1. Click [Magnifying glass] (A) on the "Basic 1. Click [Panning] (A) on the "Basic operation"
operation" tool bar. tool bar.
→→The system enters the magnifying glass mode. →→The system enters the image move mode.
5 • You can do the same by right-clicking image pane

and selecting "Magnifying glass".
pane and selecting “Panning”.
• To change the magnification of magnifying glass,

click [▼] under the [Magnifying glass] and select

the magnification.
2. Move the mouse pointer over the image.
2. Click (hold) the image. 3. With the left-hand button of the mouse held
→→The magnifying glass displays and the position pressed, drag the hand-shaped pointer over
where clicked (held) displays and magnifies. By
the image to an optional position.
releasing the mouse button, magnifying glass
→→The image moves to the way it is dragged.
exits.
The mode changes in the following order by right-

By dragging the image up, down, to left, or to right,
clicking with holding the left mouse button on the
the position of mouse pointer on the image magnifies.
image.
Gradation Change Mode → Magnification/Reduction
3. To exit the magnifying glass mode, click Mode → Panning Mode → Gradation Change Mode
→ ...
[Magnifying glass] (A) once again.
4. To exit the image move mode, click [Panning]

(A) once again.
and selecting "Magnifying glass" once again.

pane and selecting “Panning” once again.

■ Reversing Images ■ Rotating and Flipping
1. Select the image to rotate or flip.
Reversing is a temporal function. Images will come
→→The selected image pane will appear in bold frame.
up in their original status next time they are
displayed.
2. Click [Rotate] (A) on the "Basic operation"
tool bar.
1. Select the image to be reversed. →→The “Image rotation/reversal settings” window
→→ The selected image pane will appear in a bold frame. opens.
2. Click [Reverse] (A) on the "Basic operation"

tool bar. You can do the same by right-clicking the image
pane and selecting “Processing” - “Rotate/Flip”.
→→The target image is reversed.
5
3. Select the direction to be rotated or flipped

You can do the same by right-clicking image pane (B) (C).
and selecting “Processing” - “Reverse”.
Selection Items
Items Contents
No Horiz Flip Images not horizontally flipped
Original The original image in the current

Image direction shown in the “Image
Viewer” window
Rotate Right Rotated 90 degrees to the right

90°
Rotate Left Rotated 90 degrees to the left

90°
Rotate 180° Rotated 180 degrees
Horiz Flip Horizontally flipped image
Original The original image in the current

Image direction shown in the "Image
Viewer" window
Horizontal Horizontally flipped

Flip
Vert Flip Vertically flipped
H-Flip + Horizontally flipped and then

Right 90° rotated 90 degrees to the right
H-Flip + Left Horizontally flipped and then

90° rotated 90 degrees to the left
The frame of the selected image turns to green.
4. Click [Selection] (D).

→→The image rotates/flips.

■ Editing FCR Image Processing GP (Gradation Processing) Parameter
Parameters Items Contents
GA Slope of the gray level curve
Characteristics Adjust the image contrast

If you select an image other than an unprocessed
FCR image, the FCR image processing parameters Value range -4.0 to -0.1
cannot be modified. 0.1 to 4.0
(1 decimal place, excluding 0.0)
1. Select the image to edit FCR image GT Shape of the gray level curve
processing parameters. Characteristics Yield the same result as
→→ The selected image pane will appear in a bold frame. changing the γ-curve of X-ray
films
2. Click [FCR image processing] (A) on the Value range A to Z (26 types)
5 "Basic operation" tool bar.
GC Center density of gray level
→→The "Changing FCR Image Processing curve slope
Parameters" window opens.

Characteristics Change GA according to the
density specified here
You can do the same by right-clicking the image Value range 0.30 to 2.64 (2 decimal places)
pane and selecting "Processing" - "FCR image
GS Parallel shift of the gray level
processing".
curve
Characteristics Change the display density of

3. Click [+] or [-] and change the value of each the entire image
parameter (E).
Value range -1.44 to 1.44 (2 decimal places)
• When [+] or [-] are held, the parameter value

changes continuously. RP (Spatial Frequency Processing) Parameter
• To edit DRC processing parameters, select [DRC]
Items Contents
and then click [+] or [-].
• Certain image processing sequences have no RN Enhanced frequency band for
effect when carried out concurrently. Each image frequency processing
processing sequence takes the course shown
Characteristics The frequency band specified
below. here is subjected to enhanced
processing
DRC GP/MFP
Value range 0 to 9 (10 types)
RT Shape of the enhanced curve

TAS GP/RP corresponding to the density of
the image
Characteristics By changing this parameter, the

• By clicking [Default] (G), the parameter values can enhancement level can be
be changed to the default image processing adjusted within a certain density
region
parameters according to exposure menus.
• By clicking [Preset Setting] (F), if an image is an Value range F, P to Z (12 types)
unprocessed FCR image, the "Organize preset
RE Enhancement of frequency
list" window opens and image processing
processing
parameters can be changed to preset settings
which have been registered. ○: Exclusive control
Characteristics Change the enhancement level
1) Select [Anatomical Region] (K) and [Preset of processing in accordance with
the specified value
Name] (L).
2) Click [Apply] (Q). Value range 0.0 to 9.9 (1 decimal place)
10 to 16 (no decimal places)
→→Image processing parameters change to preset
settings and the previewing image of "Changing
FCR Image Processing Parameters" renews.

DRC (Dynamic Range Control Processing) Parameter MFP (Multi-objective Frequency Processing)
Parameter (Optional)
Items Contents
Items Contents
DRN Mask size of DR compression
MDB DR compression frequency type
Characteristics Set the processing region to
match DRT Characteristics Set the processing region to
match MDT
Value range 0 to 9 (10 sizes)
Value range A to Z (26 types)
DRT DR compression filter type
MDT DR compression filter type
Characteristics Set the density region for
processing Characteristics Set the density region for
processing
Value range A to T (20 types)
Value range A to T (20 types)
DRE Enhancement of DR
compression filter processing MDE Enhancement of DR
compression filter processing
5
of processing in accordance with Characteristics Change the enhancement level

the specified value of processing in accordance with
the specified value
Value range 0.0 to 2.0 (1 decimal place)
MRB Enhanced frequency band for

TAS (Tomographic Artifacts Suppression frequency processing
Processing) Parameter
Characteristics This frequency band is subjected
Items Contents to enhanced processing
ORN One-dimensional unsharpness Value range A to Z (26 types)
mask
MRT Shape of the enhanced curve
Characteristics Set the most effective size for the corresponding to the density of
tomographic angle the image
Value range 0 to 9 (10 sizes) Characteristics By changing this parameter, the
enhancement level can be
ORE Enhancement level of one-
adjusted within a certain density
dimensional unsharpness mask
region
processing
Value range F, P to Z (12 types)
of processing in accordance with MRE Enhancement of frequency
the specified value processing
Value range 0.0 to 9.9 (1 decimal place) Characteristics Change the enhancement level
10 to 16 (no decimal places) of processing in accordance with
ORD Processing direction of one- the specified value
dimensional unsharpness mask Value range 0.0 to 9.9 (1 decimal place)
Characteristics Set in accordance with the 10 to 16 (no decimal places)
reading direction and orbital
direction of tomography
Value range 0: The orbit is at right angles to

the green line of the cassette.
1: The orbit is parallel to the green
line of the cassette

Sensitivity, Latitude ■ Registering Preset Image
Items Contents Processing Settings
Sensitivity Central point of the image reading The image processing settings for the selected
(S-value) sensitivity established by the EDR
(automatic sensitivity adjustment image are registered as preset settings.
feature)
Characteristics The higher the incident X-ray level, 1. Select the image.
the lower the S-value becomes;
the lower the incident X-ray level, 2. Click [FCR image processing] (A) on the
the higher the S-value becomes
"Basic operation" tool bar.
Value range 4 to 20047
→→The "Changing FCR Image Processing
Latitude Reading latitude point of the image Parameters" window opens.
(L-value) reading sensitivity established by
the EDR (automatic sensitivity
3. Click [+] or [-] and set the parameter values
5 adjustment feature)
register as a preset settings (E).
Characteristics Give a logarithmic reading of the
range of incident X-ray levels "■Editing FCR Image Processing Parameters"
(minimum to maximum)
Value range 0.50 to 4.00 4. Click [Preset Setting] (F).
→→The "Organize preset list" window opens.
4. Click [Refresh] (H).
→→The image processes with modified condition and
5. Click [New Registration] (M).
the previewing image reproduces. →→The "Register Preset Name" window opens.
5. Check the previewing image and click [Apply] 6. Input the preset name in [Preset Name] (S).
(J).
→→The image in the sub-window changes and 7. Click [OK] (T).
displays according to the parameters.
→→The preset name registers.
8. Check the preset name.
• By clicking [Show/Hide] (O), whether to display as

a preset can be set.
• By clicking [Change Name] (N), the preset name
can be changed.
• By clicking [Delete] (P), the preset can be deleted.
• By dragging and dropping, the display order of
preset can be changed.
9. Click [Close] (R).

→→The system returns to "Changing FCR Image
Processing Parameters" window window.
10. Click [Cancel] ( I ).

■ Applying Preset Image Processing ■ Linking Image Processing
Settings Among Multiple Images
Batch processing of displayed images is When multiple images are displayed, applies
possible by selecting saved preset image the image processing, which have been done
processing. to one image, to other images at once by
linking multiple images.
• Apply the image processing of one sub-
Only unpressed FCR study image can apply the
window to other sub-window
preset settings.
• Apply same image processing to all of
images in the sub-window
1. Select the image to be manipulated.
→→The selected image pane will appear in a bold 1. Display the image to be linked.
frame. 5
2. Link images and sub-windows.
2. Click [Preset] (A) on the "Basic operation" • When an image processing of one sub-window is

tool bar (or [Preset all] on the "Other" tool applying to other sub-window, click all of on
bar). sub-windows to be linked.
→→The preset displays in the list. • When a same image processing is applying to all of
images in the sub-window, click on the sub-

3. Select the preset settings. window.
When the [Preset all] is clicked, settings to apply

3. Perform the image process.
from the preset settings of all of the body parts can "■Magnifying/Reducing" to "■Applying Preset
be selected, regardless of the displayed body part of Image Processing Settings"
the image. →→Applies the image processing, which have been
done to one image, to other images at once by
→→Image processing is done according to the linking multiple images.
selected preset settings.
■ Resetting the Image Processings

When preset settings are assigned to keypad keys, Resets the image processings and reverses
image processing can be done by pressing a keypad
the image status.
key.
"14.17 Preset Setting"
By resetting, the data returns to the state it was in
prior to being saved. Once results are saved, they
would not be undone if [Reset] is clicked.
"5.7 ■Saving the Image Processing Result and
Annotation"
The image processing can be undone or redone by

clicking [Restore]/[Retry] on the toolbar.
1. Click [Reset] (A) on the "Basic operation" tool

bar.
→→The image process resets and the data returns to
the state it was in prior to being saved.

5.5 Adding Annotations on Images
Arrows, shapes, text (character strings), and markers can be added to an image.

● Adding Arrows, Shape, and Text ● “Measurement function” Tool Bar
Arrows and shapes (ellipses, rectangles, or
polygons) can be drawn on images and text
can be added.
Also, system markers registered in advance
and user markers registered by a user can be
5 added. (A)
"■Adding Arrows/Shapes (Ellipses, Rectangles,

and Polygons)"
"■Adding Texts" (B)
"■Adding Markers"
● Adding Measured Values (C)

The following kinds of measured values can be
added.
• Measure line segment
• Simplified cardiothoracic ratio ● “Property change” Window
• Cardiothoracic ratio
• Interline angle
• Dual angle
• Cobb angle (D)
• VHS
"■Adding Measured Lengths" to "■Adding
Measured Hip Joint Angles"
● Adding Measured Pixel Values

The pixel value of one point on the image can
be displayed, and pixel values (average,
standard deviation, maximum value, minimum
value, and etc.) of range surrounded by the
diagram (ellipses, rectangles, and polygon) (E)
can be measured and added.

"■Adding Measured Pixel Values"
● Editing/Deleting Added Annotations

Annotations added on the image can be
edited/deleted.
"■Editing the Added Annotations" (D)
"■Deleting Added Annotations"
As in case of image editing, the data can be returned

to the state where it was in prior to being saved by
resetting the annotation before saving.
"5.4 ■Resetting the Image Processings" (E)

■ Adding Arrows/Shapes (Ellipses,
Rectangles, and Polygons)
1. Click an icon ([Arrow], [Ellipse], [Rectangle],

[Polygon]) (A) on the "Measurement function"
(D) tool bar.
You can do the same by right-clicking the image and

selecting "Annotation” - “Arrow” / “Ellipses” /
“Rectangles” / “Polygon”.
(E)
5
● “Marker Setting” Window →→The shape of the mouse pointer will turn to .

3. Specify a range of drawing with the mouse.
Operation Items
Items Contents
Arrows Dragged range from the start point

(F) to the end point
Shape
Ellipses Dragged ellipse’s range
Rectangles Dragged rectangle’s range
Polygon Click to specify each apex of

(G) polygon, and double-click on the
last apex
• Arrows, ellipses, and rectangles can be drawn by

clicking the start point and end point (same as
start point and end point of range to surround).
• It is possible to drag a mouse only inside the
image pane.
• When only two points or fewer are specified as
apex and the mouse is double-clicked, the display
returns to the status before apex specification.
→→An annotation is drawn over the range specified

with the mouse. The shape of the mouse pointer
will return to .

■ Adding Texts ■ Adding Markers
Adds system markers registered in advance or
1. Click [Text] (A) on the "Measurement user markers registered by a user.
function" tool bar.
1. Click [Marker] (A) on the "Measurement
function" tool bar.
You can do the same by right-clicking anywhere in
→→The "Marker Setting" window opens.
the image pane and selecting “Annotation” - “Text”.
2. Move the mouse pointer over the image. You can do the same by right-clicking anywhere in
the image pane and selecting “Annotation” - “Marker”.
5 2. Select the marker to use (F).

3. Click the mouse to specify the location to
input texts.
→→The text input area and the insertion point are • Click [System] to use system markers or [User] to
displayed. use user markers and switch the displayed
markers.
4. Input text. • The user markers can be registered or deleted.

System markers cannot be registered or deleted.
→→The entered text is displayed.
"14.16 Adding/Deleting User Marker"
Inputting texts up to a maximum of 120 characters

3. Click [Selection] (G).
are possible.

5. Click the mouse at a position outside the text
input area. →→The shape of the mouse pointer will turn to .
→→This operation will verify the text.

5. Click the mouse at a location where a marker
The shape of the mouse pointer will return to . is to be added.
→→A marker is displayed on the clicked point, and
The shape of the mouse pointer will turn to .

■ Adding Measured Lengths ■ Adding Measured Simplified
Cardiothoracic Ratios
Measurement results yielded by this processing are

presented only for reference purposes without any
warranties of their accuracy. It is the user’s
presented only for reference purposes without any
responsibility to evaluate the measurement results.
warranties of their accuracy. It is the user's
The measured results are displayed to two digit of

decimal point by round to the thousandth digit.
The measured results are displayed to thousandth
digit of decimal point by round to the ten-thousandth
digit.
1. Click [Measure line segment] (B) on the
"Measurement function" tool bar.
5
1. Click [Simplified cardiothoracic ratio] (B) on

the "Measurement function" tool bar.
the image pane and selecting “Annotation” -
“Measure line segment”.
“Simplified cardiothoracic ratio".
→→The shape of the mouse pointer will turn to . 2. Move the mouse pointer over the image.
3. Drag the mouse pointer from the start point →→The shape of the mouse pointer will turn to ,
to the end point of a straight line.
3. Click both edges of the longest span of the

medial borders of the thoracic cage.
Measurement can be performed by clicking the start
point and end point.
• By clicking the image, the vertical ruled line guide

displays.
* The picture below shows an operational procedure.
1) Click 2) Click
→→A linear length displays.
The shape of the mouse pointer will return to .
• The longest span of the medial borders can be

specified by dragging both edges of it.
→→The maximum inside diameter of the thoracic cage

is indicated.

cardiac shadow.
■ Adding Measured
Cardiothoracic Ratios
• By clicking the image, the vertical ruled line guide

displays. Measurement results yielded by this processing are
* The picture below shows an operational procedure. presented only for reference purposes without any
warranties of their accuracy. It is the user's
The measured results are displayed to thousandth

digit of decimal point by round to the ten-thousandth
1) Click
2) Click digit.
5
1. Click [Cardiothoracic ratio] (B) on the

• The longest span of the medial borders can be →→The selected image pane appears in bold frames.
specified by dragging both edges of it.

“Cardiothoracic ratio”.
3. Click the start point and end point of the

midline.
→→The maximum transverse diameter of the cardiac
shadow and CTR are indicated.
CTR mode exits and the shape of the mouse
medial borders of the thoracic cage.
pointer will return to .
The vertical ruled line guide displays adjusting with

the angle of midline.
→→The maximum inside diameter of the thoracic cage

is indicated.

cardiac shadow.
■ Adding Measured Interline Angles
Two lines are drawn on the image in the
"Image Viewer" window and the angle between
The longest span of the medial borders can be those two lines is measured and added on the
specified by dragging both edges of it. image.
Also, if there is no intersection on the screen,
the angle of the intersection of the lines
extended off screen is displayed.

presented for reference purposes without any
5

• Measurement result is rounded to first decimal
→→The maximum transverse diameter of the cardiac
place and displayed to second decimal place.
shadow and CTR are indicated.
• The angles which are to be measured can be
Cardiothoracic ratio mode exits, and the shape of
edited from within the lines drawn.
the mouse pointer will return to .
"■Editing the Added Annotations"
1. Click [Interline angle] (B) on the


“Interline angle”.

3. Draw a 1st line by dragging the mouse

pointer from the start point to the end point of
the line.

4. Draw a 2nd line by dragging the mouse
■ Adding Measured Dual Angles
the line. Adds on the image by drawing optional three
lines on the image of "Image Viewer" window
and measuring angles within 1st and 3rd line
Lines can be drawn by clicking the start and end and within 2nd and 3rd line.
point for 1st or 2nd line. Also, when the intersection does not exist on
the image, the angle of the intersection existed
outside of the image can be displayed.

5 responsibility to evaluate the measurement results.
→→The angle within two lines (measured result)

displays. The shape of the mouse pointer will • Measurement result is rounded to first decimal
return to .
"■Editing the Added Annotations"
1. Click [Dual angle] (B) on the "Measurement

function" tool bar.
You can do the same by right-clicking anywhere on

the image pane and selecting "General
measurement" - "Dual angle".

3. Draw a 1st line by dragging the mouse

the line.
4. Draw a 2nd line by dragging the mouse

the line.
5. Draw a 3rd line by dragging the mouse

the line.
Lines can be drawn by clicking the start and end

point for 1st, 2nd or 3rd line.
→→The angles within 1st and 3rd line and within 2nd
and 3rd line (measured result) display. The shape
of the mouse pointer will return to .

■ Adding Measured Cobb Angles ■ Adding Measured Pixel Values
1. Click [Pixel value] (C) on the "Measure Pixel
Measurement results yielded by this processing are value" too bar.
3. Click the position to measure the pixel value.

• Measurement result is rounded to first decimal
"■Editing the Added Annotations" 5
→→While clicking, the pixel value displays on the

1. Click [Cobb angle] (B) "Measurement upper part of mouse cursor.
function" tool bar.
■ Adding Measured Various ROIs

You can do the same by right-clicking anywhere on
Adds on the image by measuring pixel values
the image pane and selecting "General
(average value, standard deviation, maximum
measurement" - "Cobb angle".
value, minimum value, etc.) of region surrounded
by diagrams (ellipse, rectangle, polygon).
1. Click the button ([Ellipse ROI], [Rectangular
ROI], [Polygonal ROI]) (C) on the
"Measurement Pixel value" tool bar.
3. Draw a 1st line by dragging the mouse 2. Move the mouse pointer over the image.
pointer from the start point to the end point of →→The shape of the mouse pointer will turn to .
the line.
3. Specify the range to measure ROI.
4. Draw a 2nd line by dragging the mouse Operation Items
Items Contents
the line.
Ellipse ROI Drag the range surround by
ellipse
Lines can be drawn by clicking the start and end
Rectangular ROI Drag the range surround by
point for 1st or 2nd line. rectangle
→→The angle within two lines (measured result) Polygonal ROI Drag the range surround by
polygon
displays. The shape of the mouse pointer will
return to .
The range of ellipse ROI and rectangular ROI can be
specified by clicking the start and end point of the
range to be surrounded.

■ Editing the Added Annotations ● Editing Properties of Annotations
Edits the width of lines, colors of lines,
Edits the position and angle of annotations.
background/font/style of texts.
Also, properties (thickness of lines, fonts, etc.)
of annotations can be edited. 1. Right-click the annotation and select the
"Properties".
→→The "Property change" window opens.
If a new annotation is added surrounding the original
annotation, the original annotation cannot be Select the tab of the object to be edited, and
selected. By moving or editing the added annotation, set the width of line/color of line or font type/
the original annotation can be selected again. style/size.
2. Edit the properties (D).

● Editing the Position and Angle of
Annotations
5 Depends on the annotation, items are different.
1. Select the annotation. Annotations Editable properties
2. Edit the annotation. Arrow, Ellipse, Width and colors of lines

Rectangle, Polygon
Selection Contents
Text Font (character, style, size),
Items
font color, background
Move Drag the mouse pointer to the
Measure line Width and colors of lines
position destination
segment, Simplified
cardiothoracic ratio,
Drag Cardiothoracic ratio,
Interline angle, Dual
angle, Cobb angle
Marker Direction of marker

(horizontal flipping, rotation),
font color, background
Ellipse ROI, Display the line style, line

Move 1) Select the apex of the annotation Rectangular ROI, color, measurement angle,
measuring Polygonal ROI and supplementary angle
position
Select
Selection Items
Items Contents
2) Drag the mouse pointer to the
destination Width of line Select the thickness of lines of
→ The linear length is remeasured each annotation *1
while moving and displayed
Color of line Select the colors of lines of each
annotation *2
Font
Character Select the type font

Drag
Style Select from normal, italic, bold,
bold italic
Size Select from 5 to 96 points
Font color and

background
Font color Select the font color *2
Background Select the background *2
Flip horizontal

Items Contents ■ Deleting Added Annotations
Rotate
Original Image
90 right rotation If a new annotation is added surrounding the original

annotation, the original annotation cannot be
180 rotation
selected. By moving or editing the added annotation,
90 left rotation the original annotation can be selected again.
Font color and
background
(A) (B) (C) (D)

1. Select the annotation to be deleted.
A:W hite characters on black 2. Right-click anywhere in the image pane and
background
B:W hite characters on transparent
click [Delete].
background →→The selected annotation will be deleted.
C:B lack characters on white 5
background
D : Black characters on transparent

background To delete all of annotations on the image, right-click
the image pane and select "Delete all annotations on
Measurement Select the area of angle to be
angle measured image".
• Reference angle
Base of an angle at the time of
measurement
• Adjacent angle 1/Adjacent angle
2
An angle next to the reference
angle
• Vertically opposite angle
An angle on the diagonal line of
the reference angle
Vertically Vertically
opposite Adjacent opposite
angle angle 1 angle
Adjacent Adjacent
angle 2 angle 2
Reference
angle
Supplementary Put a check mark when displaying

angle will be the supplementary angle of an
displayed angle measured
*1 In case of an arrow, the apex of an arrow becomes

bigger or smaller in proportion to the setting of
width of line.
*2 Color which has been set displays on the box.
By clicking the box, the window to select colors
opens and the color can be changed.
3. Click [Apply] (E).

→→Properties changes according to the settings.

5.6 Free Drawing on “Image Viewer” for
Informed Consent
Lines can be drawn freely on the “Image Viewer” window with a pen.
■ Operation Windows ■ Using the Free Drawing Function

● “Other” Tool Bar
During use of the free drawing function, other
operations cannot be used. To use operations other
than free drawing function, click to turn the free
5 drawing mode off, or click

drawing mode.
to cancel the free
1. Click [Free Drawing] (A) on the "Other" tool

bar.
You can do the same by right-clicking the image and

selecting "Free Drawing".
(A) →→"Function" window appears.
2. Click each button (B) on the "Function"

● “Function” Window window to free draw.
Buttons Functions
Pen size
Click and select from the following
pen size
• Thin pen (3 points)
• Medium pen (9 points)
• Thick pen (27 points)
Pen color
Click and select the color
Drawing mode ON/OFF

Switching the function ON/OFF each
time of clicking
(B)
*1 *2
By clicking, capture the drew line and
screen
Delete all the drawn lines

*1 Captured image data displays in the "Paint".
*2 When images are displayed on multiple monitors,
the image data of both monitors are copied to the
clipboard as one file. In case of different screen
sizes, the images copied to the clipboard with their
upper edges aligned.
Image save arrangement:

Monitor configuration Image arrangement
Monitor 1 Monitor 1
Monitor 2 Monitor 2
5
Monitor 2 Monitor 2
Monitor 1 Monitor 1

3. Drag the mouse on the “Image Viewer”
window to draw a line.
4. To exit the free drawing function, click (B).

→→The “Function” window closes.
• When the free drawing function is ended, the

drawn lines are all deleted.
• When exiting the Free Drawing function, the
selected pen size and pen color are stored, and
they are set again when the Free Drawing function
is started again.

5.7 Saving/Verifying/Suspending Images
Saves the image processing result and annotation, makes the study status of images "Suspend" or
"Verified".
The studies whose status can be suspended or verified are the completed studies.
■ Operation Window ■ Verifying/Suspending Images

● “Sub-window”
5 If the study has been verified, the or cannot
be clicked.
1. Select the study and click (B) or (C).

(A) (B) (C) Functions of Each Button
Buttons Functions
[Suspend]*1 Leaves the study status as

"Completed"
The quality of images in the study

[Verify]*2 is verified.
The study is updated from the
"Completed" to the "Verified" study
■ Saving the Image Processing status
Result and Annotation

*1 Suspended studies are set aside from the scope of
automatic verification.
Once the study is saved, it cannot be undone by
“14.6 Auto-Determine Settings"
[Reset], [Restore]/[Retry].
*2 Images are automatically printed, saved, or
transmitted at the time of verification if settings are
configured to do so.
The following contents can be saved. • Saving to a storage disk
• Rotated or flipped images • Printing images in a study on a film (optional)
• FCR Image Processing Parameter • Transmitting to a DICOM server(optional)
• Assigned annotation (Arrows, ellipses, rectangles, “14.5 Setting of Printing, Saving and
polygons, texts, markers) Transmitting Images"
• General measurement (Measure line segment,
simplify cardiothoracic ratio, cardiothoracic ratio,
interline angle, hip joint angle, VHS)
• Pixel measurement (Ellipse ROI, rectangular ROI,
polygonal ROI)
1. Click (A) in the sub-window.

→→The image processing result and annotation are
saved.

Chapter 6
6

6.1 Outline of “Report” Window............................................... 6-2
6.2 Creating/Editing the Report................................................ 6-3
6.3 Editing the Schema or Fixed Phrase.................................. 6-6

6.1 Outline of “Report” Window
(1) (2) (1) Print/Save as PDF file
The report format can be specified, and the
(3) report can be printed out or saved as PDF file.
“8.5 Printing a Report”
(2) Save/Verify/Re-edit
The created or edited report can be saved or
verified. The saved/verified report also can be
(4)
edited again.
“6.2 ■Saving/Verifying a Report”
(3) Delete
The report can be deleted.
“6.2 ■Deleting a Report”
6 (4) Schema
(5)
• Select the same schema as the exposure
region and assign it.

“6.2 ■Creating/Editing the Report”
• The annotation function and the free drawing
function can be used on the assigned
schema.
• The schema can be registered or deleted.
“6.3 ■Editing the Schema”
(6)
(5) Thumbnail
Assign thumbnail images of the study.
(6) Comment
• Comment can be input to the target patient or
study images.
• The registered fixed phrase can be inserted.
• The fixed phrase can be edited/added.
“6.3 ■Editing the Fixed Phrase”

6.2 Creating/Editing the Report
Creates or edits a report to save or verify.
■ Operation Windows ● “Select schema” Window

● “Basic Operation Tool bar”
(T)
(A)
● “Report” Window 6
(B)(C)(D) (E) (U)

(F) (G) (H) (I)
(J)
● “Select fixed phrase” Window
(V)
(K) (L) (M)

(N) (X)
(W)
● “Register” Window
(Y)
(R)
(Z)
(O) (P) (Q)
(S)
The display settings of a report can be performed in

the [Customize] - [Report] in “Image Viewer” window.
“11.2.6 Display Settings of Report”

■ Creating/Editing the Report 5. Attach an annotation to the schema or draw
freely(J).
1. Display the image in the sub-window. Functions of Each Button
“5.3 Selecting and Arranging Images” Buttons Functions

→→The “Report” window opens if the image is to be Select an annotation on the schema
created in the report. *1
2. To create a new report, click [Open report] (A) *1

Drag from the start point to the end
point
of the tool bar.
→→The “Report” window opens. Enter a text by clicking the position to
*1 enter a text
Draw a line on the dragged track by

• You can do the same by right-clicking anywhere on *2 dragging
the image pane and selecting [Open report].
After an arrow is drawn by dragging the
• If the default schema is set, it will be assigned *1 start and end point of an arrow, enter a
automatically. text on the end point
6 “6.3 ■Editing the Schema”
After an arrow is drawn by dragging the
*1*3 start and end point of an arrow, the
number displays automatically on the

3. To set a schema, click (G). end point
→→The “Select schema” window opens.
*1 The operation of an annotation on a schema is

• Click (F) to assign a favorite schema. the same as the operation on the “Image Viewer”
“6.3 ■Editing the Schema” window.
”5.5 ■Adding Arrows/Shapes (Ellipses,
• Click (H) to open the “Schema setting
Rectangles, and Polygons)”, ”5.5 ■Adding
edit” window opens.
Texts”
“6.3 ■Editing the Schema”
“5.5 ■Editing the Added Annotations”
• Click ( I ) to clear the assigned schema. “5.5 ■Deleting Added Annotations”
*2 Lines drawn can be edited same as annotations.
4. Select a schema to be used(T) and click “5.5 ■Editing the Added Annotations”
*3 The number can be set in the column at the right
[Select] (U).
side of the button.
→→The selected schema is assigned.
6. Drag and drop the image to be displayed in

You can do the same by double-clicking the schema the report to the thumbnail (N).
to be used.
→→The thumbnail images are assigned.
• Set to ON by (K), reprint including

annotations at the time of printing report.
• Click (L) to register the key image as a

thumbnail image.
“5.3 ■Registering Displayed Images as a Key
Image”
• Click (M) to clear the thumbnail image in

the thumbnail column.

7. Input comments in each column (R). ■ Saving/Verifying a Report
Click the desired button to use the following
functions. • Save: Save the report temporarily. The report can
be edited.
Functions of Each Button • Verify: Verify the image together. The report cannot
Buttons Functions be edited.
(O)*1*2 Insert a registered fixed

phrase. 1. Click (B) or (C).
1. Select an fixed phrase (V) in
the “Select fixed phrase” Functions of Each Button
window.
2. Click [Select] (X). Buttons Functions
→ The fixed phrase is inserted.
Save the report
(P) Register the currently input text
as a fixed phrase.
Verify the report
1. Input in the [Heading] (Y) in
the “Register” window.
2. Click [Register] (Z).
6
→ The fixed phrase is →→ is displayed in the thumbnail of “Refer” window.
registered.

Also, “ ” is attached to the target tree of the
Clear the currently input text. study in study summary.
(Q)
Insert the text “Nothing

(S)*3
abnormal” in all comment • The study can be verified automatically again at
columns.
the time of clicking (B)
*1 Click the [Select](X) and the counts in “The
number of use” of the inserted fixed phrase
• Verified report contents can be edited by clicking
increases.
*2 Put a check mark to “Close the screen after (D).
inserting”(W) to close the window and return to the Editing report:“■Creating/Editing the Report”
“Report” window after clicking [Select](X).
*3 It is possible to edit the text other than “Nothing
abnormal”.
■ Deleting Reports
1. Open a report.
2. Click (E).
→→The message to confirm the deletion appears.
3. Click [OK].

6.3 Editing the Schema or Fixed Phrase
The schema can be registered or deleted, and the fixed phrase can be added or edited.
■ Operation Windows ● “Select fixed phrase” Window

● “Report” Window (I)
(J)
(K)
(A) (L)
6
● “Register” Window
(M)
(N)
(B)
● “Schema setting edit” Window
(C) (D) (E) (F) (G) (H)

■ Editing the Schema ■ Registering the Fixed Phrase
Types of schema can be added/deleted, and the
default schema or favorite schema can be set. 1. Click (B) in the comment column in
which the fixed phrase is to be registered.
1. Click the (A) in the schema column. →→The “Select fixed phrase” window opens.
→→The “Schema setting edit” window opens.
2. Edit the schema.

Click when the comment column is input
Functions of Each Button with text to register it as the fixed phrase.
Buttons Functions
[New item] (E) 1) Select “User setting” tab (C). 2. Click [Add] (K).
2) Click [New item] (E). →→The “Register” window opens.
→ The “Open” window opens.
3) Select the file of schema.
4) Click [Open]. 3. Input the fixed phrase (M).
[Delete] (D) Delete the selected schema.
1) Select the schema (C) *1 (G)
Input Items
6
2) Click [Delete] (D). Items Contents

Register the selected schema as a Heading Input the heading of the fixed phrase
default schema or favorite schema.
Content Input the contents of the fixed phrase
Select the schema (C).
1) Click (F) of default schema
or favorite schema according to the
destination to register.
4. Click [Register] (N).
*1 Only the schema in the “User setting” tab can be
deleted.
3. Click [Setting is completed] (H).
■ Editing the Fixed Phrase

1. Click (B) in the comment column in
which the fixed phrase to be edited is
registered.
→→The “Select fixed phrase” window opens.
2. Select the fixed phrase ( I ).

3. Click [Edit] (J).
→→The “Register” window opens.
Clicking [Delete] (L) to delete the selected fixed

phrase.
4. Edit the fixed phrase (M).

Input Items
Items Contents
Heading Edit the heading of the fixed phrase
Content Edit contents of the fixed phrase
5. Click [Register] (N).

6

Chapter 7
Image Storage
from Each Window
7
7.1 Relationships between Windows and Storage Destinations... 7-2

7.2 Displaying Dialogs for Saving............................................ 7-3
7.2.1 Starting from the “Refer” Window................................ 7-3
7.2.2 Starting from the “Image Viewer”................................. 7-4
7.2.3 Starting from the “Study Utilities”................................ 7-5
7.3 Saving to Storage Disks...................................................... 7-6
7.4 Transmitting Studies to DICOM Server (Optional)............ 7-7
7.5 Saving to Work Disks.......................................................... 7-8
7.6 Saving in a General-Purpose File Format (Optional)...... 7-10
7.7 Saving to PDI Disks........................................................... 7-13

7.1 Relationships between
Windows and Storage Destinations
Saves images from the “Refer” window, “Image Viewer”, and “Study Utilities”. Displays dialogs for
saving in accordance with media type in each window, and then specify the storage method such as
priority and density before saving.
Display the Storage Setting Window Set Storage Method Save Images to Destination
“Main” Window - “Refer” Window
Click
General-Purpose Image
7 Storage Setting Dialog of each window

“Image Cart” (The following dialog is an example
when saving to storage disks.) DICOM Server
Click
Work Disks
Storage Disks
PDI Disks
“Study Utilities” (CD-R, DVD-R)
Click
NAS
● List of Destinations that can be Used from Each Window

Storage Disk DICOM Server Work Disk General-Purpose PDI
(NAS) File Format
“Refer” Window ○ ○ × × ○
Image Viewer × × × ○ ○
Study Utilities ○ ○ ○ × ○

7.2 Displaying Dialogs for Saving
Saves images from the “Refer” window, “Image Viewer”, and “Study Utilities”.
7.2.1 Starting from the “Refer” Window

Searches the patient and saves the images shown in the “Refer” window to each media.
This section describes how to display dialogs for saving from the “Refer” window according to the
storage media.
■ Operation Window ■ Displaying Dialogs for Saving

● “Main” Window - “Refer” Window 1. Search the patient.
Select the patient and the image to be “4.2 Searching for Patients”
referred.
2. From the “patient list” (A), select the patient
in a “Verified” study status.
7
→→The image is displayed in the “Refer” window (B).
3. Select the image (B) to be saved.

4. Click the desired button (C) according to the
storage media.
Buttons Functions
Save to storage disks*1

(A) “7.3 Saving to Storage Disks”
Transmit to the DICOM Server*1

“7.4 Transmitting Studies to DICOM Server”
Save to PDI Disks*1

(B)
*1 The image whose study status is “Verified“ cannot
be saved or transmitted.
(C) *1
If the selected studies except for “Verified” are
selected, a message displays to verify.
items must be added in the “Display Settings”.

7.2.2 Starting from the “Image Viewer”
Saves images registered in the “Image Cart” in the “Image Viewer” window.
This section describes how to display dialogs for saving from the “Image Cart” according to the storage
media.

● “Image Cart” 1. Drag and Drop the images to the “Image
(A) Cart”.
• The images can be dragged and dropped from the

“study summary”, thumbnail images in the sub-
window, and the “Refer” window.
• You can do the same by right-clicking the images
in the sub-window and selecting “Put in an image
cart”.
• Click to clear the images in the “Image Cart”.
7
2. Click the desired button (A) according to the
storage media.
Buttons Functions
Save in a DICOM format

“7.6 Saving in a General-Purpose
File Format (Optional)”
Save in a BMP/JPEG file format

“7.6 Saving in a General-Purpose
File Format (Optional)”
Save to PDI Disks


7.2.3 Starting from the “Study Utilities”
Searches the study and saves the images shown in the list to each storage media.
This section describes how to display dialogs for saving from the “Study Utilities” according to the
storage media.

● “Study Utilities” 1. Search the study.
“12.3 Searching for Studies and Creating New
Queries”
(A)
(B)
3. Click the desired menu (B) in [Storage/Print]
according to the storage media.
Selection Items
Items Contents 7
Storage Disk Save to storage disks*1

“7.3 Saving to Storage Disks”
DICOM Transmit to the DICOM Server*1

Transmission
“7.4 Transmitting Studies to
DICOM Server”
Work Disk Save to work disks*1

“7.5 Saving to Work Disks”
Create PDI Save to PDI Disks*1

*1 The image whose study status is other than

“Verified“ cannot be saved or transmitted.
If the selected studies include those other than

“Verified“, a message displays to verify.

7.3 Saving to Storage Disks
Saves images automatically to the storage disk set in the PC’s control drive when the study is verified.
Automatic storage: “14.5 Setting of Printing, Saving and Transmitting Images”.
This section describes how to save or save again when [Automate Saving] is not activated.
If the same study already exists on the destination storage disk, it is overwritten.
■ Operation Window ■ Saving the Screen

● “Storage Disk Settings” Window 1. Select the Priority (A).
LOW: Give higher priority to other save
operations.
MEDIUM: Save with the ordinary priority.
HIGH: Start to save immediately.
7 (A)
2. Click [Output] (B).
When the disk access lamp is ON, do not press the

(B) Eject button on the disk drive.
“2.7 Before Using Disks“.

7.4 Transmitting Studies to DICOM
Server (Optional)
Transmits the unprocessed FCR study images to the DICOM server when the study is verified.
“14.5 Setting of Printing, Saving and Transmitting Images”
This section describes how to manually save or save again when [Automate Saving] is not activated.
■ Operation Window ■ Saving the Screen

● “Settings for DICOM Transmission” 1. Set the transmission settings (A).
Window
Selection Items
Items Contents
Destination Specify a destination

Example: DICOM Server
(A)
Density [Default Pixel Count]*1:
Transmit images with a reduced pixel
density and hence in a smaller file size 7
(B)
[Max Pixel Count]:

Transmit images with their pixel density
unchanged
Priority [LOW]:
Give higher priority to other save
operations
[MEDIUM]:
Save with the ordinary priority
[HIGH]:
Start to save immediately
*1 The transmitted image size decreases.

7.5 Saving to Work Disks
Saves all the images in a selected study to work disks.
• If the same study already exists on the destination work disk, it is overwritten.
• The Magnify/Reduce of image has no effect on storage to work disk.
■ Operation Windows ■ Saving the Screen

● “Work Disk Storage Settings” Window 1. Insert a work disk in the control drive of the
(Start from the “Study Utilities”) PC.
2. Set the transmission settings (A).

Selection Items
Items Contents
7 (A)
Destination Specify a drive to be used
Example: DVD
Compression [Uncompressed]:
Save images without compression
(B) [JPEG Lossless]:

Save images with compression
The image file size decreases
Compressed images can fully be
restored
• “2.7 Before Using Disks“.
Density [Default Pixel Count]:
• “10.3 Verifying Disk Status and Maintenance“. Save images with a reduced pixel
density and hence in a smaller file
size
[Max Pixel Count]:

Save images with their pixel density
unchanged
Image Proc. [Processed]:

Perform FCR image processing and
display gradation correction for the
pixel data in the images to be
saved*1
[Unprocessed]:
The FCR image processing and
display gradation correction for the
pixel data are not performed to the
images to be saved*2
Annotation [No]:
Output Annotations are not saved to work
disks
[Yes]:
Annotations are save to work disks

*1 Image data thus processed is accessible to the
DICOM server for viewing the same way as FCR
PRIMA Console views them when the DICOM
server does not support FCR image processing
and display gradation correction processing.
*2 Choose [Unprocessed] to handle images on
equipment that supports FCR image processing.
Although images that have been saved with

[Processed] being selected can be reloaded into the
FCR PRIMA Console, the images thus loaded
cannot be printed on film (optional). If you plan to
perform these operations, select [Unprocessed]
when saving.
When the disk access lamp is ON, never press the

Eject button on the disk drive.
7

7.6 Saving in a General-Purpose File
Format (Optional)
Images for a study can be saved in a general-purpose file format, such as “.jpg” or “.bmp”.
Images saved in these formats can be used for purposes such as presentation.
Patient information file

Image files
xxx.txt
xxx.jpg
7 xxx.bmp
(The file format has been set
at installation.)
No patient information file is created for images saved in the DICOM server.
• The destination is determined by the installation setting.

• If modifications have been made to the status of image display, some modifications have effects on film print but
some do not.
- FCR Image Processing : Applicable
- Annotation : Applicable
- Rotate/Flip : Applicable
- Magnify/Reduce : Not applicable
- Gradation Correction : Applicable
- Reverse : Applicable
• The image displayed in the sub-window can be saved as a thumbnail image by clicking the “Thumbnail image
transfer” of “Other” tool bar.

● “General-Purpose File” Window (as a ● Saving in a BMP or JPEG File Format
BMP or JPEG File Format) All the images for a selected study can be
saved in a general-purpose file format.
1. Set the transmission settings (C).

Input / Selection Items
(C)
Items Contents
Save format JPEG: JPEG format

The file extension is “.jpg”
BMP: BITMAP format.
The file extension is “.bmp”
(D) Patient information files are always

saved in the text format
The file extension is “.txt”
Image Specify the image quality when the

● “DICOM file output” Window quality*1 image is saved in the JPEG format
[Low]: 7
Save images with low image quality
and high compression

[Standard]:
Save images with standard image
(E) quality and standard compression
[High]:
Save images with high image quality
and low compression
(F)
Annotation [Yes]:
Output Annotation is saved with the image
[No]:
Annotation is not saved with the image
Destination Click , and the “Browse for Folder”

folder for window opens. Specify a destination
storage folder to save
File name Input a file name
*1 Set only if saving in JPEG file format.
• Saving progress can be confirm in the “Progress of

saving” column
• When the same file is already existed, the
message to confirm whether to overwrite or not
appears.
→→The “General-Purpose File” window closes after

saving process completed.
3. Check if the files have been created in the

specified folder.

● Saving in a DICOM Format
All the images for a selected study can be
saved in a DICOM format.
1. Set the transmission settings (E).

Selection Items
Items Contents
Output images Put a check mark to output images

with with annotations embedded
annotations
embedded
Save Put a check mark to save the

information information
with multi-byte
characters
(Kanji, Kana)
Folder Input a storage destination folder

targeted for name
data storage Click to open the “Browse For
Folder” window, and the folder in
7 which files is saved can be
specified.
File name Input a file name
2. Click [Next] (F).

→→The saved file name and percentage progress of
the storage can be verified.
When the same file is already existed, the message

to confirm whether or not to overwrite appears.
3. Click [Close] after the storage completes.

→→The “Save multi-purpose file” window close.
4. Check if the files have been created in the

specified folder.

7.7 Saving to PDI Disks
The study images can be saved to CD-R disks or DVD-R disks in PDI format.
• Studies that can be saved as a PDI file are only those with a “Verified” study status.
• Unformatted or unused formatted 640MB or 700MB CD-R disks can be used.
• Unformatted or unused formatted 4.7GB DVD-R disks can be used.
• Before saving study image in PDI disk, write the following information on the surface of the PDI disk to prevent
confusing with study image for other patient ID.
- Patient name
- Birth date
- Disk creation date
- Study date (write all if more than one)
- Facility name
• The process takes time when a large quantity of PDI data is saved to a DVD-R disk. As a guide value for the
processing time, it takes about 15 minutes to save all measuring data.

● ”PDI creation wizard” 1. Insert a CD-R or DVD-R into the disk drive
tray.
(A) 2. To output images with annotations

embedded, put a check mark to “Output
images with annotations embedded” (A).
3. Click [Next] (B).

→→Writing to the CD-R or DVD-R disk starts.
(B)
Progress is displayed when write to CD-R or
● “Disk writing finished.” DVD-R disk starts. Do not press the Eject button
or use any other program while writing.
Otherwise, write may not complete properly.
Note that once write starts, it cannot be canceled.
(C)
7
The following messages might be displayed. To
continue the PDI file creation, perform the
following procedures.
• “No disk is inserted.”, or “Unable to write to this
disk.”
Reset the correct CD-R or DVD-R disk and then
click [Next] in the “PDI Creation Wizard” window.
• “Unable to write to this disk because the
capacity is exceeded.”
(D) Remove the CD-R or DVD-R disk from the disk
drive tray and click [OK]. If multiple studies are
selected, reduce the number of studies and redo
with a new CD-R or DVD-R disk.
→→The dialog “Disk writing finished” (C) opens when

write to CD-R or DVD-R disk completes, and the
drive tray opens.
4. Remove the CD-R or DVD-R disk from the

disk drive tray.
5. Click [Close] (D).
If a PDI file is created in the storage disk drive, set

the storage disk in the drive.

Chapter 8
Image Print
from Each Window
8.1 Printing Types and Flow...................................................... 8-2
8.2 Displaying Print Dialogs...................................................... 8-4 8

8.2.1 Starting from the “Refer” Window................................ 8-4
Image Print from Each Window

8.2.2 Starting from the “Image Viewer”................................. 8-5
8.2.3 Starting from the “Study Utilities”................................ 8-6
8.3 Printing on a Film (Optional)............................................... 8-7
8.4 Free Layout Printing............................................................ 8-9
8.5 Printing Report................................................................... 8-13

8.1 Printing Types and Flow
This section describes the types of printing applicable to FCR PRIMA Console and the flow of printing.
■ Types of Printing
The following printing methods are applicable to FCR PRIMA Console.
● Film Print (Optional)

Prints images on a film with the destination and print count set. An unprocessed FCR study image
prints automatically on the film when completing an exposure or verifying a study.
Automatic output: “14.5 Setting of Printing, Saving and Transmitting Images”
When automatic output is not activated or print again, manually printing is possible.
When [Output after Re-verified] in the “User Utilities” printer settings has been unchecked (setting for no film
printing at the time of inspection re-verification), print output has to be performed manually in image units at the
time of adding study menu.
Check the indicator to check the printer status.
8 “10.5 Verifying Film Printer Status (Optional)”
● Free Layout Print

Prints multiple images to one piece of film with a free layout. The image size can be adjusted, and the
additional image information or annotation can also be added to the output.
● Print Report
Prints reports created in the “Image Viewer” window.
”6.2 Creating/Editing the Report”

■ Printing Flow
FCR PRIMA Console can print a study from the “Refer” window, “Image Viewer” window, and “Study
Utilities”. Prints studies by displaying the printing window according to the printing method on each
window and setting contents for printing such as selecting the object to be printed or numbers of
printings.
Display Print Dialog Set Printing Method Print
“Main” Window ー”Refer” Window

Film Print
FUJI HOSPITAL 04001676 A 0000 A 020
G 1.1G#0.9+0.30 R 5TO.3 D 2MO.2 R-> L G 1.0G#0.9+0.30 R 5T0.31. D 2MO.2

SKULL, GENERAL 0000000001 John Smith [M] 23
1992. 11. 27 [17:43]
L 2.0 S 187 C *1.0*1.0 AP SCALE: 50% RT-04
Free Layout Print

“Image Viewer”

Report Print
“Study Utilities”
● List of Print Destination that can be Used from Each Window

Film Print Free Layout Print Report Print
“Refer“ window ○ ○ x
Image Viewer ○ ○ ○
Study Utilities ○ ○ x

8.2 Displaying Print Dialogs
Images can be printed from the “Refer” window, “Image Viewer”, and “Study Utilities”.
8.2.1 Starting from the “Refer” Window

Searches the patient and prints the images shown in the “Refer” window to each media.
This section describes how to display print dialogs from “Refer” window according to the printing
method.
■ Operation Window ■ Displaying Print Dialogs

● “Main“ Window - “Refer“ Window 1. Search the patient.
Select the patient and the print dialog appears. “4.2 Searching for Patients”

→→The image is displayed in the “Refer” window (B).
3. Select the image (B) to be printed.

8 4. Click the desired button (C) according to the
printing method.

(A) Buttons Functions
Print images on a film

Print image with a free layout print

(B)
“8.4 “Free Layout Printing“
(C) *1
If the selected studies include those other than
“Verified“, a message displays to verify.
items must be added in the Display Settings.

8.2.2 Starting from the “Image Viewer”
Prints images displayed in the “Image Cart” of “Image Viewer”.
This section describes how to display print dialogs from the “Image Viewer” according to the printing
method.

● “Image Cart” 1. Drag and Drop the images to the “Image
(A) Cart”.
• The images can be dragged and dropped from the

“study summary”, thumbnail images in the sub-
window, and the “Refer” window.
• You can do the same by right-clicking the images
in the sub-window and selecting “Put in an image
cart”.
• Click to clear the images in the “Image Cart”.
2. Click the desired button (A) according to the

printing method.
8

Buttons Functions


“8.4 Free Layout Printing”

8.2.3 Starting from the “Study Utilities”
Searches studies and prints the images shown in the list.
This section describes how to display print dialogs from the “Study Utilities” according to the printing
method.

● “Study Utilities” 1. Search the study.
“12.3 Searching for Studies and Creating New
Queries”
(A)
3. Click the menu (B) in [Storage/Print]

according to the printing method.
Selection Items
(B)
Items Contents
8 Film Print “8.3 Printing on a Film

(Optional)”

Free Layout
“8.4 “Free Layout Printing“
*1 The images whose study status is other than

“Verified“ or “Completed“ cannot be printed.
If the selected studies include those except for

“Verified“ or “Completed“, a message displays to
verify.

8.3 Printing on a Film (Optional)
Prints images on a film with the destination and print count set. The setting items shown in the print dialog are
different between starting from the “Refer” window / ”Study Utilities” and starting from the “Image Viewer”.
Image magnification and reduction will have no effect on the printing of images in the case of [Film Print].
■ Operation Windows ■ Printing on a Film

● “Film Print Settings” Window ● Starting from the “Main Window” -
(Start from the “Main” Window - “Refer”
“Refer” Window or “Study Utilities”
Window or “Study Utilities”)
1. Set the film print settings (A).
Selection Items
Items Contents
(A) Destination Print destination
Target
All imgs Print all the images in the study on 8

included in a a film. Images already printed on a
study film are reprinted

(B)
Study imgs Print only those images in a film that

● “Film Print” Window yet-to-be
output
have not been printed on a film
(Start from the “Image Viewer”)

Print Count 1 to 9 copies can be printed
Priority
LOW Give higher priority to other save

operations
MEDIUM Save with the ordinary priority
HIGH Start to save immediately
(C)
(D)

● Starting from the “Image Viewer”
1. Set the film print settings (C).
Items Contents
Print Destination Print Destination
Print Count 1 to 9
Print Format
Single Format
2 ON 1 Format*1
4 ON 1 Format*2
Prioritized Output Print images in this study on a

priority basis
Film Count The film requirement is

8 calculated from the “Print
Count” and “Print Format” and
is shown in the “Film Count”
field
Annotation Output
Yes Output annotations
No Not output annotations
*1 P
rint two different images on a single film.
Printed images are arranged from left to right in
the study window.
*2 P
rints four different images on a single film.
Printed images are arranged from upper left to
upper right, lower left to lower right in the study
window.
2. Click [Output] (D).

8.4 Free Layout Printing
Prints multiple images to one piece of film with a free layout. The image size can be adjusted, and the
additional image information or annotation can also be added to the output.
■ Operation Windows ● “Format information setting“

Create/Set additional image information format.
● “Free layout print” (H)

Set the layout of images, display/hide the
additional image information and annotation.
(A) (B)
(I)
(C)
(D)
(J)
● “Input format name“

Sets the additional image information format
name.
(E)
8
● “Footer information setting“
(K)

Set to display/hide footer and the footer (L)
information.
(F)
(G)

■ Free Layout Printing Images can be moved inside the
cell. Move the mouse pointer
over the image and it will turn to
1. Select Printer and Film Size (C). .
Specify the range by mouse

2. Select layout orientation. dragging to trim and display the
(Landscape: , Portrait: ) specified range. The trimmed
range will be displayed with the
→→A message displays to confirm, click [OK].
frame fitted to the cell window.
If moving the mouse pointer over
3. Select print format (C). the image, the shape of the
mouse pointer will turn to .
1) Click .
Change the window level to a
2) Move the pointer on the grid and click to specify *1
monochrome image.
rows and columns. If moving the mouse pointer over
the image, the shape of the
mouse pointer will turn to .
When the cursor is moved onto the border of the
The value of WC (Window Center) and
cell, it changes to or and the cell width or WW (Window Wide) can be changed
height can be changed. according to the dragging direction of
the mouse pointer.
• Up: WC value increases.
• Down: WC value decreases.
4. Select the images for the layout from the • Left: WW value increases.
thumbnail display section (A). • Right: WW value decreases.
8 Switch the position of the image.

Move the mouse pointer over the
Images can be switched by following buttons. image and it will turn to .
: The images of the previous patient

a. Drag the selected source
appears image to be switched.
b. Drop it onto the target image to
: The images of the next patient appears
be replaced.
: The previous images of the same patient
Undo the change.
appears
: The next images of the same patient Delete a selected image.

appears A message displays to verify
deletion.
Delete all images in the image

5. Drag an image and drop it at the desired window.
layout position (B). A message displays to verify
deletion.
→→A check mark is put on the thumbnail of the image.
*1 Edited WC and WW values can be set to display/
6. Adjust image size and position with the hide as an image attribute information.
desired buttons (D).
The deletion of image cannot be undone.
Buttons Functions Select an image again on the thumbnail (A) and the
The image zooms in with every image can be added to the image window.
click. Move the mouse pointer
over the image and it will turn to
.
• In magnifying or reducing operation, images can
The image zooms out with every
click. Move the mouse pointer be moved without clicking .
over the image and it will turn to • The image display positions are switched by
. drag-and-drop of the image.
• The Display/Hide settings for layout format,
additional image information and footer are not
deleted.

7. Set the footer information. 10. Click (E).
1) Click (D). →→Click [OK] if a message displays to verify.
2) Set the footer information (F). The film print starts.
Selection Items
Items Contents
Display footer Select from [Yes] or [No]
Footer Select from [Left], [Center], or

position [Right]
When is clicked, Patient ID, patient name,

sex, date, and facility name are added to the text
box. The added information can be edited.
3) Click (G).
In case of landscape layout, the footer information

is displayed on the right side.
8. Select the annotation, additional image

information, and ruler to display/hide.
8
Selection Items

Buttons Functions
All the annotations appear
All the additional image information

appear
The scale of the selected cell

displays
All the scale of the selected cell

displays
9. Select the additional image information

format when displaying them.
1) Click (D).
The “Format information setting” window opens.
2) Select the format in “Current Format“ (H).
3) Click [OK].
The additional image information format can be created

or set in the “Format information setting” window.
“■Creating Additional Image Information Format”
“■Editing Additional Image Information Format”

■ Creating Additional Image ■ Editing Additional Image
Information Formats Information Formats
1. Click (D). 1. Click (D).

→→The “Format information setting“ window opens. →→The “Format information setting“ window opens.
2. Click (H). 2. Select the format in “Current Format“ (H).

→→The “Input format name“ window opens. →→The displaying position and contents of additional
image information are shown.
3. Enter format name (K).
3. Modify items to be displayed as creation.
4. Click [OK] (L). “■ Creating Additional Image Information Formats”
→→Return to the “Format information setting“ window.
The format name input in 3. shows in the “Current 4. Click [OK] (J).
Format“ →→The format is created. Return to the “Format
information setting“ window.
5. Select the position and items to be displayed
in the additional image information ( I ).
1) Select the position of the additional image The display contents for the additional image
information on [Top-left], [Top-right], [Bottom-left], information of each image can be set even after
or [Bottom-right]. image layout.
8
2) Select the items to be displayed from the “List of
information items”.
3) Click .
■ Deleting Formats
The selected items are added.
1. Click (D).
The height displays and outputs in meters, and the
→→The “Format information setting“ window opens.
weight displays and outputs in kilograms.
2. Select the format in “Current Format“ (H).

→→The displaying position and contents of additional
For deletion of an item, select the additional image
image information are shown.
information displayed in the box at [Top-left], [Top-
right], [Bottom-left], or [Bottom-right] and then click
3. Click (H).
.
→→The format is deleted.
6. Click [OK] (J).

→→The format is created. Return to the “Format
information setting“ window.
■ Finishing
1. Click [Close] in the “Free layout print”
window.
→→A message displays to verify.
2. Click [OK].
→→The ”Free layout print” window closes.

8.5 Printing Report
The created report can be printed out or saved as a PDF file.
■ Operation Window ■ Printing a Report

● “Report” Window 1. Select the report format from the pull-down
(A) (B) menu (A).
2. Click (B).
→→The AdobeReader starts and the preview of the
report displays.
Click “No, thank you” if “Improvement Program”

appears.
3. Print the report.
■ Saving the Report as PDF File 8

1. Select the report format from the pull-down
menu (A).
2. Click (B).
→→The “Select Folder” opens.
3. Select the folder to be saved and click [OK].

8

Chapter 9
9.1 Starting up the Editing Function........................................ 9-2
9.2 Adding Exposure Menus..................................................... 9-4
9.3 Changing Exposure Menus................................................. 9-5
9.4 Deleting Exposure Menus/Canceling the Deletion........... 9-6 9

9.5 Inactivating Exposed Images/

Activating the Inactivated Images......................................9-7
9.6 Registering Re-exposure Menus........................................ 9-8
9.7 Exchanging Images............................................................. 9-9
9.8 Setting for Printing, Saving, and Transmitting................ 9-10
9.9 Editing Patient Information............................................... 9-13
9.10 Changing the Order of Menus

in the “Read Image” Window............................................ 9-15

9.1 Starting up the Editing Function
This section describes procedures for starting up the various operation windows to edit studies.
■ Operation Windows ■ Starting up

● “Read Image” Window ● Starting from the ”Read Image “ Window
1. Click (A).
→→The “Main Menu Modification” window opens.
2. Click the desired button (E).

Buttons Functions
(A)
Add Menu Exposure menus will be added to
the current study
“9.2 Adding Exposure Menus”
● “Main” Window - “Refer” Window Change Menu Change executed menus and
process images for selected part
“9.3 Changing Exposure
Menus”
Delete/Inactivate Certain menus will be deleted or
9 Menu inactivated for re-exposure

“9.4 Deleting Exposure
Menus/Canceling the
(B)
Deletion”
“9.5 Inactivating Exposed
Images/Activating the
Inactivated Images”
● “Image Viewer” Window “9.6 Registering Re-exposure

Menus”
(C)
Relocate Display Exposure menus / images will be
Order relocated
“9.10 Changing the Order of
Menus in the “Read Image “
(D)
Window”
Exchange Menus will be associated

Images correctly with images exposed
“9.7 Exchanging Images”
● “Main Menu Modification” Window Output/Storage Film printout or data storage
settings will be changed
“9.8 Setting for Printing,
Saving, and Transmitting”
Edit Patient Patient data such as DOB and

Information sex will be corrected
(E)
“9.9 Editing Patient Information”

● Starting from the “Refer” Window ● Starting from the “Image Viewer”
Window
1. Select the study to be edited from the study
list in the “Patient List” window. 1. Display the study to be edited in the sub-
window.
2. Click (B). “5.3 Selecting and Arranging Images”
2. Select images from the sub-window.
3. Click the desired button (E).
3. Click (C) or the desired button (D).
Buttons Functions
Add Menu Exposure menus will be added to When editing patient information, display only one
the current study sub-window. If two sub-windows are arranged, the
editing result of patient information cannot be verified
“9.2 Adding Exposure Menus”
correctly.
Change Menu Change executed menus and
process images for selected part
“9.2 Changing Exposure
Buttons Functions
Menus”
Editing Patient Information
Delete/Inactivate Certain menus will be deleted or
Menu inactivated for re-exposure “9.9 Editing Patient Information”
“9.4 Deleting Exposure Change menus
Menus/Canceling the
“9.3 Changing Exposure Menus”
Deletion”
Mis-exposure/Re-exposure
“9.5 Inactivating Exposed
Images/Activating the “9.4 Deleting Exposure Menus/ 9
Inactivated Images” Canceling the Deletion”

“9.6 Registering Re-exposure “9.5 Inactivating Exposed
Menus” Images/Activating the
Inactivated Images”
Relocate Exposure menus / images will be
Display Order relocated “9.6 Registering Re-exposure
Menus”
“9.10 Changing the Order of
Appearance of Menus in the Additional exposures
Read Image Window” “9.2 Adding Exposure Menus”
Exchange Menus will be associated Exchange images
Images correctly with images exposed
Set the output destination
Output/Storage Film printout or data storage
settings will be changed “9.8 Setting for Printing, Saving,
and Transmitting”
“9.8 Setting for Printing,
Saving, and Transmitting”
Edit Patient Patient data such as DOB and

Information sex will be corrected
“9.9 Editing Patient Information”

9.2 Adding Exposure Menus
Registers additional exposure menus for exposure.
■ Operation Window ■ Adding an Exposure Menu

● “Adding Exposure Menu” Window 1. Click a menu group (A).
2. Click a exposure menu (B).

(A)
3. Click [Finish] (C).

→→The “Read Image” window or the “Image Viewer”
(B) window opens.
(C) When a verified study is changed, a message

displays to verify the change.
If you click [OK], the study would return from the
“Verified” to “Started” study status. After completing
the study, re-verify it.
9

9.3 Changing Exposure Menus
Changes menus on the current “Read Image” window on display. When the menu for a read image is
changed, the image is subjected to image processing according to the new menu. If the image has
been rotated or reversed, its status is updated according to the new menu.
■ Operation Window ■ Changing an Exposure Menu

● “Exposure Menu Change” Window (B)
1. Choose an exposure menu to be changed (A).
2. Select a new menu group (B).
(A) 3. Select a new exposure menu (C).
4. Click [Finish] (D).
(C) window opens.
(D)
When a verified study is changed, a message
“Verified” to “Completed” study status. After
completing the study, re-verify it.
9

The exposure menu is displayed as image
information. If no image information is shown in the
image pane, show it.
“11.2.3 Setting the Attribute Information”

9.4 Deleting Exposure Menus/Canceling
the Deletion
Deletes unnecessary menus and schedules re-exposures.
Completed or verified images started up from the “Image Viewer” cannot be deleted.
■ Operation Window ■ Deleting an Exposure Menu/

Canceling the Deletion
● “Deleting Menus/Inactivating Images”
Window
1. Select an exposure menu prior to reading
images (A).
(B) 2. Click [Delete] (B).

(A) →→A deletion mark ( ) is attached to the exposure
menu.
To cancel deleting the exposure menu, click [Undo

Delete]. mark to indicate the deletion hides.
(C)
9

9.5 Inactivating Exposed Images/
Activating the Inactivated Images
Inactivates a read image. Or, activates the inactivated image.
• Once Images are verified and saved to a disk, they cannot be inactivated/activated.
• Inactivated images are not printed or saved even if “Film Print“(optional) or “Work Disk” is selected.
■ Operation Window ■ Inactivating/Activating

Exposure Menus
Window
1. Select the exposure menu for a read image
(A).
(A) 2. Click [Inactivate] (B).

→→An image inactivation mark ( ) is attached to
(B) the image.
To cancel inactivating the exposure menu, click

[Activate]. mark to indicate the inactivation hides.
(C)
9

window opens.

9.6 Registering Re-exposure Menus
Inactivates a read image and registers a re-exposure menu.
Once Images are verified and saved to a disk, they cannot be re-exposed.
■ Operation Window ■ Registering a Re-exposure

Menu
Window
1. Select the exposure menu for a read image
(A).
(A) 2. Click [Re-exposure] (B).

→→A re-exposure mark ( ) is attached to the
exposure menu.
(B)
This image is inactive and the same exposure menu
as that for this image is added to the “Read Image”
(C) window.
9 3. Click [Finish] (C).

window opens.

“Verified” to “Started” study status. After completing
the study, re-verify it.

9.7 Exchanging Images
Exchanges images to correct the order in which they are read.
When images are exchanged, they are subjected to image processing according to the destination
menu. If the images have been rotated or reversed, their status is updated according to the destination
menu.
■ Operation Window ■ Exchange Incorrectly Read

Images to the Correct Exposure
● “Image Exchange” Window Menus
1. Select the two exposure menus (A) to be

(B) exchanged.
(A)
Selected exposure menus are displayed with

checks. When a selected exposure menu is
reselected, it is unchecked and thus deselected.
(C)
2. Click [Exchange] (B).
→→The images in the two selected exposure menus
will be exchanged.
9
Once images are exchanged, the operation cannot
be undone. To reverse the image status, select the

two exposure menus again and exchange the
images.

window opens.


9.8 Setting for Printing, Saving, and
Transmitting
Verifies or modifies the following settings:
• Saving images to a storage disk
• Printing images on a film (optional)
• Transmitting images to DICOM server (optional)
■ Operation Window ■ Setting up the Destination and

Timing for Outputting and Saving
● “Setting Image Print/Storage” Window
1. Perform various settings (A).
Selection Items
(A) Items Contents
N/A*1 Output or not
Status*2 Status of the output
Destination*3 Current destination

(B) Timing*3 Study status at which the
image is to be output
Upon When the study status

Completion becomes “Completed”
9 The window comes up with the settings configured in Upon When the study status
the “User Utilities”. Verification becomes “Verified”
The “User Utilities” can be configured for users to

apply the same set of settings for all the studies they
conduct using FCR PRIMA Console.
“14.5 Setting of Printing, Saving and Transmitting *1 Put a check mark in order to output the image.
Images” *3 To change these settings, click [Details].
Depending on the functions, some settings are
already specified and cannot be changed.
“■Changing the Detailed Settings”
*2 If images have been output, the “Unoutputted”

check box under Status is selected. This check
box is not accessible for handling.
2. Click [Finish] (B).
• To print or save images for this study on a priority

basis, select the “Execute prioritized printout”
check box.

window opens.

■ Changing the Detailed Settings ● Editing Film Print (Optional) Settings
Modifies the following settings:
● Editing the Settings for Saving Images • Type of film printer used
• Film print timing
to Disks
• Print count
Changes the pixel density with which images
are saved to a storage disk. “Print Destination Detail” Window
“Save Destination Detail” Window
(A)
(B)
(C)
(A)
(D)
(B)
1. Select an imager to be used in the

“Destination” field (A).
The timing at which images are saved to a storage
disk (output timing) is when their study status 2. Select “Timing” (B).
changes to “Verified”. The timing at which images [Upon Completion]:
are saved to a storage disk cannot be changed. Print images on a film when their study status
changes to “Completed”.
1. Click “Output Density” (A). [Upon Verification]: 9

[Save by Default Pixel Count] Print images on a film when their study status

Save images with a reduced pixel density and hence changes to “Verified”.
in a smaller file size.
3. Select a film output count (C).
[Save by Max Pixel Count]
Save images with the maximum pixel density that
allows them to be saved or printed on the system. 1 to 9 copies can be printed.
Once images have their pixel density set to “Save by 4. Click [Setup](D).
Default Pixel Count” on FCR PRIMA Console, the
→→The system returns to the ““Setting Image Print/
pixel density is kept as is even if “Save by Max Pixel
Storage” window.
Count” is specified after reloading the images into
A check is put into the check box for outputting.
FCR PRIMA Console and saving them to the disk.
2. Click [Setup] (B).

→→The system returns to the “Setting Image Print/
Storage” window.
A check is put into the check box for outputting.

● Editing Settings for Transmitting Images
to DICOM Server (Optional)
Modifies the transmission destination (output
destination) in DICOM server to which images
are transmitted to DICOM server and the pixel
density (output density) with which the images
are transmitted.
“Print Destination Detail” Window
(A)
(B)
(C)
The timing at which images are transmitted to

DICOM server (output timing) is when their study
status changes to “Verified”. The timing at which
images are transmitted to DICOM server cannot be
9 changed.
1. Select a destination DICOM server in the

“Destination” field (A).
2. Select an “Output Density” (B).

[Save by Default Pixel Count]:
Transmit images with a reduced pixel density and
hence in a smaller file size.
[Save by Max Pixel Count]:

Transmit images with the maximum pixel density that
allows them to be saved or printed on the system.
Once images have their pixel density set to “Save by

Default Pixel Count” on FCR PRIMA Console, the
pixel density is kept as is even if “Save by Max Pixel
Count” is specified after reloading the images into
FCR PRIMA Console and saving them in the disk.
3. Click [Setup] (C).

→→The system returns to the “Setting Image Print/
Storage” window.

9.9 Editing Patient Information
Edits made to the patient information can be reflected in the corresponding information stored in the
FCR PRIMA Console database.
■ Operation Windows ● “Search for ID Number” Window

● “Modifying Patient Information” Window
(G)
(A)
(H)
(B)
● “Edit Searched Patient Information”

Window
● “Modify ID Number” Window

(I)
9
(C)

(J)
(D)
● “Input Patient Information” Window
(E)
(D)

■ Editing Patient Information ● Reregistering the Displayed Current
Study as a New Study for Another Set of
● Editing Patient ID or Detailed Patient Patient Information
Information
1. Click [Another] (B).
1. Click [Edit] (A) next to the ID field or the →→The “Search for ID Number” window opens.
detailed patient information fields.
→→“Modify ID Number” window or the “Input Patient
2. Enter the patient ID (G) of the target patient
Information” window opens.
information and click [Search] (H).
→→The “Edit Patient Information” window opens.
2. Make edits to the patient ID (C) or the detailed
patient information (E). 3. Verify or edit the patient information ( I ).
• Entering patient ID If the patient information matching the patient ID

Enter the patient ID with single-byte alphanumeric entered in the “Search for ID Number” window is not
characters. The allowable character length is registered in the FCR PRIMA Console database, no
determined by a system setting. detailed patient information is displayed in the
“Search for and Edit Patient Information” window. To
The following characters cannot be used.
register new patient information in the FCR PRIMA
“ # % & `+ ? / \ * @ <
Console database, proceed to enter detailed patient
However, the space can be used but the patient
information.
ID which consists of solely space is not allowed.
“3.2 Registering the Patient Information to be
“3.2 Registering the Patient Information to be
Exposed
Exposed”
4. Click [Finish] (J).

9 3. Click [Finish] (D).
A message displays whether to apply the change

A message displays whether to apply the change
also to the database.
also to the database.
If you click [OK], the change is also applied to the
If you click [OK], the change is also applied to the
database.
database.
→→The system returns to the “Read Image” window or

the “Image Viewer” window.
window opens.
4. Check that the patient ID or the detailed 5. Check that the patient information has been
modified.
patient information has been modified.


9.10 Changing the Order of Menus in the
“Read Image” Window
■ Operation Window 1. Select the exposure menu (A) to be relocated.
2. Click the direction buttons (B) to change the
● “Exposure Menu Relocate” Window order of the appearance.
(A)
Buttons Functions
To the TOP Moves the selected

exposure menu to the top
(B)
UP Moves up the selected
exposure menu
DOWN Moves down the selected

exposure menu
(C) To the END Moves down the selected

exposure menu


9

Chapter 10
Verifying with
the Indicators
10.1 Viewing Indicators and Activating Functions.................. 10-2

10.1.1 Viewing Indicators........................................................ 10-2
10.1.2 Activating Functions from Indicators......................... 10-3
10.2 Verifying the Status of Image Reader and

Cleaning Procedures......................................................... 10-4
10.3 Verifying Disk Status and Maintenance........................... 10-5
10.4 Verifying NAS Status (Optional).......................................10-7

10
10.5 Verifying Film Printer Status (Optional)........................... 10-8

10.6 Verifying Image Output Status . .......................................10-9
10.7 Verifying Events (Errors, Warnings or Information)......... 10-10

10.1 Viewing Indicators and Activating
Functions
Indicators provide visual indications of the status of the Image Reader, disk, NAS, printer (optional),
data transfer and events (errors, warnings and information).
By installing conditions for options or by the system settings at the time of installing, some icons are not
displayed.
10.1.1 Viewing Indicators
■ Position of “Indicator” Window

Indicators are separated from the “Main” window or “Image Viewer” window, so it can be placed in any
spots.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Icons on Indicators:
(1) Image Reader
(2) Disk
(3) NAS (optional)
(4) Film printer (optional)
(5) Output Status
(6) Events (errors, warnings, information)
10
■ Indicator State and Corresponding Notice
Indicators turn on, turn off or blink, to notify necessary information listed in the following tables.
Contents
State
Off (Unavailable) On (Available) Blinking (Error occurs)
No Image Reader is connected to An Image Reader is connected to An error has occurred with the
the FCR PRIMA Console. the FCR PRIMA Console. Image Reader connected to the
(1)
Images cannot be read. Connect Images can be read. FCR PRIMA Console. *1
an Image Reader.
Either a storage disk is not inserted in A write-enabled storage disk is -
the PC’s control drive or a read-only inserted in the PC’s control drive.
(2) disk is inserted in the PC’s control Images can be saved to the disk.
drive.
Images cannot be saved to the disk.
NAS is not available. NAS is available. No free space in NAS.
(3)
Images cannot be saved to NAS. Images can be saved to NAS.
The default film printer is not The default film printer is available. An error has occurred with the
(4) available. Images can be printed on a film. default film printer. *1
Images cannot be printed on a film.
(5) There is no image being output. An image is being output. -
FCR PRIMA Console is running - An event (error, warning or

(6)
normally. information) has occurred. *1
*1 Click the indicator to view detailed information about the event. Verify the event and take appropriate action.

10.1.2 Activating Functions from Indicators
Activates desired functions by clicking indicators.
■ Operation Window ■ Opening “Indicator” Windows

● ”Indicators” 1. Click an desired “Indicator” button to verify
(From (1) to (6)).
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Functions of Each Button
Button Functions
Status of “Read Image” part

“10.2 Verifying the Status of Image
Reader and Cleaning Procedures”
Disk status
“10.3 Verifying Disk Status and
Maintenance”
NAS status
“10.4 Verifying NAS Status (Optional)”
Film printer status

“10.5 Verifying Film Printer Status
(Optional)”
Output status
“10.6 Verifying Image Output Status”
Verifying Events (Errors, Warnings or

Information) 10
“10.7 Verifying Events (Errors,
Warnings or Information)”

• You can do the same by clicking tabs in the top
of each “Indicator” window.
• Events (Errors, Warnings or Information) can be
also performed by right-clicking the server
application icon docked in the task tray and
clicking [Event indicator].

10.2 Verifying the Status of Image Reader
and Cleaning Procedures
Verifies the status of the image reader connected to the FCR PRIMA Console and performs scanner cleaning.
■ Operation Windows ■ Verifying the Status of the

Image Reader
● The “Reader” Window - “Status”
1. Click [Status] (A).
(A)
2. Click [Update] (C).
(B) 3. Verify the status and the detailed information
(B).
(C) (D)
■ Cleaning the Scanner of the
Image Reader
● The “Reader” Window - “Operation”

Perform scanner cleaning to remove dust from
the scanner head which you are reminded to
carry out periodically.
(E) 1. Click [Operation] (E)

2. Click [Operation] (F).
10
(F)
Before performing scanner cleaning, check that the

Image Reader is available.
(D)
Scanner cleaning takes about 15 seconds to

complete. Click [Status] to return to the status view
of the “Reader” window.
■ Verifying the status of the

Image Reader and Exiting
Scanner Cleaning.
1. Click [OK] (D).

→→The “Reader” window closes.

10.3 Verifying Disk Status and Maintenance
Checks the status of the disk set in the PC’s control drive and performs maintenance.
■ Operation Windows ■ Verifying Disk Status

● “Disk” Window - “Status/Operation”
Click [Update] (F) to update information.
(A)
● Status of Each Drive
(B)
(C)
1. Click [Status/Operation] (A).
2. Select a drive in “Device Name” (B).
(G) (H)
3. Verify the detailed information.
(F) (I)
Display Items
● “Disk” Window - “Store-Disk List”

Items Contents
Status Disk name and the amount of free

space (%)
(D) Usage*1 Usage of disks

• storage disk
• work disk
(E) Disk Write Disk write settings

• write-enabled
• read-only
*1 Nothing appears for any other type of disk.

10
“2.7 Before Using Disks”

(F’) ( I’ )

● Status of the Registered Storage Disk
1. Click [Store-Disk List] (D).
2. Click [Update] (F’).
3. Verifying the storage disk list (E).
Display Items
Items Contents
Disk Name Storage Disk name
Write Start The date and time at which writing

to a storage disk started
Write End The date and time at which writing

to a storage disk ended
Status Disk write display

• write-enabled
• read-only
■ Disk Maintenance
● Replacing Disks
1. Click [Replace] (G).
→→The “Replacing Disks” window opens, and then
the disk drive tray opens
10 “13.8 Disk Maintenance”
● Perform from “Client Utilities”

1. Click [Utility] (H).

→→The “Disk Operation” window opens, and then the
disk drive tray opens.
“13.8 Disk Maintenance”
■ Verifying Disk Status of the

Image Reader and Exiting
Scanner Cleaning
1. Click [OK] (( I ), ( I’ )).

→→The “Disk” window closes.

10.4 Verifying NAS Status (Optional)
Verifies the status of the NAS connected to the FCR PRIMA Console.
■ Operation Window ■ Verifying NAS Status

● “Disk” Window - “Status/Operation” 1. Click [Status/Operation] (A).
2. Select a NAS in “Device Name” (B).
(A)
(B) 3. Verify the detailed information (C).

Display Items
(C)
Items Contents
Status Disk name and the amount of free

space (%)
(E) (D) Disk Write Display Disk Write
• When the HDD does not have enough space, Click [Update] (E) to update information.
install another NAS. In such cases, contact our
official dealer.
• When an error of NAS is displayed in the indicator
for Event, contact our official dealer to fix it.
■ Exiting the Verification of NAS
Status
1. Click [OK] (D).

10
→→The “Disk” window closes.

10.5 Verifying Film Printer Status (Optional)
Verifies the status of the film printer connected to the FCR PRIMA Console.
■ Operation Window ■ Verifying Film Printer Status

● “Printer” Window 1. Select a printer in “Device Name” (A).
2. Verify the status and the detailed information
(A) (B).
(B) Click [Update] (C) to update information.
(C) (D)
■ Verifying the Status of the Film
Printer
1. Click [OK] (D).

→→The “Printer” window closes.
10

10.6 Verifying Image Output Status
Verifies the output status of images as they are printed on a film (optional), saved to a disk or
transmitted to DICOM server (optional). Canceled or failed output of images can be retried.
■ Operation Window ■ Verifying Image Output Status

● “Output” Window 1. Select an output destination of interest in
Filter Conditions (A).
→→The status of the selected output destination is
(A)
displayed (E).
(E)
■ Canceling Image Output

(B) (C)
1. Select an image to cancel output (E).
(D)
2. Click [Delete] (B).
■ Outputting an Image Again that

Has Once Failed to be Output
1. Select an image to be output again (E).

2. Click [Force Output] (C). 10

■ Exiting the Verification of Image
Output Status
1. Click [OK] (D).

→→The “Output” window closes.

10.7 Verifying Events
(Errors, Warnings or Information)
Verifies events (errors, warnings or information) occurring on the FCR PRIMA Console system.
■ Operation Windows ■ Verifying Events

● “Events” Window 1. Select [Source] (A) and [Status] (B).
Selection Items
(A) (B)
Items Contents
Source • All • Study

• Printer Registration
• Disk • Image Browse
• DICOM Storage • Common
(F) • Image Reader • Other
Status All
Unconfirmed Only
Confirmed Only
(C)
→→The events of the selected Source and Status is
(D) displayed.
2. Select an event of interest (F).

The events are shown in the descending order of 3. Click [Details] (C).
Date/Time. →→The “Error Details “ window opens.
10
● “Error Details” Window The following functions are also available.
Buttons Functions
Deletes an event
Delete all the events
Display the previous page of the event list
(E) Display the next page of the event list

*1
Mark the selected events as being
verified
*1
Check all the events in the current
page as being verified
*1
Check all the events as being verified
*1 Verified events are hidden when “Unconfirmed

Only” is selected in Status.
■ Exiting Events Verification

1. Click [Close] (E)
→→The “Error Details” window closes.
2. Click [OK] (D).

→→The “Event” window closes.

Chapter 11
Changing Display Settings
of the “Main” Window and
“Image Viewer”
11.1 Display Settings of the “Main” Window........................... 11-2
11.1.1 Starting up and Shutting Down
the Display Setting Function......................................... 11-2
11.1.2 Initial Display Settings of the “Main” Window........... 11-3
11.1.3 Display Settings of “ID input” Window....................... 11-4
11.1.4 Display Settings of “Patient List” Window................. 11-5
11.1.5 Display Settings of “FCR-Menus” Window................ 11-6
11.1.6 Display Settings of Exposing and Reading................ 11-7
11
11.1.7 Display Settings of “Refer” window........................... 11-8
Changing Display Settings of the "Main" Window and "Image Viewer"

11.1.8 Setting the Font Size in the “Main” Window.............. 11-9
11.2 Changing Settings of “Image Viewer” Window............. 11-10

11.2.1 Starting the Customize Function.............................. 11-10
11.2.2 Initial Settings of Annotation..................................... 11-11
11.2.3 Setting the Attribute Information.............................. 11-12
11.2.4 Setting Reading Protocol........................................... 11-13
11.2.5 Display Settings of Toolbar....................................... 11-14
11.2.6 Display Settings of Report......................................... 11-15
11.2.7 Display Setting of “Image Viewer” Window............. 11-18
11.2.8 Returning to Standard Settings................................. 11-20
11.2.9 Importing/Exporting Settings.................................... 11-21

11.1 Display Settings of the “Main” Window
Configures settings of the “Main” window, such as which items are to be displayed in each window in
the “Main” window, or which window is to be displayed when started up.
11.1.1 Starting up and Shutting Down the Display Setting Function

■ Operation Windows Items Contents
● “Main” Window
ID input Set the items to display in the “Input
ID” window and its order. Also name of
items can be set to display/hide
“11.1.3 Display Settings of “ID
input” Window”
Patient List The items to be displayed in the patient

list and their order can be set.
Auto-update of the patient list can also
be set
(A)
“11.1.4 Display Settings of “Patient
List” Window”
● “Display setting” Window FCR-

Menus
The shortcuts for the exposure menu
can be set
(B) “11.1.5 Display Settings of “FCR-
Menus” Window”
FCR- Behavior on registering a study and

Operations behavior after reading images with the
“Image Viewer” can be set
“11.1.6 Display Settings of
Exposing and Reading”
Modalities The modalities to be displayed in the
11 (C)
study list and their order can be set
“11.1.7 Display Settings of “Refer”
window”
■ Starting up
Toolbar Operations which can be performed for
studies in the study list can be added
or removed
“11.1.7 Display Settings of “Refer”
1. Select - [Customize] (A).
window”
→→The “Display setting” window opens.
Font The font size can be set for the each
screen in the “Main” window
2. Click a desired tab (B) and change display
“11.1.8 Setting the Font Size in the
settings.
“Main” Window”
Selection Items
Items Contents
General The initial display for the “Main” window

can be set ■ Shutting Down
“11.1.2 Initial Display Settings of the
“Main” Window” 1. Click [OK] (C).
→→Ths system returns to the “Main” window.

11.1.2 Initial Display Settings of the “Main” Window
Sets the window to be displayed first when the “Main” window is started.
■ Operation Window ■ Setting the Initial Display when

Started up
● “Display setting” Window - “General”
Window
1. From the pull-down menu (A), select the
window to be displayed first in the upper side
(A) of the “Main” window when the FCR PRIMA
(B) Console is started.
2. From the pull-down menu (B), select the

window to be displayed in the lower side of
the window when a patient is selected in the
“Input ID” window or in the “Patient List”
window,
(C)
3. Click [OK] (C).
Select another tab to set another display settings.
11

11.1.3 Display Settings of “ID input” Window
Sets the items and its order to be displayed in the “Input ID” window. Also, the names of items can be
set to display/hide.
■ Operation Window ■ Setting Items and Their Order to

be Displayed in the “ID input”
● “Display setting” Window - “ID input” Window
Window
(A) 1. Check the check box of items to be displayed
as input items (A).
(B)
Uncheck the check box of items not to be displayed
as input items.
(C) 2. Select an item to change the display order in

the list, and click [Up] or [Down] (B).
(D)
By clicking [Up] or [Down], the item is moved up or
down respectively.
3. Repeat steps 1. and 2. to set the display

items.
4. Select display/do not display the item name (C).

5. Click [OK] (D).
11

11.1.4 Display Settings of “Patient List” Window
Sets the items to be displayed in the patient list and the maximum number of the list to be displayed.
Also sets whether the patient list is to be updated automatically or not and the update interval when
autoupdate is enabled.
■ Operation Window ■ Setting the Display Contents in

the “Patient List” Window
● “Display setting” Window - “Patient
List” Window
1. Check the check box of items to be displayed
(A)
(A) in the patient list.
• Uncheck the check box of items not to be

(B)
displayed in the patient list.
• The items are displayed left aligned in the patient
list according to the order of items on the
customize window.
(C)
(D)
(E)
2. Select an item to change the display order in
the patient list, and click [Up] or [Down] (B).
(F)
By clicking [Up] or [Down], the item is moved up or

down respectively.
3. Repeat steps 1. and 2. to set the display

items.
4. Set the maximum number of the list to be

displayed (C) in the patient list. 11
5. Put a check mark to “Enable automatic

updating” (D).
To disable the autoupdate, uncheck the check box of

“Enable automatic updating”.
6. Set the update interval (E). Change the value

by clicking the arrow buttons.
7. Click [OK] (F).

11.1.5 Display Settings of “FCR-Menus” Window
Sets frequently used exposure menus as shortcuts in the “FCR” window of the“ Main” window.
Exposure menus which is not set as shortcuts can be selected from [Others].
This item will be applied to the entire system.
■ Operation Windows ■ Setting the Display Contents in

the “FCR-Menus” Window
● “Display setting” Window - “FCR-Menus”
Window
1. Click [Select] (A).
→→The “Exposure Menu (Detail)” window opens.
2. Select a menu group (C).

→→The exposure menus and/or the study menus in
the selected menu group are displayed in the
lower side of the window.
(A)
3. Select a study menu or an exposure menu (D).
→→The menu is displayed in the list of selected
(B) menus on the right side of the window.
4. Click [OK] (E) at the bottom right of the

● “Exposure Menu (Detail)” Window window.
→→The selected menu is added.
(C)
5. Click [OK] (B).
11
(D) (E)

11.1.6 Display Settings of Exposing and Reading
Sets whether to start an exposure immediately or to register only the study after selecting the exposure menu.
Also sets whether or not the window is to be closed after reading an image to the simple read image window.
■ Operation Window ■ Setting Behavior on Selecting an

Exposure Menu and on Reading
● “Display setting” Window - “FCR- Images with the “Image Viewer”
Operations” Window
1. Select the “Behavior on registering a study” (A).

(A)
2. Select the “Behavior after reading images” (B).
(B) 3. Click [OK] (C).
(C)
11

11.1.7 Display Settings of “Refer” window
The following settings can be performed.
• Setting the modalities to be displayed in the study list of the “Refer” window.
• Adding and deleting operation items to be performed for studies in the study list. Each operation item
is displayed in an icon in the lower side of the “Refer” window.
■ Operation Windows 2. Click [Up] or [Down] (B) while selecting an

item for which the display order is to be
● “Display setting” Window - “Modalities” changed.
Window
(A) By clicking [Up] or [Down], the item is moved up or
down respectively.
(B) 3. Repeat steps 1. and 2. to set the display

items.
4. Click [OK] (C).

(C)
● “Display setting” Window - “Toolbar” ■ Setting the Operation Icons in

Window
the Study List
(D)
(E)
1. Select an operation item from the operation
item list on the left side of the window (D).
11 (F)
2. Click [>>>] (E) on the left side of items to be
(G)
added.
• Deleting an operation item from a block.

(H)
To be removed operation items, click [Remove] (G)
• To change the display order, click [Up] or [Down]
while selecting an item for which the display order
■ Setting Modalities to be
is to be changed.
Displayed in the Study List 3. Click [OK] (H).

1. Put the check box of items to be displayed
(A) in the study list. • When operation items have been added or their
order has been changed, these settings are also
applied to the “Main” window.
Remove the check box of items not to be displayed • Select another tab to set another display settings.
in the study list.

11.1.8 Setting the Font Size in the “Main” Window
Font size can be set for each window in the “Main” window.
■ Operation Window ■ Setting the Font Size for the

“Main” Window
● “Display setting” Window - “Font”
Window
1. Select the font size for the “Main” window
from the pull-down menu (A).
2. Click [OK] (B).

(A)
(B)
11

11.2 Changing Settings of “Image Viewer”
Window
The following settings can be performed in the “Customize” menu of “Image Viewer” window.
• Annotation initial settings
• Attribute info
• Reading protocol
• Tool bar
• Report
• Display Settings
These settings can be returned to the initial settings all together or can be imported/exported.
11.2.1 Starting the Customize Function

■ Operation Window Items Contents
● “Image Viewer” Window

Reading protocol The “Display setting for series
view” window opens.
Change the display settings
when referring series images.
The display settings can be set
with each modality.
“11.2.4 ■Setting the Display
of each Modality”
Toolbar The “Set viewer tool bar” window

(A) opens.
Set the tool bar to be displayed
in the “Image Viewer” window.
“11.2.5 ■Setting the Display
of Toolbar”
11 Report The “Report tag settings” window

opens.
■ Starting Up Set the format for the comment

column, display of schema, and
during printing.
1. Click [Customize] and select the setting menu “11.2.6 ■Setting the Display
to be changed (A). of Report”
→→The selected display setting window opens. Display Setting The “Style setting” window
opens.
Selection Items Set the image display in sub-
window or the initial display of
Items Contents study summary/image cart. Also,
Annotation initial The “Annotation setting” window set the actions during storage of
settings opens. FCR image processing
Set to display the annotation. parameters.
“11.2.2 ■Setting the Display/ “11.2.7 ■Setting Actions during

Tag Display of Annotations” Image Display or Storage”
Attribute info The “Settings for image

incidental information” window
opens. You can do the same by right-clicking the images
Set the image information.
displayed in the “Image Viewer” and select the
“11.2.3 ■Setting Image settings from the [Customize] menu.
Attribute Information

11.2.2 Initial Settings of Annotation
Sets the initial display of basic graphic annotation and measurement annotation.
■ Operation Window
The items to be set are different from the selected
● “Annotation setting” Window annotation.
(A) Annotation Settable contents
Magnifying glass • Width of Magnifying glass

(B) (pixel)
• Height of Magnifying glass
(pixel)
Arrow, Ellipse, • Line thickness

Rectangle, Polygon • Line color
(C)
Text • Font
• Style
(D) • Size
• Text color
• Background color (By
putting a check mark on
the “Transparent color”
■ Setting the Display/Tag Display check box, the background
hides.)
of Annotations Measure line • Line thickness
segment, • Line color
Simplified
1. Select annotation (A). cardiothoracic ratio,
Cardiothoracic ratio,
2. Set the initial value (B). Interline angle,
Dual angle,
Input/Selection Items Cobb angle
Items Contents
Width of Input the width of magnifying

Magnifying glass glass in pixel 3. Set the text style for the measurement 11
(pixel) annotation (C).

Height of Input the height of magnifying Input/Selection Items
Magnifying glass glass in pixel
(pixel) Items Contents
Line thickness Select the line thickness of Font Select font type
annotation
Style Select the style of measurement
Line color Select the line color of label (standard, bold, italic, bold
annotation italic)
Font Select the font Size Input text size
Style Select the text style (standard, Text color Select text color
bold, italic, bold italic)
Background Select text background color
Size Input text size color
Text color Select text color Transparent Put a check mark to make the
Background color color: background color transparent
Background color Select text background color
Transparent By putting a check mark on the 4. Click [OK] (D).

color: “Transparent color” check box, →→The system returns to the “Image Viewer” window.
the background hides

11.2.3 Setting the Attribute Information
Sets which attribute information on the image is to be displayed with each modality.
■ Operation Windows 2. Click the display location of the attribute

information (B).
● “Settings for image incidental →→The “Set display item” window opens.
information” Window
3. Select the attribute information from the list (E).
(A)
Select the [Category], [Group], [Element], [Tag

(B)
Name] and click to narrow down the
attribute information.
4. Choose from “Image incidental information

will be displayed” or “Image incidental
(C) information will not be displayed” in (D).
5. Set the display method (F) (G).

● “Set display item” Window Input/Selection Items
(D)
Items Contents
Prefix Input the prefix to be displayed

(E)
Suffix Input the suffix to be displayed
Display Input the display elements of

elements attribute information
Display Input the display magnification of

(H)
magnification attribute information
(F) (G)
Valid number of Input the valid number of digits of
11 digits attribute value
Comment Input the comment
■ Setting Image Attribute

Information 6. Click [OK] (H).

→→The system returns to the “Settings for image
incidental information” window.
1. Select the modality (A).
7. Click [OK] (C).
Click the [Add/Delete] to add/delete the modality. →→The system returns to the “Image Viewer” window.

11.2.4 Setting Reading Protocol
Sets the initial arrangement of sub-window, the image arrangement in sub-window with each modality.
● “Display setting for series view” Window

Tile division Set number of images and layout
to display in one sub-window
• Maximum number of lines
(A) (1 to 6 rows)
• Maximum number of columns
(1 to 6 columns)
• Sort sequence (Horizontal
direction, Vertical direction)
(B)
Comparative Set whether to add how many sub-
Split windows when clicking [Compare]
in the study summary
(1 to 6 rows)
(C) • Maximum number of columns
(1 to 6 columns)
■ Setting the Default Display Use series

integration
Put a check mark to use series
integration
Layout of each Modality Use external Put a check mark to use external link
link
1. Select the modality (A). Report will be Put a check mark to display
automatically automatically
displayed
Click [Add / Delete] to add or delete the modality. Report will be Put a check mark to display automatically.
automatically Specify whether to automatically create
created the report from - days ago
3. Click [OK] (C). 11

→→The system returns to the “Image Viewer” window.
2. Set the sub-window and image display (B) of

each modality.
Selection Items
Items Contents
Series division Set the layout to display by

dividing a sub-window in each
series
(1 to 4 rows)
• Maximum number of columns
(1 to 4 columns)

11.2.5 Display Settings of Toolbar
Customizes the buttons to be assigned to the toolbar in “Image Viewer” window.
■ Operation Window ■ Setting the Display of Toolbar

● “Set viewer tool bar” Window 1. Select the tab name from “Tab” (A).
(A)
(B)
Click [Edit] to add/delete tabs, or change tab name.
(C)
2. Select the group name from “Group” (B).
Click [Edit] to add/delete groups, or change group

(D)
name.
(E)
3. Drag and drop the tool buttons to be used to
the “Tool button” column to add it.
Select the tool button from the “Tool button” column

and click [Delete] to delete it.
4. Select the display style of tool button (D).

Selection Items
Items Contents
Group name will Put a check mark to display the

be displayed. group name in toolbar.
11 Display style of
: Icon + Text (Vertical)
tool button
: Only icon
: Icon + Text (Horizontal)
: Only text
5. Click [OK] (E).


11.2.6 Display Settings of Report
Sets the initial display of schema, title and text size of the comment column in “Report:” window.
■ Operation Window ■ Setting the Display of Report

● “Report tag settings” Window 1. Set comment column (A).
(A) Input/Selection Items
(B) Items Contents
(C) Font Size Select from “Large”, “Medium”,

“Small”
(D)
The number of Specify the numbers of rows of
(E) comment lines comment
(F)
(G) Title of comment Input the title of Comment 1 to 3
(H) 1 to 3
Nothing abnormal Input the text to be displayed in

(I)
message in Comment 1 to 3
Comment box 1
● “Tag setting for Report” Window to 3
2. Set the initial display of schema (B).

Selection Items
(J)
Items Contents
Display default Display the default schema when

schema creating new reports
Display Display the schema registered as

(M) Favorites favorite schema when creating
new reports
(K) (L)
No initial display Not display the schema when
● “Format list” Window

creating new reports
11
(N) 3. Click [Edit Template] (C) to add or delete the

format file list.
(O)
“■ Editing Formats”
(P)
4. To reverify the study at the time of saving a
report, put a check mark to “It will be
(Q)
automatically re-verified when report is
(R) saved.” check box (D).
5. To add or edit the template tag (items to be

displayed in the format), click [Add] (E) or
[Edit] (F).
“■ Adding/Editing Template Tag”
To delete the template tag, select the template from

the list (H) and click [Delete] (G).
6. Click [OK] ( I ).

■ Creating a Format 3. Input the information which is inserted into
the report to the cell of the created layout.*1
To create a report template, the Excel2007 (the

environment which can create .xlsx file) is necessary.
1. Open the “Template.xlsx” file in “\FujiFilm\

Template” of My Documents.
Input Items
Items Contents
!Schema,0,a,b Schema image

a: Length of the cell
(Numbers of cells to
be combined)
b: Width of the cell
be combined)
!Image,c,d,e Thumbnail image

c: Index number of
thumbnail from 0*2
d: Length of the cell
be combined)
2. Perform the following settings to create a e: Width of the cell
report layout. (Numbers of cells to
• Frame line of the report be combined)
• Header !CommentTitle,f Title of the “Comment”
• Footer f: Index number of
• Title “Comment” 0 to 2*3
11 • Image pasting area !Comment,g Contents of the

• Comment area “Comment”
g: Index number of
“Comment” 0 to 2*3
To paste/input information to multiple lines of the !SeriesCount,h Image No. of the
image pasting area or the comment area, it is thumbnail image
necessary to combine the cells of the concerning (Image order in the
area. series)
h: Index number of
thumbnail from 0*2
!PatientID Patient ID
!PatientNameSBCS Patient name (single-

byte)
!PatientSex Patient sex
!StudyDate Study date
!BirthDate Birth date of the patient
!Age Patient age
!StudyTime Study time
!Modality Modality

Items Contents ■ Adding/Editing Template Tags
!PatientSize Height
!PatientWeight Weight
The settings of template tag is performed with the
!PatientAddress Patient address unit of system.
!PatientMotherBirthName Mother’s name of the
SBCS patient (single-byte) 1. Click [Add] (E) or [Edit] (F).
!CountryOfResidence Country of Residence →→The “Tag setting for Report” window opens.
!PatientTelephoneNumber Telephone numbers of 2. Select the attribute information from the list
the patient (J).
!EthnicGroup Ethnic group
!SmokingStatus Smoking status

Tags can be narrowed down by selecting “Category”,
!LastMenstrualDate Late menstrual date “Group”, “Element”, and “Tag name” and clicking
.
!PatientComments Patient comments
!PregnancyStatus Pregnancy status

3. Set the display method (K) (L).
!FacilityNameSBCS Facility name
Input/Selection Items
(single-byte)
Items Contents
!ReportAuthorSBCS Author of the report
(single-byte) Prefix Input a Prefix for displaying
Surfix Input a Surfix for displaying
Display elements Input the display elements of

If the specified index number does not exist, the tag
thumbnail image cannot be inserted into the report.
Display magnification Input the display
(When there are only 2 thumbnail images registered
magnification of tag
in “Thumbnail”, the images cannot be inserted into
the Report even specifying the index number as “2”.) Valid number of digits Input a valid number of
digits of the value of tag
*1 The input information is displayed on the report
Comment Input a comment
according to the settings of each cell (font size,
font, displaying position, etc). 11
*2 Specify which image in the “Thumbnail” is 4. Click [OK] (M).
inserted. →→The system returns to the “Report tag settings”

Since the index number starts from 0, input 0 to window.
■ Editing Formats
specify the 1st thumbnail image.
*3 Index number 0: “Comment 1”
Index number 1: “Comment 2”
Index number 2: “Comment 3” 1. Click [Edit Template] (C).
→→The “Format list” window opens.
4. Save the report template file.
2. Click [Add] (P).
• The “Template.xlsx” is a read-only file. It is

• To delete the format, select the format in the list
indicated to save as another name when trying to
(N) and click [Delete] (Q).
save the file. Input any name and save the file into
• The order of the format can be changed by clicking
any destination.
[Move up]/[Move down] (O).
• Do not cancel the read-only setting of the
“Template.xlsx” file.
→→The “Open” window opens.
3. Select the format file and click [Open].

4. Click [Close] (R).
→→The system returns to the “Report tag settings”
window.

11.2.7 Display Setting of “Image Viewer” Window
Sets the font size or display size of the sub-window, study summary, image cart, and sets the actions
during study storage.
■ Operation Windows ■ Setting Actions during Image

Display or Storage
● “Style setting” Window - “Display
settings” Window
● Setting Color or Size of the “Image
Viewer” Window
1. Change style settings.

(A)
Selection Items
Items Contents
Image display
Standard*1 font Select font size from 5 to 96pt

size of attribute
(B) information
Minimum*1 font
● “Style setting” Window - “Save settings” size of attribute
information
Window
Width of Input the width and height of
thumbnail image thumbnail image in pixel
(Pixel)
(C)
Height of
thumbnail image
(Pixel)
Color of attribute 1. Click .

information 2. Select the color.
11 (D)
Color of
reference line
Color of ruler
Color of patient
positioning
Color of image
selection frame
Study summary
Font size Select from “Large”, “Medium”,

“Small”
Opening • Replace
method of a • Add
study • Compare

(Pixel)
Height of
thumbnail image
(Pixel)

Items Contents
Image cart
Font size Select from “Large”, “Medium”,

“Small”

(Pixel)
Height of
thumbnail image
(Pixel)
*1 The text size of the attribute information switches

to standard/minimum/hidden according to the
display layout size of images.
2. Click [OK] (B).
● Setting Actions During Study Storage

1. Set the actions during storage (C).
Selection Items
Items Contents
Confirmation Put a check mark to display the

dialog whether confirmation dialog.
or not changes
are saved will
be displayed.
FCR image Select whether or not to save the

processing FCR image processing parameter
parameter during study storage.
11
2. Click [OK] (D).


11.2.8 Returning to Standard Settings
Returns the changed settings of “Image Viewer” window to the condition when installing.
■ Operation Window ■ Returning to Standard Settings

● Setting Windows (Example: “Annotation 1. Click [Other] (A).
setting” Window)
2. Click [Return to the standard settings].
→→The settings return to the standard settings.
3. Click [OK] (B).
(A) (B)
11

11.2.9 Importing/Exporting Settings
Imports/Exports the settings of “Image Viewer” window.
■ Operation Window ■ Import Settings

● Setting Windows (Example: “Annotation 1. Click [Other] (A).
setting” Window)
2. Select [Import of setting information].
→→The “Open” dialog appears.
3. Select the xml file of the config information,

and click [Open].
→→The settings are updated according to the
imported file.
(A)
■ Export Settings
1. Click [Other] (A).
2. Select [Export of setting information].
→→The “Save As” dialog appears.
3. Select the folder of export destination, input a

file name and click [Save].
→→The settings are exported.
11

897N101440B
FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide
11-22
11
Chapter 12
12.1 Functions of “Study Utilities”...........................................12-2
12.2 Starting up and Exiting “Study Utilities”......................... 12-5
12.3 Searching for Studies and Creating New Queries.......... 12-6

12.3.1 Searching for Studies................................................... 12-6
12.3.2 Creating New Queries.................................................. 12-8
12.3.3 Editing Queries........................................................... 12-11
12.4 Manipulating Studies....................................................... 12-12
12

12.1 Functions of “Study Utilities”
Each part of the study utilities is described below.
• Buttons and menus which cannot be selected or clicked exist by installation condition for option or by system
settings at the time of installation. Buttons and menus which cannot be selected or clicked will be displayed in
gray or hidden.
• Usable functions for study images are different from studies in the PC and disk. The following functions cannot
be utilized for studies in the disk.
- 3) Thumbnail images
- 6) Storage/Print
- 7) List operations
• Only the storage disk and work disk can be used in the “Study Utilities”.
Disk Types: “2.7 ■Disk Types”
2) Studies Keyword entry field
5) Study operations
1) Search
queries
6) Storage/Print
7) List operations
8) Update, “Image Viewer”

3) Thumbnail images 4) Page navigation
1) Search queries
Shows registered search queries. Only those
• To select a single study, the following are shown
12 studies matching the selected set of search below. When a study is selected, check mark is
queries appear in Study list. put in the Selection check box, with its row
“12.3 Searching for Studies and Creating New displayed in green.
Queries” - Select a row of study.

- Put check marks to “Selection” check boxes.
• To select multiple studies, the following methods
“PC” that appeared as a search query is a name that are shown below.
was set at time of installation and may vary from one - Put check marks to “Selection” check boxes.
facility to another. To change this name, contact our - To select multiple discontinuous studies, select
official dealer. their lines while holding the Ctrl key.
- To select a continuous sequence of studies
2) Studies (range selection), drag the mouse up or down
A list of the studies that matches the set of over the list with the row of a given study on the
conditions selected in “Search queries”, is list selected. Alternatively, select the row of each
displayed. To narrow down the search, enter a study while holding down the Shift key.
keyword in the “Keyword entry field”. • To select all the studies in the current page, click
[Select All] in the Study List on the right-hand side
“12.3.1 Searching for Studies”
of the window.

Display Items
Items Contents
Items Contents
Lock Whether the study is locked or
No.*1
Serial numbers 1, 2, 3 ... of the not
studies in the page given from
- The image is not locked
the top
Locked The image is locked
Selection Put a check mark when selecting
studies # of Img Number of images that have
been read or that are scheduled
Patient ID ID number of patient
to be read
Patient Name Name of patient
Image Whether images are stored on
Sex Sex of patient the FCR PRIMA Console system
or not
Date of Birth Date of birth of patient
Nothing*3 No images are stored
Study Instance Numbers uniquely assigned to
UID each study Existing The state in which an exposed
image is stored or image is to be
Date of Date on which the study was read
Registration registered (scheduled)
Storage Disk Name of the storage disk on
Time of Time at which the study was which the image is saved
Registration registered (scheduled)
DB Whether the study i s managed
Study Date Date on which the exposure was by FCR PRIMA Console or not
started
-*4 The image is not managed
Study Time Time at which the exposure was
started DB managing The image is managed
Study Description Name of the study menu that History Whether study information has
has been created with the “User been modified after the study
Utilities” was verified
Study Status Progress of the study - Study information has not been
modified
Scheduled An exposure operation is
scheduled with patient Modified Study information has been
information and exposure menus modified
having been registered
DICOM Name of the DICOM server to
Started*2 An exposure is in progress or transmission where images were transmitted
suspended
Modality Modality of study
Completed The reading of all images is
completed and [Upon
Completion] is clicked
CR A CR study
12
*1 When a number is selected, the image in that
Verified The image quality of images study is displayed in the “Image Viewer” window. Using “Study Utilities”
read is verified and [Upon
*2 There are exposure menus in the study from which
Verification] is clicked
images are to be read.
Storage/Print The status of image storage/ *3 To browse the image for this study, read it from a
printing storage disk.
Undelivered Images are ready to be stored *4 This is the image which has been read from a
and delivered work disk.
Delivering Images are being delivered from

storage/printing
Delivered Storage/printing has ended

3) Thumbnail images 8) Update, “Image Viewer”
A thumbnail images of the selected study Updating a study list and displaying images in
displays. the “Image Viewer” window can be performed.
4) Page navigation Functions of Each Button

Display other pages without changing the Buttons Functions
current status of study selection.
[Update] Update the display of the study
: First page list to the latest status
: Previous page
[Image Viewer] Display the image of the
: Next page selected study in the “Image
Viewer” window
: Last page
5) Study operations
Enable each operation on selected studies.
“12.4 Manipulating Studies”
Selecting “Study Operations” hides the operational

menu.
6) Storage/Print
Enable to save or print selected studies.
“12.4 Manipulating Studies”
Selecting “Storage/Print” hides the operational

menu.
7) List operations
Select and deselect all studies in the current
page, and update the display of studies in the
study list.
Selection Items
Items Contents
12 Select All Select all the studies in the current

page
Unselect All Deselect all the studies in the

current page
Update Update the display of the study list

to the latest status
Selecting “List Operations“ hides the operational

menu.

12.2 Starting up and Exiting “Study Utilities”
This section describes the procedures for starting up and exiting “Study Utilities” in the “Main” window.
■ Operation windows ■ Starting up “Study Utilities”

● “Main” Window 1. Select - “Study Utilities” (A) in the
“Main” window.
→→The “Study Utilities” window opens.
(A)
■ Exiting
1. Click [Close] (B).
● “Study Utilities” Window →→Returns to the “Main” window.
(B)
12

12.3 Searching for Studies and Creating
New Queries
Searches with predefined queries, creates new queries/search, and narrows down the search results
by patient ID/name.
12.3.1 Searching for Studies

Searches studies with predefined queries and displays results in the list.
■ Operation Window Selection Items
Items Contents
● “Study Utilities” Window All Display all studies
(B) Today*1 Display only studies which

have been started the
exposure with today’s study
date
Scheduled Display only studies in the

“Scheduled” study status
(A)
Exposing Display only studies in the
“Started” study status
Unverified Display only studies in the

“Completed” study status
■ Searching for Studies

Undelivered Display only studies in the
“Undelivered” Storage/Print
condition
Temporal Where the FCR PRIMA

1. Select search queries (A) for “PC” or “Disk”. Console system is connected
to an EMR (optional), displays
only those studies on patients
Search queries for “Disk” is only “All”. specified by the EMR in the
study list, among all studies
that are saved on the PC.
12 *1 The studies that are displayed with [Today] clicked
Click “▼” to hide the search queries.
as a search query are those that have started an
exposure operation. The studies that have been

scheduled by clicking [Register] in the “Schedule
Exposure window” are not displayed in the study
list.
The studies that are in the “Scheduled” study
status, including those scheduled by clicking
[Register] in the “Schedule Exposure” window, can
be manipulated into view in the study list in one of
the following methods:
• [Scheduled]
• [All]
→→The study which matches with selected search
queries displays in the study list.

■ Narrowing down Search
Study results can be narrowed down after • If you enter multiple keywords in the keyword entry
field, the studies that match all of these input
search queries are selected and search results
keywords are listed.
are displayed.
• If keywords are entered as search queries, the
keywords entered in the keyword entry field will be
1. Set search queries to narrow search in the given priority.
keyword entry field (B).
→→The search for studies is narrowed down to meet
the specified set of search queries.
“Search Queries” are entered in different ways
according to the input items. See the following table.
• Click [Update] to update the status of the list.
Input Items • To change the display order, select the header of
the field to be used as a reference. Each time you
Items Contents
select the header, the display order toggles
Patient ID*1 Enter a keyword in the entry between ascending (▲) and descending (▼).
field and press the “Enter”
Study Instance key.
UID
Studies which match
# of Img
completely with the keyword
Storage Disk searches.
Patient Name Enter a keyword in the entry

field and press the “Enter”
Study Description key.
DICOM Studies which partly match

Transmission with the keyword searches.
Sex Click at the rightmost end

of each entry field to open a
Study Status
pulldown menu and select a
Storage/Print query.
Lock
Images
DB Management
History 12
Modality
Date of Birth Click at the rightmost end
of each entry field. When the
Study Date
“Specifying the Date“ window
Date of opens, specify a date and
Registration click [Setup].
*1 Depending on how FCR PRIMA Console was

configured for the ID digit setting at installation,
each input patient ID is registered with 0s in the
beginning accordingly. For example, if a patient ID
of 1 is entered where FCR PRIMA Console is
configured for 10 digits, the ID is displayed as
0000000001.

12.3.2 Creating New Queries
Creates new search queries with matching patient ID, sex, and study date etc. to search PC or disks.
Also, items to be displayed in the search results can be set.
■ Operation Windows ■ Creating New Queries

● “Study Utilities” Window 1. Click [Add New Queries] (A).
→→The “Setting List Search Conditions” window
opens.
(A)
2. Click each window (B) and set search

queries.
• Set search queries. When you open the “Set

Search Queries” window, four windows are
displayed: “Search Items”, “Items/ Refresh”,
“Order” and “Display Items”. In each window, you
● “Setting List Search Conditions” can set search conditions.

• Since the study list comes up with the current
choice of search queries, edit them to create new
search queries.
(B)
“Search queries” window:
Set the items to be used as search conditions.
(C)
12
Items Contents
Query Name Enter the search query name.
Search Target
PC Search through FCR PRIMA

Console system for studies.
The search query created is
displayed under the PC on the
left-hand side of the window.
Disk Search the disk for studies.

The search query created is
displayed under the Disk on the
left-hand side of the window.

“Items/Refresh” window:
Items Contents
Set the number of studies to be viewed in the “Study
Query Keyword Set a unique keyword for each Utilities” and the interval at which the list is refreshed
search query.
automatically.
The entry field is already filled
with “Query ...”.
Search Query Set items to be used as a search

Search Items*1 query.
When using as a search query, put
a check mark to the check box and
enter “Search Queries“.
Patient ID Enter a keyword in the entry field

and press the “Enter” key.
Patient Name
Study Instance
UID
Study
Description
# of Img
Storage Disk
Items Contents
DICOM
Transmission Number of Select the number of studies you
studies displayed want to view in a single page of
Sex within a window the “Study List” window.
Click at the rightmost end of
Study Status each entry field to open a Auto-refresh Select whether to refresh the list
pulldown menu and select a upon query automatically when search
Storage/Print condition. selection queries are selected.
Lock Periodical refresh Select whether to refresh the list
automatically upon expiry of a
Images
certain period of time.
DB
Refresh interval*1 Enter an interval of time auto
Management
refresh interval in minutes
History between 1 and 60 minutes.
Modality Font Size Select a font size to use for the

study list.
Date of Birth
Click at the right end of each
12
*1 Set when “Yes” is selected in the “Periodical
Study Date entry field. When the “Date refresh”.
Date of Settings “ window opens, specify
Registration a date and click [Setup]. Using “Study Utilities”

“Order” window: “Display Items” window:
Set the order of list display. Set the items that are displayed in the “Study Utilities”.
Put check marks to the check box for each item to be

Selection Items
viewed in the “Study Utilities”.
Items Contents
First-Priority Select the item that requires first

Item priority upon relocation. • Remove the check mark from the check box for
each item to be hidden in the “Study Utilities”.
Select ascending or descending • Selected items appeared in the “Study Utilities”
order. from top to bottom in sequence, left-aligned.
Second-Priority Set Second-Priority Item as a • To change the display position of an item, choose
Item First-Priority Item (Move Down) or (Move UP) with
Third-Priority Set Third-Priority Item as a First- the selected display item to be repositioned.
Item Priority Item
3. Click [Save] (C).
12

12.3.3 Editing Queries
The following operations can be performed to registered search queries.
• Editing search queries
• Deleting search queries
• Relocating search queries
• Setting the search queries under which a search starts up right after the startup of FCR PRIMA Console
■ Operation Windows ■ Editing Queries

● “Study Utilities” Window 1. Click [Arrange Queries] (A).
→→The “Search Queries List” window opens.
2. Click the desired button (B) and edit study

(A) queries.
Buttons Functions
Edit*3 *4 Open the “Setting List Search

Conditions” window and edit the
setting for selected search queries.
Delete*1 *2 *5 Delete created search queries.
● “Search Queries List” Window Move Up

Move Down
Relocate the display position of each
search query in the “Study Utilities”.
Set to Initial Set the initial condition for displaying

Condition “Study Utilities”.
(B)
*1 To delete the search query set to initial condition,

set another search query to initial condition; then,
the search query can be deleted.
*2 Predefined search queries cannot be deleted.
*3 You may not be able to edit some windows or
12
items in the predefined set of search queries
(C) depending on the selected search queries.

● “Setting List Search Conditions” Window *4 The “Setting List Search Conditions” window opens
with settings of the selected search query.
“12.3.2 Creating New Queries”
*5 A message displays to verify.
Click [OK] to delete.
• To delete the settings which have been set, click

[Delete].
• You can do the same by clicking [Save as is] after
selecting the search query, entering the keyword,
and then narrowing down the search result.

12.4 Manipulating Studies
The following operations can be performed.
- Viewing studies displayed in the “Study Utilities” of “Image Viewer”
- Saving images to disks
- Loading images from disks
- Deleting studies
and so on.
■ Descriptions of Functions ● Images in the Disk

• Starting up the “Image Viewer” to view
images
For the studies in the PC or disk, usable functions for “■Starting up the “Image Viewer””
images of studies are different.
• Loading an image from a disk into the PC
Each usable function is shown below.
“■Loading Images from a Disk”
● Images in the PC
• Starting up the “Image Viewer” to view When the study is imported from the disk, the
verification window opens.
images
• If study importing has completed:
“■Starting up the “Image Viewer””
Studies that have been imported from any source
• Reconducting a study / editing study other than the storage disk, such as those saved
information at another facility, have ID numbers and other
patient information based on different means used
“■Reconducting a Study and Editing its Study
for FCR studies. When reading the study image
Information”
stored in another facility, be sure to modify the
• Locking / unlocking a study patient information for the local facility. After
completion of modification, click [Update] to check
“■Locking and Unlocking Studies”
whether the patient information has been modified
• Changing a study status to “Completed” and properly.
“Verified” • If the image could not be imported:
“■Completing and Verifying Studies” - Check the disk and drive status.
- To view study images stored on the PDI disk,
• Deleting a study
12
browse them in the PDI viewer.
“■Deleting Studies”
• If certain study could not be imported:
• Saving / Printing images of studies - After a study has been successfully imported,
“■Saving, Printing, and Transmitting Study start up the “Image Viewer” window to correct
the relevant patient information.
Images”
- To view study images stored on the PDI disk,
browse them in the PDI viewer.

■ Operation Window ■ Starting up the “Image Viewer”
● “Study Utilities” Window
Starts up the “Image Viewer” to view images in
the “Image Viewer” window.
1. Select the images that are in the “Completed”

or “Verified” study status from the list and
click [Image Viewer] (A).
(B)
(C)
(D)
(E) • When the image in the disk is selected, the
(F) “Requesting for Disk Insert dialog“ appears and
(A) the image starts to be imported from the disk.
(G) “■Loading Images from a Disk”
• Images that have been loaded for viewing in the
“Image Viewer” window are automatically deleted
from the FCR PRIMA Console system when a
specified retention period expires. A retention
period can be set with the “User Utilities”.
“14.7 ■Changing the Time Period for Data
Storage”
• Multiple studies can be selected.

• You can do the same by:
- Selecting a study in the study list and clicking
[Image Viewer] on the right-hand side of the
window.
- Entering the number of the study to be viewed in
the “Image Viewer” window (item at the left end
of the list).
→→The “Image Viewer” window opens.
When the study except in the “Verified” or

“Completed” study status is included in the selected 12
studies, the verification window opens to continue
the process.
Click [OK] to continue excluding the studies which
cannot be processed.

■ Reconducting a Study and ■ Completing and Verifying Studies
Editing its Study Information Updates the study status to “Completed”, and
In conducting a restudy, sets exposure menus verifying the study updates the study status
for performing additional and re-exposure from “Completed” to “Verified” (the status
operations. Study information can be edited by appears in the list as “Verified”).
modifying or relocating menus in the display
order, replacing images and making
● Completing an Exposure Operation
Completes the exposure operation for a study
modifications to the Storage/Print settings.
after verifying that images have been properly
Also, the patient information can be modified. read in all studies. When a study is completed,
it is updated from the “Started” to the
1. Select a study from the list and click [Edit/ “Completed” study status.
Re-Study] (B).
“Chapter 9 Editing Study Information” If film printing (optional) is programmed by the “User
Utilities”, the images in the study are automatically
printed or saved when the study is verified.
■ Locking and Unlocking Studies “14.5 Setting of Printing, Saving and Transmitting
Images”
If a study is locked, it is no longer accessible

for deletion. ● Verifying a Study
If a study is unlocked, it becomes accessible Verifies the image quality of read images in a
for deletion. study. When a study is verified, the study is
updated from the “Completed” to the “Verified”
1. Select a study from the list and click [Lock] or study status.
[Unlock] (C).
If automatic saving of the images in a study to a

• Multiple studies can be selected. storage disk is programmed, the images are saved
• The selected studies are locked and are marked to the disk when the study is verified.
“Locked” in the Lock column of the list. If film printing (optional) is programmed, the images
• The selected studies are unlocked and are marked in the study are automatically printed or saved when
“-” in the Lock column of the list. the study is verified.
“14.5 Setting of Printing, Saving and Transmitting
12 Images”

1. Select the study to change the study status
from the study list, and click “Complete
■ Loading Images from a Disk
Study” or “Verify Study” (D). Unless images in a study have been saved to
the FCR PRIMA Console system, loads
images from a disk. The loaded images can be
Multiple studies can be selected. displayed in the “Image Viewer” window.
• The following operations cannot be performed on

If multiple studies have been selected and verified,
images loaded from a disk:
they might take considerable time before being
- Rotating and reversing images
updated to the “Verified” study status depending on
- Saving FCR image processing parameters
the number of selected studies.
- Editing markers
If the update of the study status does not complete
minutes after the start of [Verify Study], contact our - Editing study information
official dealer leaving the FCR PRIMA Console - Verifying and suspending a study
system untouched. - Disabling and enabling images, re-exposure
Do not force FCR PRIMA Console to shutdown. To • If the size of image data to be loaded from a disk
do so may result in failure to execute studies next is larger than the size of available space on the
time FCR PRIMA Console starts up. FCR PRIMA Console system, existing images
stored in the FCR PRIMA Console database are
→→The verification dialog appears. automatically deleted in sequence in ascending
time order of browsed studies.
2. Click [OK].
Studies that do not have images saved on the FCR

When the status of study that an unexposed menu
PRIMA Console system are marked with “Nothing” in
exists is changing to “Completed”, the verification
the Image column.
window opens.
To delete the exposure menus from which images
are to be read and change study status to 1. Select a study from the list and click [Load
“Completed”, click [OK]. Disk Images] (E).
Multiple studies can be selected.
→→The “Retrieve Images from Disk” dialog appears.
12
2. Select the purpose for which you are loading
images from a disk and click [Retrieve].
• For System:
Load images to save to the FCR PRIMA Console
system.
• Temporarily:
Load images for temporary browsing on the FCR
PRIMA Console system. Specify the number of
days in “Store for“.
Loaded images are automatically deleted when the

specified storage period expires.
→→The “Requesting for disk insert” dialog appears.

3. Select the drive used for loading images and
click [OK].
■ Deleting Studies
→→The “Ready to retrieve Images” dialog appears
and the disk drive tray opens.
The deleted study cannot be restored.
4. Place the requested disk in the drive tray, and

close the tray.
Studies in the following study status cannot be
5. Click [OK] in the “Ready to retrieve images” deleted:
dialog. • Study in progress
• Studies shown in the “Image Viewer” window
• Studies being printed or being saved
• If no disk is mounted, the message “Preparing to • Locked studies
retrieve images” displays.
When the disk mounting process completes, the
“Retrieve Images from Disk” dialog appears, and 1. Select the study from a list and click [Delete]
allowing you to verify the status of image loading. (F).
When the image loading process completes, the
message “Loading of the study completed”
displays. Click [OK]. Multiple studies can be selected.
• To manipulate the imported studies, search
through the “Study Utilities” for target studies →→The verification dialog appears.
stored in the PC.
“12.3 Searching for Studies and Creating New 2. Click [OK].
Queries”
If a study which cannot be deleted is existed, the

verification window opens.
To delete only those studies that can be deleted
among all selected studies, click [OK].
12

■ Saving, Printing, and
Transmitting Study Images
1. Select the study from a list and click each

item of [Store/Print] (G).
Multiple studies can be selected.
The following functions can be used for study

images:
Selection Items
Items Contents
Create PDI Save into the PDI disk

Film Print*1 Print on film

“8.3 Printing on a Film
(Optional)”
Freelayout Print images in Freelayout

“8.4 Free Layout Printing”
Work Disk Save into the work disk

“7.5 Saving to Work
Disks”
Storage Disk Save into the storage disk

“7.3 Saving to Storage
Disks”
DICOM Transmission*1 Transmit to DICOM server

“7.4 Transmitting
Studies to DICOM
Server (Optional)”
*1 Optional function 12

12

Chapter 13
Configuring “Client Utilities”
13.1 Setting Items of “Client Utilities”...................................... 13-2
13.2 Starting up and Exiting “Client Utilities”......................... 13-2
13.3 Maintaining Patient Information.......................................13-4
13.4 Verifying the IP Use Frequency........................................13-7
13.5 Setting User Information (For Administrator)................. 13-8

13.5.1 User Information Maintenance.................................... 13-8
13.5.2 Changing User Group Operational Authorities....... 13-12
13.5.3 Setting Images for Display
in the “User Selection” Window................................ 13-14
13.6 Editing Information about the Logged-in User.............. 13-16
13.7 Verifying History Information..........................................13-17
13.8 Disk Maintenance . .......................................................... 13-20

13
Configuring "Client Utilities"

13.1 Setting Items of “Client Utilities”
The following operations can be performed in “Client Utilities”:
• Registering, editing and deleting patient information
• Verifying the IP use frequency
• Setting user information
• Verifying history information
• Maintenance of disks
13.2 Starting up and Exiting “Client Utilities”

Starts the “Client Utilities” from the “Main” window. This section describes how to use each function and
how to exit the “Client Utilities”.
■ Operation Windows ● “Main Menu”

Starts the functions of “Client Utilities” from the
● “Main” Window desired button.

Starts up the “Client Utilities“.
(B)
(C)
13
(A)

■ Starting up the “Client Utilities” ■ Exiting the “Client Utilities”
1. Click (A) in the “Main” window. 1. Click [Close] (C) in the “Main Menu” window.
→→The “Main Menu” window closes and exit the
2. Click [Client Utilities]. “Client Utilities”.
→→The “Main Menu” window opens.
3. Click the desired buttons (B) according to the

functions to be used.
Buttons Functions
Patient Info Register, edit or delete patient

Maintenance information.
“13.3 Maintaining Patient
Information”
IP Use Frequency Verify the IP use frequency for

image reading. Verify IP use
frequency as a guideline for IP
replacement.
“13.4 Verifying the IP Use
Frequency”
User Settings Set various information and the

(for Administrator) authority about users of FCR
PRIMA Console.
“13.5 Setting User
Information (For
Administrator)”
User Settings Edit the information (display

(for General name, image... etc) about the
Users) currently logged-in user.
“13.6 Editing Information
about the Logged-in User”
History Info Verify the histories of login to

FCR PRIMA Console, access
to studies... etc.
“13.7 Verifying History
Information” 13
Disk Maintenance Maintain the disks set in the PC
drive and restore the database.
“13.8 Disk Maintenance”
Guidance is displayed in the “Client Utilities” window

to lead the user through operating procedures.

13.3 Maintaining Patient Information
Registers new patient information in FCR PRIMA Console database. Also, edits or deletes registered
patient information.
■ Operation Windows ■ Registering New Patient

Information
● “Patient Information List”
Inputs patient ID, names... etc, and the patient
Searches the patient to be maintained and the
information will be registered in database.
result will be shown in the list.
1. Click [New] (H).

(A)
→→The “Patient Information Registration“ window
(B) (C) opens.
(D) 2. Enter the patient information ( I ) to be

registered in the FCR PRIMA Console
database.
Items Contents
ID*1*2 An ID is a key used to identify patient

(E) (F) (G) (H) information to FCR PRIMA Console
●
Name*3 Enter a patient name within 64 characters
“Patient Information Registration”
Sex Click from [Male], [Female], and [Other]
(I) DOB Enter a date of birth according to the

sample entry
Height Patient’s height

Input with half-byte numbers
Weight Patient’s weight

Input with half-byte numbers
Patient Input comment

comment
*1 The following characters cannot be used.
13 (J) (K) (L)

“#%&`+?/\*@<
However, the space can be used but a patient ID
which consists of solely space is not allowed.
● “Edit Patient Information”

*2 IDs of patient information already registered in the

FCR PRIMA Console database cannot be used.
*3 The following characters cannot be used:
(M) *, @, “, #, %, &, ‘, +, ?, \, /, <, =
Items other than ID and Sex are optional.
(N) (O)

3. Click [Register] (L). ■ Searching Patient Information
→→The patient information is registered in the FCR
PRIMA Console database and the “Patient
Information Registration” window closes.
1. Enter the patient information (A) to be edited.
Items Contents
Continue registering additional patient information:
Click [Next Patient] (K). ID The patient information that completely
The patient information is registered in the FCR matches the ID as entered is located
PRIMA Console database and the entry fields are
Name The patient information whose prefix
cleared. Continue to register additional patient matches the Name as entered is located
information.
Sex The patient information that matches the
Clicked Sex is located
DOB The patient information that completely

matches the DOB as entered is located
Height The patient information that completely

matches the Height as entered is located
Weight The patient information that completely

matches the Weight as entered is located
Patient The patient information that completely

comment matches the Patient comment as entered
is located
If you set multiple search conditions, patient

information that matches the entire set of search
conditions specified is listed.
2. Click [Last Update] (B).
• The date of last update is the date on which

patient information was the most recent because
of new registration, update and the like.
• To specify a retrospective range of dates, click the
upper radio button and then click a date range
from the pulldown menu.
13
• To specify a date, click the lower radio button and

click it from the pulldown menu.

3. Click [Search] (C). ■ Deleting Patient Information
→→Data matching the specified set of search
conditions is displayed in the list (D).
Changes to patient information would have no effect

on the patient information in the studies already
The data is displayed in ascending order of ID. conducted.
To change the display order, click the header of the
field to be used as a reference. Each time you click
the header, the display order toggles between 1. Search the patient to be deleted.
ascending and descending.
Search Procedure: “■ Searching Patient
Information”
2. Click the patient information to be edited

■ Editing Patient Information from the list (D) and click [Delete] (F).
Changes to patient information would have no effect 3. Click [OK].

on the patient information in the studies already
→→The Clicked patient information is deleted from the
conducted.
FCR PRIMA Console database.
1. Search the patient to be edited.

Search Procedure: “■ Searching Patient
Information”
■ Finishing Maintenance of
Patient Information
2. Click the patient information to be edited
from the list (D) and click [Edit] (G). 1. To exit the patient information setup, click
→→The “Edit Patient Information” window opens. [Close] (E) in the “Patient Information List“.
The window comes up with the information
registered in the database.
3. Edit patient information (M).

Settings: “■Registering patient information”-2.
4. Click [Save] (O).

→→The edits made to the patient information are
saved to the FCR PRIMA Console database and
the “Modify patient information” window closes.
13

13.4 Verifying the IP Use Frequency
■ Operation Window ■ Verifying the IP Use Frequency
● “IP Use Frequency” 1. Verify the display items (A) in the list.
Display Items
(A)
Items Contents
Size IP Size
Barcode A number that identifies an IP

Number uniquely
IP Use Frequency of IP usage

Frequency
(B)
The data is displayed in ascending order of [IP

Use Frequency]. To change the display order,
click the header of the field to be used as a
reference. Each time you click the header, the
display order toggles between ascending and
descending.
■ Finishing Verification of IP Use

Frequency
1. Click [Close] (B) after the verification

completes.
→→The “Main Menu” window opens.
13

13.5 Setting User Information
(For Administrator)
Registers, edits or deletes information about the users of FCR PRIMA Console.
Also, assigns operational authorities to user groups and set images to be displayed in the “User
Selection” window.
These functions are accessible only to users having an administrator authority.
13.5.1 User Information Maintenance

Registers, edits or deletes information about the users of FCR PRIMA Console.
• Only the Administrator’s information is registered to the FCR PRIMA Console by default.
• Register users to suit your environmental needs.
User name – for image display
Comment
Image
13

■ Operation Windows ■ Registering New User
Information
● “User Settings (for Administrator)” Registers, edits or deletes information about
(A) the users of FCR PRIMA Console.
Once a new user of FCR PRIMA Console is
registered, clicks the user from the “User
Selection” window and log in as such user.
(B)
1. Click [User Info Maintenance] (A).
● “Registered User List”
→→The “Registered User List“ opens.
2. Click [New] (E).

(C) →→The “User Registration” window opens.
(D)
3. Register a new user ( I ) of FCR PRIMA
(E)
Console.
(F)
Items Contents
(G) (H) Account An account name is a piece of
Name*1 information that identifies each
● “User Registration” individual user.

Enter an account name within 20
characters including numerals (0-9),
alphabetic characters (A to Z and a
(I) to z), and the following symbols:
!, `, (, ), -, ., @, ^, _, {, }, ~
User Name
For Image The user name appears in the

Display*1 *2 window.
(K)
Enter a user name within 20
(J) characters
For Data This information is needed to save

● “Edit User Information” Storage*1 *3*4 images to a disk in the DICOM
format.
Enter a user name within 64
(L) characters
Authority An authority is an operational

privilege on FCR PRIMA Console
assigned to each individual user
13
group
(N) Change authority assigned to

user group: “13.5.2 Changing
(M)
User Group Operational
● “Image Select”
Authorities”
Comment Enter a comment within 50

characters
(O)
Image The image thus set is displayed in
the “User Registration” window.
Set with the following procedure:
1) Click [Image Select] (N)
2) Select an image (Q)
3) Click [Setup] (S)
(Q)
(P)
Items Contents ■ Editing User Information
New Enter a password within 20
Password*5 characters
Confirm*5 Verify the password entered above • Changes to patient information would have no
effect on the patient information in the studies
Automatically An auto-login user is a user who
login user.*6 logs in to FCR PRIMA Console already conducted.
automatically when it starts up • Information about Administrator registered by
default can be edited but cannot be deleted.
Automatically An auto-verify user is a user who is
verify user registered with FCR PRIMA Console
and the user having the study
automatically verified after 1. Click [User Info Maintenance] (A).
exposure. →→The “Registered User List” window opens.
Auto-verify users can be configured
using the “User Utilities”
Auto-Verify: ”13.6 Auto-
2. Select the user information to be edited from
the list (H) and click [Edit] (E).
Determine Settings”
→→The “Edit Patient Information” window opens.
*1 The same account name or user name as the one The window comes up with the information
that already exists cannot be registered. registered in the database.
*2 The following characters cannot be used:
\, /, |, :, <, >, ?, +, =, * 3. Edit the User Information (L).
User names consisting solely of spaces are not
allowed. Input and Selection Items
*3 The space can be used, but a user name which Items Contents
consists of solely space is not allowed.
Change Put a check to change the
*4 Leave a space between the first name and family
password password
name.
*5 The password is indicated as **** in the window. New Enter a new password within 20
password*1 characters
*6 A user set as an Auto-Login user logs in to FCR
PRIMA Console automatically without being Confirm*1 Verify the password entered above
required to make a user selection or enter a
password. *1 The password is indicated as **** in the window.
Settings other than password: “■Registering New
User Information”- 3.
Account names are the information recorded in the
log. Do not register account names that pertain to
personal information. 4. Click [Save] (N).
5. Click [OK].
→→The edited version of user information is saved
13 The entry of Comment and Password is optional.
When the entry of Password is omitted, this user can
and the “Edit User Information” window closes.
log in without being required to enter the password.

4. Click [Register] (K).

→→The new user is registered and the “User
Registration” window closes.

■ Changing Display Order of Users ■ Exiting User Information
Maintenance
→→The “Registered User List” window opens. 1. To exit the “Registered User List” window,
click [Close] (G).
2. Select the user whose display order is to be →→The “User Settings (for Administrator)” window
moved from the list (H). opens.
3. Click [UP] or [DOWN] (C) to move the user up 2. Click [Close] (B).
or down.
4. Click [Save Order] (D).

5. Click [OK].
→→This display order is saved.
■ Deleting User Information

A user who is deleted cannot log in to FCR
PRIMA Console.
The deletion of user information would have no

effect on the user information in the studies already
conducted.

→→The “Registered User List” window opens.
2. Select the user information to be edited from

the list (J) and click [Delete] (F).
Auto-verify users cannot be deleted.
→→A message displays to verify. 13

3. Click [OK].
→→This user information is deleted.

13.5.2 Changing User Group Operational Authorities

If multiple users use FCR PRIMA Console,
settings or information could be inadvertently ● “User Settings (for Administrators)”
altered by non-administrator users. To prevent
this risk, limitations may be imposed on users’
operations.
Assigns operational authorities to users (A)
according to their user groups or
responsibilities.
(B)
The five user groups (Group 1 to 4, and
Administrator) are shown below.
Sample Use of Operation Authorities ● “User Group Info Maintenance”
User Groups Contents
Group 1 Assign the physician’s (C)
operational authority
Group 2 Assign the nurse’s operational
authority
(D)
Group 3 Assign the technologist’s
operational authority
Group 4 Assign the clerk’s operational
authority
(E)
Administrator Assign all operational authorities
to system administrators. The (F)
operational authorities cannot be
modified
By default, Groups 1 to 4 are not granted the

operational authorities. Modify the operational
authorities to suit your environmental needs.
• User information maintenance
• User group information maintenance
• “User Utilities”
• Restore operation
• Disk copy operation
If an user attempts to perform an operation for
which the user has no privilege, a message is
13 displayed and the operation is rejected.
User Group Operational Authorities: “13.5.1
User Information Maintenance”

■ Changing User Group ■ Exiting the Change of User
Operational Authorities Group Operational Authorities
1. Click [User Info Maintenance] (A). 1. Click [Close] (B) in the “User Settings (for
→→The “Registered User List” window opens. Administrator)” window.
→→The “Change of User Group Operational
2. Select the user group to be assigned from the Authorities” window exits.
“User Group” pull down list (C).
→→The operational authorities of the selected user
group is displayed.
3. Assign/Cancel the authorities shown in the

list (D).
• Put a check mark : Assign the authority
• Remove a check mark : Cancel the authority
4. Repeat the Step 2. and 3. to complete the

assignment of operational authorities to the
selected user group.
5. Click [Save] (E).

→→The operational authorities assigned to the
selected user group are saved and the “User
Group Info Maintenance” window closes.
13

13.5.3 Setting Images for Display in the “User Selection” Window
Adds or deletes images displayed in the “User Selection“ window.
• The image displayed in the “User Selection” window is shown below.
Image
The added image is set by each user that which image is to be displayed in user information
maintenance.
“13.5.1 User Information Maintenance”
■ Operation Windows ■ Adding Images for Display in

the “User Selection” Window
● “User Settings (for Administrators)”
1. Click [Addition/Deletion of User Images] (A).
→→The “Image Setup” window opens.
2. Click [Add] (F).

(A) →→The “Image Add” window opens.
(B)
3. Click [View] (G).
● “Image Setup”
→→The “Select images to be added” window opens.
4. Select the image to be added and click [Open].

(C)
A JPEG file up to 25 KB (kilobytes) in size can be

added as an image.
→→The location and name of the selected image file

are displayed in the “Look in and File Name” in the
“Select images to be added” window.
13 5. Click [Add] ( I ).
(D) (E) (F)
→→The “Image Add” window closes and the “Image
● “Image Add”
Setup” window opens.
The newly added image is not displayed at this

(G)
moment.
(H) (I)

6. Click [Close] (D). ■ Exiting the Setup of Display
→→The “User Settings (for Administrator)” window
Image
opens.
7. Click [Addition/Deletion of User Images] (A). 1. Click [Close] (B) in the “User Settings (for
Administrator)” window.
→→The “Change of User Group Operational
8. Verify the image is added and click [Close] (D). Authorities” window exits.

opens.
■ Deleting an Displayed Image

from the “User Selection”
Window
1. Click [Addition/Deletion of User Images] (A).

2. Select images to be deleted from the list (C).
The image that is assigned to a user cannot be

deleted.
3. Click [Delete] (E).

4. Click [OK].
→→The selected images are deleted.
5. Click [Close] (D).

opens.
13

13.6 Editing Information about the
Logged-in User
The user who is currently logged-in to FCR PRIMA Console can edit his/her own password and other
information by him/ herself.
• The information to be registered and edited is shown as below in the “User Selection“ window.
Comment
Image
■ Operation Windows ■ Editing Information on the

Logged-in User
● “User Setting (for General Users)”
Among the user information, the following
information can be edited:
(A)
• Comment
• Image
• Password
1. Edit the information about the logged-in user (A).

(B) (C)
Items Contents
● “Image Select” Comment Enter a comment within 50

characters.
Image The selected image is displayed
(D)
in the “Modify currently logged in
user information” window.
Follow these steps:
1) Click [Image Select]
2) Select an image in (D)
3) Click [Save] (F)
13 Change Put a check mark to change the
password. password.
(F)
Old password*1 Enter the old password.
(E)
New Enter a new password within 20
password*1 characters.
Confirm*1 Verify the password entered above.
*1 The password is indicated as **** in the window.
The entry of Comment and Password is optional.

When the entry of Password is omitted, this user can
log in without being required to enter the password.

→→The user information is saved, and the “User
Setting (for General Users)” window closes.

13.7 Verifying History Information
The following four kinds of history information can be verified:
• History of login and logoff to and from FCR PRIMA Console
• History of access to studies for purposes such as browsing and modification
• History of image storage/print
• History of backup and restoration carried out by using the “Backup Utilities”
■ Operation Windows ● “Image Transfer History”

● “History Info” (L)
(M)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(N)
(E)
● “Login History” ● “Backup History”

(O)
(F)
(P)
(G)
(Q)
(H)
● “Study Access History” To specify the date of history information ((F), ( I ),

(L), (O)), the following methods can be used:
(I) • To specify a retrospective range of dates, click the
(J)
upper radio button and then select a date range
from the pull-down menu.
13
(K) • To specify a date, click the lower radio button and

select it from the pull-down menu.

■ Verifying the Login/Logoff ■ Verifying the Study Access
History History
1. Click [Login History] (A). 1. Click [Study Access History] (B).

→→The “Login History” window opens. →→The “Study Access History” window opens.
2. Select a login/logoff date in “Date of 2. Enter or select a condition of the history to be

Operation” (F). verified ( I ).
3. Click [Search] (G).
Items Contents
conditions is displayed. ID*1 The accessed patient ID*2
The data is displayed in descending order in “Date Date of Access*1 The accessed date
of Operation”.
To change the display order, select the header of the *1 If both “ID” and “Date of Access” are specified,
field to be used as a reference. Each time you select studies that match both are listed.
the header, the display order toggles between *2 The studies that completely match the ID as
ascending and descending . entered are located.
4. Click [Close] (H) to exit the login history 3. Click [Search] (J).
verification. →→Data matching the specified set of search
conditions is displayed.
The data is displayed in descending order in “Date
of Operation”.
To change the display order, select the header of the

field to be used as a reference.
Each time you select the header, the display order
toggles between ascending and descending.
4. Click [Close] (K) to exit the study access

history verification.
13

■ Verifying the Image Storage/ ■ Verifying the Backup/
Print History Restoration History
1. Click [Image Transfer History] (C). 1. Click [Backup History] (D).

→→The “Image Transfer History” window opens. →→The “Backup History” window opens.
2. Enter or select a condition of the history to be 2. Select a backup or restoration date in “Date
verified (L). of Operation” (O).
3. Click [Search] (P).
Items Contents
ID*1 The patient ID of a saved or conditions is displayed. The data is displayed in
printed study descending order in “Date of Operation”.
Date of Image The date of a saved or printed
Transfer*1 study
field to be used as a reference.
Each time you select the header, the display order
*1 If both “ID” and “Date of Image Transfer” are toggles between ascending and descending.
specified, studies that match both are listed.
4. Click [Close] (Q) to exit the backup/

3. Click [Search] (M). restoration history verification.
conditions is displayed. The data is displayed in
descending order in “Date of Operation”.
■ Exiting Verification of History
field to be used as a reference. Each time you select
1. Click [Close] (E) in the “History Info“ window.
the header, the display order toggles between →→Exit verification of history.
ascending and descending.
4. Click [Close] (N) to exit the image storage/

print history verification.
13

13.8 Disk Maintenance
The following operations can be performed on the disk inserted in the PC’s control drive:
• Replacing disks
• Configuring a storage disk as a write-enabled or read-only disk
• Restoring a storage disk or work disk (when a disk restoration prompt message displays)
• Restoring the database with information from a storage disk or work disk
■ Operation Windows ● “Disk Restoration”

● “Disk Operation”
(A)
(B)
(C) (L)
(D)
(E)
(F)
(G) (M)
(H)
(N)
● “Replacing Disks”
|
● “Database Restoration”
(O)
(P)
● “Disk Setting”
13 (Q)
(I)
(S)
(K) (R)
(J)
(T)

■ Updating Display of Disk ■ Replacing Disks
Information
Refreshes the display of the device status, 1. Select a drive whose disk is to be replaced in
usage and the setting for writing data. “Device” (A).
1. Select a drive in “Device” (A). 2. Click [Replacing Disks] (D).

→→The “Replacing Disks” dialog appears.
2. Click [Update] (B).
→→The disk information of a selected drive is 3. Place a disk in the disk drive tray and close
updated. the tray.
→→Operate according to the instructions in the
3. Verify disk information. “Replacing Disks” dialog.
“■Setting Up Disks”- 5.
Display Items
Items Contents
Status The name of a disk and the

amount of free space (%)
Usage Indicates whether the disk is

intended as a storage disk or work
disk*1
Disk Write Indicates whether a storage disk

inserted is “write enabled” or
“read-only”
*1 Nothing appears for any other type of disk.

Disk Types “2.7 Before using disks”
13

■ Setting Disks as “Write ■ Restoring Disks after Mismatch
Enabled” or “Write Disabled” Occurred
Restores a storage or work disk after
mismatches occurring in the image
Only the “storage disks“ can be set. management file on the disk following power
failure while writing to the disk or other adverse
conditions.
1. Select a drive to be set in “Device“ (A). Once the disk has been restored (rebuilt), it
can be used again as before.
2. Click “Disk Setting” (E).
→→The “Disk Setting“ dialog appears. 1. If a restoration promt message displays when
selecting “Device” (A), click “Disk
3. Select from “Write enabled“ and “Write Restoration” (F).
disabled” ( I ).
4. Click [OK] (K). 2. Click [OK].

→→The storage disk is reconfigured as a write-
→→The “Disk Restoration” dialog appears and the
enabled or read-only disk.
restoration starts automatically.
→→The “Select usage of a disk” dialog appears in a
while.
The “Specify how to handle the disk” dialog may

not appear depending on the disk status.
If it does not appear, skip Steps 3. and 4.
3. Select the usage of the disk to be restored

(rebuilt) (M).
4. Click [Next] (N).

→→If choose it to be a storage disk, the “Select an
image storage disk from the list” dialog appears.
Go to Step 5.
→→If choose it to be a work disk, the restoration is
done.
13 5. Select a storage disk to be restored (rebuilt)

from a pulldown menu (O).
6. Click [OK] (P).

→→The “Disk Restoration“ dialog appears again.
After a while, the restoration finishes and the “Disk
Restoration“ dialog closes.
The restoration is done.

■ Restoring Information in Disks ■ Exiting Disk Maintenance
to Database
If the equipment should fail or require 1. Click [Close] (H) in the “Disk Operation”
replacement, the FCR PRIMA Console dialog.
database can be restored by importing study →→The disk maintenance exits.
information from the storage disk or work disk
to the FCR PRIMA Console system.
1. Select a drive at which database is to be

replaced in “Device“ (A).
2. Click [Database Restoration] (G).

→→The “Database Restoration“ dialog appears.
3. Select the action to take when there are the

same studies on the FCR PRIMA Console
system as the ones in the disk (Q).
Selection Items
Items Contents
Studies are Delete existing studies on the FCR

updated PRIMA Console system, and register
studies imported from the disk
Skip study Skip the import of studies from the

registration disk, to preserve the existing studies
process on FCR PRIMA Console system
4. Click [Start] (S).

→→The restoration of database starts and the study
information from the disk is imported to the FCR
PRIMA Console database.
Study information that has already been imported

to the FCR PRIMA Console database cannot be
reverted when clicking [Cancel] (E) during
restoration.
13
→→When the import of study information completes in
a while, the “Database Restoration” dialog closes.
To verify images from a study that has been

imported to the FCR PRIMA Console system,
insert the disk used in the restoration process into
the disk drive. Once the database restoration
process completes, the disk use is configured as
a read-only disk and should be managed in
read-only status.
If the database is restored using a work disk, that
disk is configured as a storage disk.

13

Chapter 14
Setting “User Utilities”
14.1 Setting “User Utilities”...................................................... 14-2
14.2 Starting up and Exiting the “User Utilities”..................... 14-3
14.3 Setting the Exposure Menu and Study Menu.................. 14-5

14.3.1 Setting the Exposure Menu......................................... 14-6
14.3.2 Setting Study Menu.................................................... 14-14
14.3.3 Setting the Display Menu Group............................... 14-18
14.4 Setting the Character String Annotated on a Film........ 14-21
14.5 Setting of Printing, Saving and Transmitting Images... 14-23
14.6 Auto-Determine Settings................................................. 14-27
14.7 Image Deletion Settings.................................................. 14-28
14.8 Backup Notification Settings..........................................14-29
14.9 Automatically Startup Settings.......................................14-30
14.10 Prefix Display Settings.................................................... 14-31
14.11 Setting Image Incidental Information Display Contents.... 14-32 14

14.12 Loading Patient Information...........................................14-33
Setting "User Utilities"
14.13 Media Consistency Check............................................... 14-37
14.14 History Information Consistency Check........................ 14-40
14.15 Automatically Logoff....................................................... 14-41
14.16 Adding/Deleting User Marker..........................................14-42
14.17 Preset Setting...................................................................14-43

14.1 Setting “User Utilities”
The “User Utilities” are to prepare the environment required for operating the FCR PRIMA Console,
such as adding or editing exposure menus and study menus.
The following operations can be performed in the “User Utilities”.
• Menu Settings
• Character String Info Annotated on Film
• Output Destination Settings
• Auto-Determine Settings
• Image Deletion Settings
• Backup Notification Settings
• Client Application Startup Settings
• Prefix Display Settings
• Image-incidental info Display Settings
• Patient Database Import
• Media Consistency Check
• History-Info Consistency Check
• Auto-Logoff Settings
• Marker Setting
• Preset Setting
14

14.2 Starting up and Exiting the “User
Utilities”
The FCR PRIMA Console shuts down if attempts to start up the “User Utilities”. Before starting the
“User Utilities”, verifies that all the windows started up from the FCR PRIMA Console are closed.
■ Operation Windows ■ Starting up the “User Utilities”

● “Select Server Application Behavior” Dialog 1. Double-click the server application icon in the
task tray.
opens.
2. Select [User Utility] and click [OK] (A).

(A) →→A message displays, and the “User authentication”
window opens.
● “User authentication” 3. Select the log in “User Name” (B). Enter

“Password” (B), and click [OK] (C).
→→After the user is verified, the “Main menu” opens.
(B)
4. Click the desired button (D).
(C) Selection Items
Items Contents
Menu Setting Set the “Exposure Menu” and
● “Main Menu” “Study Menu”.
“14.3 Setting up the Exposure
Menu and Study Menu”
(D)
Character String Set the character string
Info Annotated on annotated on a film.
Film
“14.4 Setting the Character
String Annotated on a Film”
Output Set each output destination.
Destination • Saving images to disk
Settings • Printing images on a film
(optional)
• Transmitting images to
(E)
DICOM server (optional)
“14.5 Setting of Printing, 14
Saving and Transmitting
Images”
Auto-Determine Set up automatic verification of
settings the completed study.
“14.6 Auto-Determine Settings”
Image Deletion Change the time to automatically
Settings delete images read from a disk.
“14.7 Image Deletion
Settings”

Items Contents
Backup Set up to display a message *1 If the contents are changed in the “Setting to
Notification prompting you to make the Display Image-incidental info” window, the
Settings backup. changes will not be reflected to the image of
“14.8 Backup Notification “Image Viewer” window.
Settings” Display of image incidental information can be set
in the “Image Viewer” window.
Client Set up the client application to
Application start automatically, after starting
Startup Settings the server application.
“14.9 Automatically Startup ■ Exiting the “User Utilities”
Settings”
Prefix Display
Setting
Set up to add a prefix to the
patient names displayed on the
1. Click [Close] (E) in the “Main Menu”.
FCR PRIMA Console. →→The “Main Menu” window closes and exit the “User
“14.10 Prefix Display Utilities”.
Settings” After that, the FCR PRIMA Console starts
automatically.
Image-incidental Set up the display of additional
info Display image information.
Settings*1
“14.11 Setting Additional
Image Information Display
Content”
Patient Import the patient information to
Database Import the FCR PRIMA Console
database.
“14.12 Loading Patient
Information”
Media Check whether or not the
Consistency information saved in the storage
check disk is improved.
“14.13 Media Consistency
Check”
History-Info Check that the history of
Consistency processes such as FCR PRIMA
Check Console login/logoff, access to
studies, image storing or printing,
and backup or restoring, has not
been altered.
“14.14 History Information
Consistency Check”
Auto-Logoff Set up to enable/disable
Settings automatic logoff. If you select
automatic logoff, set the time to
automatically logoff.
14 “14.15 Automatically Logoff”
Marker Setting Register and delete user
markers.
“14.16 Adding/Deleting User
Marker”
Preset Setting Assign preset settings to the
keypad keys.
“14.17 Preset Settings”

14.3 Setting the Exposure Menu and
Study Menu
Creates, edits or deletes exposure and study menus for CR studies.
● What is a Study Menu?

A study menu is a consolidation of exposure menus used in a series of studies.
If you register frequently used menus as study menu, such as “Chest biplane”, it is not necessary to
select two kinds of exposure menus such as “Chest, FRN P→A” and “Chest, LAT”.
Examples: <Work Flow>
If a study menu was selected If an exposure menu was selected
Select “Chest biplane” Select “Chest, FRN P→A”
The two menus “Chest, FRN P→A” and

Process “Chest, FRN P→A”
“Chest, LAT” appear.
Process “Chest, FRN P→A” Select “Chest, LAT”
Moves automatically to “Chest, LAT” Process “Chest, LAT”
Process “Chest, LAT” End
End
Indicates that the screen
changes automatically.
14

14.3.1 Setting the Exposure Menu
Adds newly created exposure menus to the “Exposure/Study Menu” or editing the existing menus.
Also, this section discribes how to delete exposure menu.
■ Operation Windows ■ Creating New “Exposure Menu”

A new exposure menu can be created by
● “Menu Setting” copying and editing the information of an
existing exposure menu.
(A)
Select an exposure menu with an exposure format
(region, positioning) similar to the exposure menu
you want to create. For example, if you want to
create an exposure menu for a chest X-ray, select a
similar chest X-ray exposure menu. If you select an
exposure menu not similar to a chest X-ray in this
(B)
case, you can select an exposure menu for the head
(C) (D) and created a new menu out of it, the read images
resulting from this menu may not be suitable for
● “Exposure Menu Setting”

radiographic interpretation.
(E) 1. Click an exposure menu in the “Exposure/

Study Menu” (A).
→→Registerred exposure menus are displayed in the
(F) order of the study menu code.
2. Select the exposure menu to be copied.

→→The color of the selected exposure menu reverses.
(G)
You can do the same by clicking an exposure
menu in the “Exposure/Study Menu” and in the
“Display Setting”.
3. Click [New] (B).

→→The “Exposure Menu Setting” window opens.
14

4. Enter the “Extended Menu Code”, “Exposure
Menu Name“, and “MPM Code“ in the upper
• Extended Menu Code
part of “Exposure Menu“ window (E). The extended menu code is a code to manage the
Input Items exposure menu. If several exposure menus are
copied from the same exposure menu, they will
Items Contents have the same MPM code as the exposure menu
Extended A code not yet in use is displayed. that was copied. Exposure menus having the
Menu Code *1 To change the code, enter up to 16 same MPM code also have the same EDR (a
characters. function to correct the density and contrast
Exposure Enter an exposure menu name up automatically) and image processing parameters.
Menu Name *2 to 64 characters. Therefore, even if the extended menu code is
MPM Code. The code of the original exposure different, EDR and image processing parameters
menu is set. Select a code which is are the same.
not used yet from the pull down The following are examples of extended menu
menu. codes and MPM codes when you attempt to create
If the selected code has already a new menu for cervical spine front, cervical spine
been assigned to another exposure side, cervical spine RAO, and cervical spine LAO,
menu, this exposure menu will be
using a copy from cervical spine (MPM Code:
displayed in the “Related Menu”
field. In this case, select another 0107). (Because the EDR and display parameters
unused code so that the “Related are stable, it is not necessary to change them
Menu” field becomes empty. here.)
Image
Menu MPM Extended
EDR Processing Remarks
Name Code Menu Code
Parameters
*1 The characters * @ ` cannot be used.

Menu Cervical Different exposure
0107 0107-0000
However, the space can be used but a code which copied spine parameters such as
reversal of image or
consists of solely space is not allowed. film marks can be set
Cervical
*2 The characters * @ cannot be used. spine front
0107 0107-0001
Same Same
in each menu.
If you change the
However, the space can be used but a menu name Cervical
0107 0107-0002 display parameters of
Extended spine side
which consists of solely space is not allowed. Menu Cervical
Cervical spine, all
0107 0107-0003 menus will be changed
spine RAO
accordingly.
Cervical
0107 0107-0004
spine LAO
• MPM code
The MPM code is a four-digit code to manage the
exposure menus. This code determines EDR
(function for automatic density and contrast
correction) and the image processing parameters.
1st digit: Any character to determine EDR.
2nd digit: S
et any number or character from 0 to 9
or A to F. EDR does not change
regardless of changes made in the
number or character of this digit.
3rd digit: Represents the exposure region.
0: Cephalic region 4: Abdominal region
1: Cervical region 5: Pelvic region 14
2: Thoracic region 6: Upper limb region
3: Mammary region 7: Lower limb region
4th digit: Represents the exposure method.

0: General radiography
1: Contrast radiography
2: Laminagraphy, Others
The following is an example of how to assign an
MPM code to a new menu.
When creating a new menu named “Pelvis
Oblique” with slightly reduced density from “Pelvis
General” (MPM Code: 0500):

Copied Pelvis General (MPM Code: 0500) Items Contents
Exposure
Auto Set Image Reading Sensitivity to
Menu
Auto mode.
Extended Pelvis Oblique (MPM Code: 05X0)
Semi Set Image Reading Sensitivity to
Exposure ↑
Semiauto mode.
Menu For X, enter any number
from 1 to 9 or any Fix *1 Set Image Reading Sensitivity to Fix
character from A to F. mode.
When selecting this mode, enter S
Value (4 to 20047). Use the arrow
button to change the value under S
5. Set each item in the “Exposure Parameter 1” Value.
(F). Manual Select this checkbox for manual
EDR processing. This setting is valid
only if the Image Reader has the
manual EDR processing function.
Image The image position is displayed.
Position Do not change this parameter.
Film Mark *2 Select the Film Mark (letters on the
film) from the pull down menu.
“14.4 Setting the Character String
Annotated on a Film”
Selection Items
Function Select a function (Special
Items Contents Processing) from the pull down
menu.
Flip Image Select from [Frontal Image], [Vert],
[Horiz], [Horiz+Vert] RT Routine Processing
• For PA exposure, select [Horiz]. TS Temporal Subtraction Processing
• Normally, the [Frontal Image] or
[Horiz] is selected. ES Energy Subtraction Processing
Rotate Select [None] or [Left 90-deg. Image WS Whole Spine (Entire Spine
Image Rotation] Exposure) Processing
• Normally, this parameter is fixed
PS IVP Processing
to [None].
TM Tomography Processing
SS/CS Set the CS (contrast shift) and SS
(image density). No. of film Select the number of images to be
Click the “Up” or “Down” arrow prints *1 printed on a film. Select a number
button to change the value. Values between 1 to 9.
cannot be entered directly from the
Display Color Set the display color for the exposure
keyboard.
Setting menu name.
CS The image contrast can be changed
“●Display Color Setting”
by parameter assigned as coefficient
of gradation curve. Detailed-Img Change the image processing
Set within *0.5 to *2.0. Processing conditions of the exposure menu
Parameter
SS The image density can be changed “●Detailed-Img Processing
Setting
by assigning a coefficient to the Parameter Setting”
reading sensitivity parameter.
14 Set within /2.0 to *2.0.
EDR Mode Select EDR Mode (Image Reading
Sensitivity Setting). *1 The value can be entered directly using the
keyboard.
*2 You can do the same by entering up to 10
characters directly using the keyboard.

6. Set each item in the “Exposure Parameter 2”. 7. Set each item in the “Exposure Parameter 3”.
Selection Items
Items Contents
Image reading This parameter is intended for
mode. the functions to be introduced in
Selection Items
the future, and is currently not
Items Contents yet available. (Changes to the
parameter will not take effect.)
Film Reference Select the film reference
Orientation orientation for film printing. FR Reading 5 lines/mm
• Landscape SR Reading 10 lines/mm
• Protrait
GR Reading 10 lines/mm
This parameter is applicable
only to the 1-image format (203 GPR Processing Select ON (enable) or OFF
x 254mm) and 2-image format (disable) for GPR (Grid Removal
(383.5 x 383mm). If you want to Processing ).
print with a 90-degree rotated
image on the film, select Portrait.
Film Edge Select a color for the film edge 8. Select IP Logical Size.
(frame).
• Transparent
• Black
Pixel Density Select a pixel density for the
image.
Standard Print or save the image with low From the pull down menu, select the IP logical
Density pixel density. read size for the cassette type Image Reader
This reduces the size of the
stored image file.
9. Complete the settings and click [OK] (G).
High Print or save the image without →→The new exposure menu will be displayed in the
Density changing the pixel
density. operation window once you have registered it in
the “Display Setting”.
Film Size *1 The film size is displayed.
Do not change this parameter. “14.3.3 Setting the Display Menu Group”
Number of Select number of division

division exposure exposure.
14

● Display Color Setting ● Detailed-Img Processing Parameter
Setting
1. Select a color for the exposure menu name The following parameters determine the image
displayed in the “Exposure Menu Name”. processing conditions.
• GP (Gradation Processing) parameter
• RP (Spatial Frequency Processing)
parameter
• DRC (Dynamic Range Control Processing)
parameter
• TAS (Tomographic Artifacts Suppression
Processing) parameter
• FNC (Frequency Noise Control Processing)
parameter (optional)
• MFP (Multi-objective Frequency Processing)
→→The colors already selected as candidates for the
parameter (optional)
exposure menu name are displayed in this
“Display Color Setting” window. Certain image processing sequences have no
effect when carried out concurrently. Each
2. In the “Display Color Setting” window, click image processing sequence takes the course
[More Colors...]. shown below.
→→The “Color” window opens.
DRC GP/MFP
3. Select any desired color and click [OK]. FNC
TAS GP/RP
○ : Exclusive control
(H)
(I)
In the “Color” window, create a unique color by

adjusting a color selected from the “Basic colors”.
Add this newly created color to the “Custom colors” (J)
pallet by clicking [Add to Custom Colors] to make it
selectable as a display color for the exposure menu
name. 1. Select each item in the “Image Processing
Parameter Setting” (H).
→→The selected color is displayed. The “Color”
Selection Items
14 window and “Display Color Setting” window close.
Items Contents
Image Position Select an image to which the
image processing parameter

setting is to be applied.
GP/RP or MFP Select GP (Gradation
(optional) Processing)/RP (Spatial
Frequency Processing) or MFP
(Multi-objective Frequency
Processing).
DRC Select ON (enable) or OFF
(disable) for DRC (Dynamic
Range Control Processing).

Items Contents ● Image Processing Parameters
TAS *1 Select ON (enable) or OFF GP (Gradation Processing) Parameter
(disable) for TAS (Tomographic
Artifacts Suppression Slope of the gradation curve.
Characteristics
Processing). It adjusts the image contrast.
GA -4.0 to -0.1
FNC (optional) Select ON (enable) or OFF
(disable) for FNC (Frequency Value range 0.1 to 4.0 (except for 0.0, 1
Noise Control Processing). decimal place)
Shape of the gradation curve.
Yield the same result as
Characteristics
GT changing the γ-curve of X-ray
*1 DRC has priority over TAS in image processing. films.
This means that setting DRC to “ON” will Value range A to Z (26 types)
automatically set TAS to “OFF”.
Center density of gradation
curve slope.
Characteristics
Changes GA according to the
2. Change the parameter values ( I ). GC density specified here.
“● Image Processing Parameters“ 0.30 to 2.64 (2 decimal
Value range
places)
Parallel shift of the gradation
To restore standard parameters set as default (by curve.
Characteristics
FUJIFILM Corporation), click [Return to Default]. Change the display density of
GS the entire image.
Please note that this button is disabled when the
standard exposure menu set as default (by -1.44 to 1.44 (2 decimal
Value range
FUJIFILM Corporation) are not displayed in the places)
[Related Menu] field.
RP (Spatial Frequency Processing) Parameter
3. Complete the settings and click [OK] (J). Enhanced frequency band for
frequency processing.
→→The “Image Processing Parameter Setting” Characteristics The frequency band specified
window closes. RN here is subjected to
enhanced processing.
Value range 0 to 9 (10 types)
Shape of the enhanced curve
corresponding to the density
of the image.
Characteristics By changing this parameter,
RT the enhancement level can
be adjusted within a certain
density region.
Value range F, P to Z (12 types)
Enhancement of frequency
processing.
Change the enhancement
Characteristics
level of processing in
RE accordance with the specified
value.
14
0.0 to 9.9 (1 digit after
Value range decimal point)

DRC (Dynamic Range Control Processing) Parameter

Mask size of DR
compression.
Characteristics
DRN Set the processing region to
match DRT.
Value range 0 to 9 (10 sizes)

A DR compression filter type. Enhancement of frequency
Characteristics Set the density region for processing.
DRT processing. Change the enhancement
Characteristics
level of processing in
Value range A to T (20 types) MRE accordance with the
Enhancement of DR specified value.
compression filter
0.0 to 9.9 (1 decimal place)
processing. Value range
Characteristics Change the enhancement
DRE level of processing in This is a DR compression
accordance with the frequency type.
Characteristics
specified value. MDB Set the processing region to
match MDT.
TAS (Tomographic Artifacts Suppression A DR compression filter type.
Processing) Parameter Characteristics Set the density region for
MDT processing.
One-dimensional
unsharpness mask. Value range A to T (20 types)
Characteristics
ORN Sets the most effective size
Enhancement of DR
for the tomographic angle.
compression filter
Value range 0 to 9 (10 sizes) processing.
Characteristics Change the enhancement
Processing direction of MDE level of processing in
one-dimensional accordance with the
unsharpness mask. specified value.
Characteristics
Set in accordance with the
reading direction and orbital Value range 0.0 to 2.0 (1 decimal place)
ORD direction of tomography.
0: The orbit is at right angles
to the green line of the *1 The parameters for GP (GA, GT, GC, GS) are
Value range cassette. the MFP gradation processing parameters. For
1: The orbit is parallel to the characteristic, refer to the description for GP.
green line of the cassette.
Enhancement level of one-
FNC (Frequency Noise Control Processing)
dimensional unsharpness
Parameter (optional)
mask processing.
Change the enhancement Parameter used to determine
Characteristics
level of processing in the scale of the noise control
ORE accordance with the processing according to the
Characteristics
specified X-ray exposure dose. A is for
value. FFC general exposure and is for
linac graphy.
0.0 to 9.9 (1 decimal place)
Value range
MFP (Multi-objective Frequency Processing) Parameter used to determine

Parameter (optional) the scale of the noise control
Enhanced frequency band processing according to the
for frequency processing. Characteristics frequency component. The
14 MRB
Characteristics This f requency band is
subjected to enhanced
FNB closer to A, the more
suppression by low
processing. frequencies.
Value range A to Z (26 types) Value range A to Z (26 types)

Parameter used to determine
Shape of the enhanced
the scale of the noise control
curve corresponding to the Characteristics
FNT processing according to the
density of the image.
image density.
Characteristics By changing this parameter,
MRT the enhancement level can Value range A to Z (26 types)
be adjusted within a certain
Parameter used to determine
density region.
the scale of the noise control
Characteristics
Value range F, P to Z (12 types) FNE processing. Effectiveness of
the processing is changed.

■ Editing Exposure Menu ■ Deleting Exposure Menu
1. Select “Exposure Menu” in the “Exposure/
Study Menu” field (A) . • Please note that you cannot restore the standard
exposure menu set as default (by FUJIFILM
→→Currently registered exposure menus are
Corporation) once you delete it.
displayed.
• User-created exposure menus cannot be restored
either and need to be re-created.)
2. Select the exposure menu to be edited.
→→The color of the selected exposure menu reverses.
1. Select “Exposure Menu” in the “Exposure/
3. Click [Edit] (B). Study Menu” (A).
→→The “Exposure Menu Setting” window opens. →→Currently registered exposure menus are
displayed.
4. Perform settings.
Perform editing by the same procedure as 2. Select the exposure menu to be deleted.
creating a new exposure menu. →→The color of the selected exposure menu reverses.
“■ Creating New Exposure Menus”
3. Click [Delete] (B).
5. Complete the settings and click [OK] (G). →→The selected exposure menu is deleted.
Exposure menus registered in the “Display

Setting” (C) can be deleted.
“14.3.3 Setting the Display Menu Group”
14

14.3.2 Setting Study Menu
Creates a new study menu. Edits or deletes an existing study menu.
■ Operation Windows ■ Creating New Study Menu

● “Display Setting” 1. Select “Study Menu” in the “Exposure/Study
Menu” (A).
→→The selected exposure menus will be displayed in
(A) the Selected Menu list. Exposures will be made in
the order the menus were selected.
2. Click [New] (B).

→→The “Study Menu Setting” window opens.
(B) 3. Set items in the left side of the “Study Menu

Setting” (E).
(C) (D)
● “Study Menu Setting” Items

Study Menu
Contents
Enter the Study Menu Code
(E) Code *1 within 16 characters.
Study Menu Enter the Study Menu Name
Name *2 within 64 characters.
(F) Film Print Format Select Film Print Format
(optional). (optional).
Default Images are printed on film in the
format specified in each
exposure menu.
2 ON 1 The two images are printed on a
film in the 2 On 1 format.
Click [Film Print Position Setting]
(G)
and set the position of each
image printed on a film.
4 ON 1 The four images are printed on a
film in the 4 On 1 format.
Click [Film Print Position Setting]
and set the position of each
image printed on a film.
Film Print Set the positions of images
Position Setting printed on a film.
(optional) It is necessary if [2 On 1] or [4
On 1] is selected in the [Film
Print Format].
14 “●Film Print Position Setting”
Display Color Set a display color for the study
Setting menu name.
“●Display Color Setting”
*1 The characters * @ ` cannot be used.

However, the space can be used but a code which
consists of solely space is not allowed. A code
which has been assigned to other study menus
cannot be used either.
*2 The characters * @ cannot be used.
However, the space can be used but a menu name
which consists of solely space is not allowed.

4. Select the exposure menu to be registered in ● “Film Print Position Setting”
the “Exposure Menu List” and click .
If the [2 On 1] or [4 On 1] under [Film Print
→→The selected exposure menus will be displayed in Format] is selected, sets the position of each
the “Selected Menu list”. The order will be the image printed on a film.
exposures order.
To change the order of selected exposure menus,

select the respective exposure menu and click (H)
(UP) / (Down).

(I)
Print position of images on a film
Repeat this operation to select multiple exposure
menus (Up to 32 menus).
Buttons Functions
(Previous) Display the previous or next film

images.
(Next)
Clear the selected image from the

(Clear)
layout of images.
Cancel All Clear all current images.

After having cleared all images,
arrange the images one by one as
follows.
Exposed Order Arrange the images in the order of
exposure. Exposure order refers to
the order in which exposure menus
are displayed in the “Registered
Exposure Menu list”.
1. Select an exposure menu in the “Registered

Exposure Menu list” (H) and move it to a
desired position by dragging with the mouse.
Dragging it across [ (Previous) ] or [ (Next) ]

will display the film images of the previous or next
film.
14

→→The image is arranged, and “Registered” is
displayed next to the rearranged image in the
● Display Color Setting
“Registered Exposure Menu list” (H). 1. Select a display color for the study menu
Repeat the above procedure to arrange the name.
rest of the images. After having rearranged the
images, confirm that all exposure menus are
displayed as “Registered” in the “Registered
Exposure Menu list”.
2. Change the image position on the film if

necessary.
Select the image whose position is to be
changed and move it to the desired position by
dragging with the mouse.
→→The colors already selected as candidates for the
study menu name are displayed in this “Display
Color Setting” window.
• Restore the study menu name to its original color

or change to another color by repeating the above
procedure.
• The color selected in the “Display Color Setting”
window is applied to the display of study menu
name in the Study Menu Name field when clicking
[OK] in the “Study Menu Setting” window.
→→The selected image is exchanged with the image
currently displayed at the desired position.
2. Click [More Color...] to set a color not available
in the “Display Color Setting” window.
3. Remove the image if necessary.
Select the image to be cleared and move it to →→The “Color” window opens.
the by dragging with the mouse.
3. Select the desired color either in the “Basic
colors” or “Custom colors” pallet in the
“Color” window and then click [OK].
14
→→The selected image is removed from the layout.
In the “Color” window, you can create a unique color

The removed images needed to be selected again.
by adjusting a color selected from “Basic colors”. You
can add this newly created color to the “Custom
colors” pallet by clicking [Add to Custom Colors] to
make it selectable as a display color for the study
menu name.
→→The “Color” window and “Display Color Setting”

window close. An study menu name in the “Study
Menu Name” on the “Study Menu Setting” window
will be displayed by the selected color.

■ Editing Study Menus ■ Deleting Study Menus
1. Select a “Study Menu” in the “Exposure/
Study Menu” (A). • Please note that you cannot restore the standard
study menu set as default (by FUJIFILM
→→Currently registered study menus are displayed.
Corporation) once you delete it.
• User-created study menus cannot be restored
2. Select a study menu to be edited. either and need to be re-created.
→→The color of the selected study menu reverses.
3. Click [Edit] (B). 1. Select “Study Menu” in the “Exposure/Study

→→The “Study Menu Setting” window opens. Menu” (A).
→→ Currently registered study menus are displayed.
4. Edit settings.
Edit the settings of an existing study menu 2. Select the study menu to be deleted.
using the same procedure as creating a new →→The color of the selected study menu reverses.
study.
“Creating a new study menu“ 3. Click [Delete] (B).
→→The selected study menu is deleted.
Study menus registered in the “Display Setting” (C)

can be deleted.
“14.3.3 Setting the Display Menu Group”
14

14.3.3 Setting the Display Menu Group
Creates new display group names in a menu displayed in the normal operation window. Changes or
deletes existing names.
Also, changes the display position of menus registered in a display group or has them excluded from
display.
■ Operation Windows ■ Creating New Display Menu

Group
● “Menu Setting” (Creating)
(A)
Up to 16 display groups can be set.
When 16 display groups have already been set, no
further new display groups can be created. In this
case, you can delete old and unnecessary display
(B) groups to create new ones.
“●Deleting Display Groups”
● “Menu Setting”(Editing)
(C) 1. Click the tab to which no display group name
has been assigned (A).
→→A blank display group where no menu has been
registered is displayed.
(D) (E) 2. Click [Edit Display Group] (B).
● “Display Group Setting” 3. Assign a name to the display group (F).
• Enter the Display Group Name within 64

(F)
characters.
(G) • The following characters cannot be used:
*, @
4. Click [OK] (G).
Once an exposure menu or study menu has been

registered in the newly created display group, it will
be displayed in the normal operation window.
14 “■ Editing Display Menu Group”
→→The entered name is displayed on the “Display

Group” window.

■ Editing Display Group Menu ● Setting to Exclude Display Group from
Display
● Changing the Display Group Name 1. Click the tab of the display group to be excluded
from display (C) and click [Change Display] (E).
1. Click the tab of the display group name to be
changed (C). →→The color of the clicked tab reverses.
(The background turns black.)
→→The color of the clicked tab reverses.
2. Click [Edit Display Group] (D). ● Adding Display Group to Exposure/

Study Group
3. Change the display group name (F). Click 1. Click the tab of the Display Group in which
[OK] (G).
you want to register the menu.
• Enter the Display Group Name within 64
characters. 2. Display a page with a button that has not yet
• The following characters cannot be used: been used ( : Change Page button).
*, @
3. Select the menu name to be registered from
→→The entered name is displayed on the “Display the list in the Exposure/Study Menu column,
Group” window. and move it to the unused button by dragging
● Deleting Display Groups with the mouse. (The cursor turns into a
hand-shaped pointer.)
1. Click the tab of the display group to be

deleted (C).
2. Click [Edit Display Group] (D).

3. Click [Delete] (G).
4. A message to verify deletion displays.
Click [OK].
4. Release the mouse button at the desired position.
→→The selected display group is deleted.
● Changing the Display Group Position Dragging over the Change Page button allows you to
change the position across pages.
(Sequence)
Drag over the Change Page button.
1. Click the tab of the display group position to
be changed (C).
→→The color of the clicked tab reverses. 14
2. Move the tab to the desired position by
The page display changes.

dragging with the mouse. Drag to unused button.
(The cursor turns into a hand-shaped
pointer.)
3. Release the mouse button at the target

position.
→→The selected Display Group moves to the dragged
position . The menu is registered to the button.

● Deleting Exposure/Study Menu from ● Changing the Exposure/Study Menu
Display Group Position from Display Group
1. Click the tab (C) of the Display Group in 1. Select the menu whose position you want to
which the menu to be deleted is registered. change.
2. Select the menu whose position you want to
2. Display the page where the menu you want to change and drag it to the desired button. (The
delete is registered ( : Change Page cursor turns into a hand-shaped pointer.)
button).
3. Select the menu to be deleted and drag it to

the . (The cursor turns into a handshaped
pointer.)
3. Release the mouse button at the new

position.
• When moved to a button on which a menu is

already displayed, the positions of the latter menu
and the moved menu are exchanged.
A B B A
Move A to B Positions of A and B
position. are exchanged.
→→The selected menu is deleted.
• Dragging over the [Change Page] allows you to
change the position across pages.
Drag over the Change Page button
The page display changes
Drag to unused button
14
The menu is moved
→→The position of the selected Display Menu

changes.

14.4 Setting the Character String
Annotated on a Film
Film character string refers to the character strings annotated on a film.
The film character string is set in each Exposure Menu for CR studies.
“14.3.1 Setting the Exposure Menu”
This section describes how to newly register, change or delete alternative film marks displayed in the
“Exposure Menu Setting” window.
■ Operation Window ■ Registering/Editing Character

String Annotated on a Film
● “Film Mark Setting” Window
1. Click a button for which character string is to be
(A)
registered or edited (B).
(B) • New Registration
Click a button for which no character string
has been registered.
• Edit
(C) Click the button of the character string to be
edited.
(D) (E) (F)
To display a page other than the current page, click

the [Change Page] (A).
2. Enter up to 10 characters into the “Film

Character String input“ (C).
*, @ cannot be used.
3. Click [Register] (D).

→→The character string entered into the character
string input field is applied to the clicked button.
→→Then, registering, editing, deleting, and changing
button position can be performed.
“■Deleting Character String to be Annotated on
Film”
14
“■Changing Position of a Character String
Button”

■ Deleting Character String to be 3. Release the mouse button at the new
position.
Annotated on Film
→→The selected character string button moves to the
dragged position.
1. Click the button of the character string to be →→Then, registering, editing, deleting, and changing
deleted (B). button position can be performed.
“■Deleting the character string to be annotated
on film”
To display a page other than the current page, click
the [Change Page] button . “■Changing the position of a character string
button”
2. click [Delete] (E).

→→The character string of the clicked button is deleted. • When moved to position on which a character
string button is already displayed, the positions of
→→Then, registering, editing, deleting, and changing
the latter character string button and the moved
button position can be performed.
character string button are exchanged.
“■ Deleting the character string to be annotated
A B B A
on film”
Move A to B Positions of A and
“■ Changing the position of a character string position. B are exchanged.
button”
• Dragging over the [Change Page] button allows
■ Changing Position of a you to change the position across pages.

Drag over the Change Page button
Character String Button
1. Click the desired button.

Drag to unused button
→→The cursor turns into a hand-shaped pointer.
The page display changes
2. Move mouse to the desired button.
The film mark is moved
14 ■ Applying Settings to Film Mark

1. Click [OK] (F) after the settings complete.
→→The “Film Character String Setting“ window closes.

The character string entered into the character
string input field is applied to the clicked button.

14.5 Setting of Printing, Saving and
Transmitting Images
Sets the output destination and timing about the image printing, storage, transmission.
• Storing images to a storage disk
• Printing images on film (optional)
• Printing thumbnail images
• Transmitting images to a DICOM server (optional)
■ Operation Window ■ Setting the Output Destination

The destinations to be set are different from
● “Setting destination for image output” the unprocessed FCR images and the others.
Window
Destination
Option
(A)
Film Print
thumbnail images
Printing
DICOM Server
Storage Disk
(B)
Image Types
FCR image
○ ○ ○ ○
(Unprocessed)
Others ○ × ○ ×
(C) ○: Applicable ×: Not applicable
1. Select the image type to be set (A).

Selection Items
Items Contents
FCR image Select to set FCR image
(Unprocessed) (unprocessed)
Select to set images other than
Others
FCR image (unprocessed)
14

2. Click the desired destination (B) and set the ● Output Settings when Saving to Storage
output settings. Disks
Selection Items
Items Contents Both the unprocessed FCR image and the others
Disk Output to storage disk can be set.
“●Output Settings when Saving
to Storage Disks”
Printer Film Print (optional)
“●Output Settings of Film Print
(Optional)”
Thumbnail Print thumbnail images
Images
“●Output Settings of Thumbnail
Images”
1. Set the settings save to disk.
DICOM Transmit to DICOM Server (optional)
Transmission Selection Items
“●Output Settings when
Transmitting to DICOM Server Items Contents
(Optional)” Automatic image Put a check mark to
output *1 automatic save to disk
3. Click [OK] (C) after settings complete. Destination for

data transfer *2
Pre-specified destination
Timing of output *2 Save to disk when verified
Error is displayed when the Automatic image output

is not selected in any of “Disk”, “Printer”, or “DICOM
Transmission” windows. In this case, click [OK] and *1 If the check mark of “Automatic image output“ is
select the “Automatic image output” window in at removed, it can be done manually.
least one of these tabs, and then click [OK] (D) again Save from the “Main” window and “Study Utilities“.
and save the contents to output settings.
→→The “Output Destination Settings” window closes.
The settings of print, storage and transmission are
saved.
*2 The destination and the print timing cannot be
changed.
14

● Output Settings of Film Print (Optional) ● Output Settings of Thumbnail Images
Only the unprocessed FCR images can be set. Both the unprocessed FCR image and the others
can be set.
Image file
XXX.jpg, Patient information file
1. Set the settings of film print. XXX.bmp XXX.txt
Selection Items (The file format is set when

installing the software.)
Items Contents
Automatic image Put a check to automatically
output *1 film print
Destination for Select destination printer
data transfer
Timing of output.
1. Set the settings for printing thumbnail images.
Upon Automatically film print when
verification of study is verified Selection Items
a study Items Contents
Upon Automatically film print when Output Annotation * 1
Put a check mark to output
completion exposure is completed with annotation
of an
exposure:
Output after Put a check to automatically
Re-verified film print after re-verified *1 No matter the check mark is put or not, the marker
Output Annotation *2
Put a check to automatically will be saved.
film print with annotation added “Chapter 7 Image Storage from Each Window”
*1 If the check mark of “Automatic image output“ is

removed, it can be done manually.
Print from the “Main” window, “Image Viewer”, and
“Study Utilities“.
“Chapter 8 Image Print from Each Window”
*2 Save with the marker no matter the check is put or
not.
14

● Output Settings when Transmitting to
DICOM Server (Optional)
Only the unprocessed FCR images can be set.
1. Set the transmission to DICOM Server.

Selection Items
Items Contents
Automatic image Put a check mark to
output *1 automatically transmit to
DICOM server
Destination for Select destination
data transfer
Default Pixel Transmit the images with low
Count pixel density. This reduces
the size of the transmitted
image file.
Max Pixel Transmit the images with the
Count highest pixel count
Timing of output *2 Transmit the images to
DICOM server when the
study is verified
*1 If the check mark of “Automatic image output“ is

removed, it can be done manually.
Save from the “Main” window and “Study Utilities“.
14 *2 The output timing cannot be changed.


14.6 Auto-Determine Settings
Sets the auto-determine time period and the studies are determined automatically after exposure.
The study status changes automatically from “Completed” to “Verified”.
• To automatically verify the study, select the auto verify user using the “Client Utilities”.
If you do not select it, the study will not be verified automatically.
User setting of auto-determine: “13.5.1 User Information Maintenance”
• While the study is shown on the “Image Viewer”, the study is not verified automatically even if automatic
verification of study is specified.
The study is not verified automatically while the information about the study whose status is “Finish Exposure” is
being modified. When display on the “Image Viewer” is closed or the study information is being modified, the study
will be verified automatically after lapse of the predetermined time.

Study is verified Study is verified after a period of
● “Automatic verification of a study” after the set time time after exposure.
followed by
exposure (B)
Time required Set from 5 to 720 minutes.
(A) for automatic The study will be automatically
(B) verification of a verified within a period
study (C) equivalent to the entered time
up to double that time at
maximum. *3
(C)
*1 If you deselected the Automatically verifying a

study check box, you can verify the study manually
(D) from the “Image Viewer” window or “Study List”
window.
“5.7 Saving/Verifying/Suspending Images”
■ Set the Auto-Determine Time

“12.4 ■Completing and Verifying Studies”
*2 Studies unable to be verified upon exposure
completion will be verified after the specified time
Period has elapsed.
*3 If 30 is specified for the “Time required for
1. Set the auto-determine time period. automatic verification of a study”, the study will be
automatically verified in 30 minutes to 1 hour after
Selection Items checking
Items Contents 14
Automatically Put a check mark to 2. Click [OK] (D).
verifying a study*1 automatically verify after

→→The automatic verify setting is saved and the
(A) exposure is completed.
“Automatic Verify Setting” window closes.
Completion of Verification and completion are
an exposure done at the same time.
and its
verification take
place
simultaneously
(B)* 2

T
14.7 Image Deletion Settings
The images which for viewing purpose will be deleted after a period of time.
Changes the period of time of temporary storage of FCR PRIMA Console.
■ Operation Window ■ Changing the Time Period for

Data Storage
● “Settings to Delete Images”
1. Select Time period for data storage (A).
The storage period can be set to 0.5 to 30 days.

(A)
2. Click [OK] (B).

→→The changed storage period is saved, and the
“Image Deletion Setting” window closes.
(B)
14

14.8 Backup Notification Settings
If not backs up data for a period of time, a backup notification message opens when FCR PRIMA
Console starts up.
■ Operation Window ■ Setting Backup Notification

● “Settings for issuing a backup notification” 1. Set the backup notification message.
Selection Items
Items Contents
(A) lssuing a backup To disable the backup prompt,
(B) notification (A) deselect the Issuing a backup
notification check box
Time interval The interval can be set to 1 to
between 90 days
notifications.(B)
(C)
*1 Remove check that the backup message does not

displays.
Perform backup periodically.
2. Click [OK] (C).

→→The backup notification setting is saved, and the
“Settings for issuing a backup notification” window
closes.
14

14.9 Automatically Startup Settings
Sets the client applications so that it automatically starts after startup of the server applications.
■ Operation Window ■ Client Application Startup

Settings
● “Setting startup of the client’s
application”
1. Put a check mark to “Automatic Startup”
check box to activate the client application to
automatic startup after the server application
(A) starts up.
The client application does not start automatically if

remove the check.
(B)
To start up, double-click the icon in desktop.
2. Click [OK] (B).

→→Automatic startup of the Client Application is
saved, and the “Setting startup of the client’s
application” window closes.
14

14.10 Prefix Display Settings
Adds a prefix to the patient’s name to be displayed on the FCR PRIMA Console.
■ Operation Window ■ Setting Patient Prefix

● “Setting a title of respect prefixed to a 1. Set patient prefix.
patient name”
Items Contents
Displaying a title Put a check mark to display
(A) of respect of a prefix to patient name
patient (A)
(B) A title of respect Enter up to 4 characters
of a patient to be
displayed (B)
(C) 2. Click [OK] (C).

→→The prefix setting is saved, and the “Setting a title
of respect prefixed to patient a name” window
closes.
14

14.11 Setting Image Incidental Information
Display Contents
Even though the contents in the “Setting to Display Image-incidental info” window has changed, it does not have
any influence on “Image Viewer” window.
The display of image attribute information can be set in the “Image Viewer” window.
“11.2.3 ■Setting the Attribute Information”
14

14.12 Loading Patient Information
Creates patient information files to be read with Notepad or Microsoft Excel and loads it into FCR
PRIMA Console.
■ Patient Information Input Sex

Format Usable Male : M or m
characters Female : F or f
Uses the following format to create a file for
If unknown, etc. : O or o
importing patient information.
Patient ID * If a different character or no character at all was
entered for Sex, O (Other) will be registered.
Number of Up to 64
characters
* Depending on the setting made Date of birth
when installing the software, the Input format i yyyy.MON.dd (1972.JUL.15)
missing number of characters in the (Ex.)
Patient ID will be filled with zeros. ii yyyy.mm.dd (1972.07.15)
For example, if 10 characters were iii MON.dd.yyyy (JUL.15.1972)
specified for the Patient ID and 1 is iv mm.dd.yyyy (07.15.1972)
entered, the number is registered as v dd.MON.yyyy (15.JUL.1972)
0000000001.
vi dd.mm.yyyy (15.07.1972)
Usable All characters except:
characters “, #, %, &, ‘, +, ?, \, /, *, @, <, * If the entered is invalid, date of birth will be
registered as a blank.
The space can be used, but a patient
ID which consists of solely space is
not allowed.
* Make sure to enter the Patient ID.

* If the Patient ID format does not conform to the
above, the patient information in that row will not
be registered.
Patient information name

Number of Up to 64 characters
characters
Usable All characters except:

characters *, @
* If the patient information name format does not

conform to the above, the patient information in
that row will not be registered.
Patient name
Number of
characters
Up to 64
14
Usable All characters
characters
* If the patient name format does not follow the

above rule, the patient information in that row will
not be registered.

■ Creating a File of Patient 3. Save the file.
1) Select [File] (F) – [Save As...] (A) from the
Information to Import
menu bar.
Creates an import file with an editor such as
Notepad or Microsoft Excel to import patient
information.
● Creating with an Editor such as Notepad

Microsoft Notepad is used in this example.
→→The “Save As” window opens.

1. Start the editor.
2) Specify the storage folder of the file in the
2. Enter patient information. Save in.
Enter patient information in the format shown 3) For [Save as] type, select [All].
below. 4) Enter the extension .csv after the file
ID No . <Tab> Patient Information Name <Tab> Patient Name<Tab>Sex<Tab>Date of Birth <Enter> name. (Example: Patient.csv)
ID No . <Tab> Patient Information Name <Tab> Patient Name<Tab>Sex<Tab>Date of Birth<Enter> 5) Click [Save].
ID No . <Tab> Patient Information Name <Tab> Patient Name<Tab>Sex<Tab>Date of Birth <Enter>
••••
• Make sure to enter the Patient ID. If the Patient ID

is not entered, the patient information in that row
will not be registered.
• If the wrong input format is used, the patient
information in that row will not be registered.
“■Patient Information Input Format”
• Press the Tab key on the keyboard each time →→The file is saved.
between Patient ID, Patient Information Name,
Patient Name, Sex and Date of Birth. A space
entered with the Space key on the keyboard will
cause an error when importing.
• <Tab> and <Enter> refer respectively to the Tab

and Enter key on the keyboard.
• After Date of Birth, press the Enter key to insert a
line feed. Enter the patient information for 1
individual in 1 line.
• To leave some items blank, press the Tab key on
the keyboard repeatedly.
14 Example: Leaving Patient Name blank
1234567890<Tab>Brown
James<Tab><Tab>M<Tab>20020705

● Creating with Microsoft Excel 3. Save the file.
1) Select [File] (F) – [Save As...] (A) from the
1. Start Microsoft Excel. menu bar.
2. Enter patient information.

Input Items
1 2 3 4 5
1 Patient Patient Patient Sex Date of
ID information name birth
name
2 Patient Patient Patient Sex Date of
ID information name birth
→→The “Save As” window opens.
name
3 Patient Patient Patient Sex Date of 2) Specify the storage folder of the file in the
ID information name birth Save in.
name 3) For [Save as] type, select [Text] (Tab
4 ......... delimited) (*.txt).
4) Enter the extension .txt after the file
name. (Example: Patient.txt)
5) Click [Save].
• Make sure to enter the Patient ID. If the Patient ID

is not entered, the patient information in that row
will not be registered.
• If the wrong input format is used, the patient
information in that row will not be registered. There are cases that the following messages are
“■Patient Information Input Format” displayed in accordance with the PCs you use.
Check the contents and perform the following
operations.
• Enter the patient information for one individual in • If the following message displays,
one line. The selected file type does not support
• To leave some items blank, leave the workbooks that contain multiple sheets.
corresponding cell blank.
1) Click [OK].
Example: Leaving “Patient Name” blank
• If the following message displays,
14
1234567890 Taro M 1972.07.15
…txt may contain features that are not
compatible with Text (Tab delimited). Do you

want to keep the workbook in this format?
1) Click [Yes] (Y).
→The created file saves.

4. Change the extension of the stored file name
to .csv. (Example: Change Patient.txt to
■ Importing Patient Information
Patient.csv.) Uses an import file to import patient
information to the FCR PRIMA Console
database.
• There are cases that the following message is
displayed in accordance with the PCs you use.
Check the contents and perform the following • To import patient information, you must first create
operations. an import file.
If the following message displays, ”Creating a File of Patient information to Import”
If you change a file name extension, the file may • If the FCR PRIMA Console database already
become unusable. Are you sure you want to contains patient information under the same
change it? Patient ID, that information will be overwritten.
1) Click [Yes].
→The file name extension is changed. 1. Click [Patient Database Import] (A) in the
• If the file name is displayed without extension, the “Main Menu” window.
file name cannot be changed. In this case,
proceed as follows to change the file name.
1) Select [Organize] (T) – [Folder and Search
Options] (O) on the menu bar.
(A)
→The “Folder Options” window opens. 2. Select a patient information import file and
2) Click “View” tab. then click [Open].
3) Remove the “Hide extensions for known file
types” check box in the Advanced settings list.
4) Click [Apply] (A).
14 →→A message displays. When import of patient

information is completed, the message disappears.

14.13 Media Consistency Check
When the storage disk is full, carries out a consistency check and then copies the disk.
For example, whether the information on the storage disk has been altered.
“■ Copying a Disk”.
■ Operation Windows ■ Media Consistency Check

● “Consistency Check (Select Drive)”
Insert the disk for consistency check into the disk
drive beforehand.
1. Select the drive in which a storage disk

(A) inserted (A).
2. Click [OK] (B).

→→The consistency check starts as soon as the
storage disk is detected.
The “Consistency check (Checking)” window
(B)
opens for checking the drive name, disk name and
● “Consistency Check (Checking)”

the progress of the consistency check.
→→When the consistency check is completed, the
“Consistency check (Check result)” window opens.
3. Click [Data stored on a file] (C) and the result

is saved.
→→The “Save as” window opens.
Select a save destination and click [Save]. The
result file of consistency check
(MediaValidationResult.csv) is saved.
You can check the following items for each
image in the consistency check result file.
● “Consistency check (Check result)” Display Items

Items Contents
Window
Result The result of the consistency check
is displayed. *1
• OK: The image information has
not been altered.
• NG: The image information has
been altered. 14
• - : Check has failed.
PatientID ID No. of the image.
PatientName Patient name of image.
StudyDate Date when the study was

conduced.
(C) (D)
Instance Registration sequence of exposure
Number menu.
MenuName Name of exposure menu.

Items Contents ■ Result and Remedy
Correction_ User who conducted the study or The messages given on the next page will
Person corrected the study information.
open depending on the result of the check.
Upd_Datetime Time and date when the study Read the message and take the necessary
information was last updated. action.
Correction_ Device on which the study was
Message Disk is normal.
Server conducted or the study information
was corrected. Action Disk consistency verified.
No action required.
Record_ Indicate whether the images on the
In-use_Flag disk are active/inactive.
• Active : Valid image on the disk. Message The drive specified for integrity check is
• Inactive : Invalid image on the not connected or does not exist.
disk.
Action Make the following checks, and then
Version_ Version number of image display repeat the operation.
Number information and patient information. • Make sure the drive is ON.
• Make sure the drive is connected to
FileName Name of image file.*2
the FCR PRIMA Console main unit.
DetailInfo Explanation of consistency check If the same message displays after
result. repeating the operation, take the
• Normal : following actions.
Normal 1) Perform “Restore Disk” referring to
• The DICOM file is missing. : “13.8 ■Restoring Disks after
Data was deleted.
Mismatch Occurred”.
• The history file is missing. :
2) Repeat disk consistency check.
Consistency check information
file was deleted.
• Inconsistency between DICOM Message Disk for integrity check is not loaded.
file and history file. :
Data consistency not verified. Action Make the following checks, and then
• Not able to read the data. : repeat the operation.
Data reading failed. • Make sure the storage disk is
inserted into the drive.
Message Integrity of management information

*1 The message “Consistency of management not verified.
information not verified” means that only
Action Integrity of management information on
management information is not consistent, but the
image storage disk not verified. (Image
image information is consistent. information is normal.)
Therefore, the result is indicated by OK.
Proceed as follows.
*2 Relative path from disk drive root path. 1) Start the “Client Utilities” and
perform “Restore Disk”.
“13.8 ■Restoring Disks after
Mismatch Occurred”
2) Repeat disk consistency check.
14

Message Integrity of image information not
verified
Action Integrity of image information on image

storage disk not verified. (Management
information is normal.)
1) Save the result of consistency
check.
Consistency Check: “■Disk
Consistency Check”
2) Store images whose Result is NG in
the integrity check result file again to
a new disk.
For storing images, see “7.3
Saving to Storage Disks”
Message Integrity of management and image

information not verified.
Action Integrity of management and image

information on image storage disk not
verified.
Proceed as follows.
1) Restore Disk
2) Repeat disk integrity check.
Message Integrity check was aborted in response

to [Cancel].
Action This message is displayed when

[Cancel] is clicked in the “Consistency
check-Check result” window.
To close the “Consistency check result”
window, click [Finish].
Message Integrity check ended abnormally.

Check the drive used for integrity check
or check the disk.
Action Make the following checks, and then

repeat the operation.
• Make sure the drive is ON.
• Make sure the drive is connected to
the FCR PRIMA Console main unit.
• Make sure the storage disk is
inserted into the drive. 14
If the same message displays after
repeating the operation, take the
following action.
1) Restore Disk
2) Repeat disk integrity check.

14.14 History Information Consistency Check
Checks that the history of processes such as FCR PRIMA Console login/logoff, access to studies,
image storing or printing, and backup or restoring, has not been altered.
■ Operation Window ■ History Information

Consistency Check
● “History-Info Consistency Check” Window
1. After verifying the history (A), click [OK] (B).
→→The “History-Info Consistency Check” window
closes.
(A)
(B)
14

14.15 Automatically Logoff
Sets the FCR PRIMA Console whether to automatically log off after a period of time.
■ Operation Window ■ Setting Automatic Logoff

● “Automatic logoff setting” 1. Set Time-to-automatic logoff (A).
Selection Items
Items Contents
(A) Automatically log Check FCR PRIMA Console if
off automatically logged off after a
period of time.
Time-to-automatic Set a time between 1 to 30
logoff minutes.
(B)
2. Click [OK] (B).
→→The automatic logoff setting is saved, and the
“Automatic Logoff Setting” window closes.
14

14.16 Adding/Deleting User Marker
Adds or deletes user marker used in image annotation.
■ Operation Windows ■ Registering User’s Markers

● “Add or Remove Marker” Window 1. Click [Add Marker] (A).
(A)
(B) 2. Select the marker to register and click [Open].
(C)
(D)
● “Confirmation” Dialog →→The registered marker displays on the “Add or

Remove Marker” dialog.
3. Click [OK] (C).

→→The “Add or Remove Marker” dialog closes.
■ Removing User’s Markers

(E)
1. Select the marker (D) to remove.
Use to switching pages.
2. Click [Remove Marker] (B).

3. Click [OK] (E).

4. Click [OK] (C).
14 →→The “Add or Remove Marker” dialog closes.

14.17 Preset Setting
Preset settings can be assigned to the keypad keys (1 to 9).
■ Operation Window ■ Assigning Preset

● “Preset Setting” 1. Select the position of the key (A) to which
(A) (B) preset settings are to be assigned and the
Preset Name (B).
2. Click [OK] (C).

→→The preset settings are set and the “Preset
Setting” window closes.
(C)
14

14

Chapter 15
Troubleshooting
15.1 PC does Not Start.............................................................. 15-2
15.2 PC is Inoperative................................................................ 15-3
15.3 PC does Not Shut down.................................................... 15-4
15.4 Event Indicator is Blinking................................................ 15-5
15.5 Error Message is Displayed.............................................. 15-6
15.6 Image is Streaked.............................................................. 15-7

when Trying to Operate the Screen..................................15-8
15.8 Window Disappears........................................................... 15-9
15.9 Disk cannot be Removed................................................ 15-10
15.10 Toolbar is Not Displayed on “Image Viewer”................ 15-11
15.11 Study was Scheduled or Registered

but Patient List is Unchanged.........................................15-12
15.12 Unintended Studies Appear on Patient List.................. 15-13
15.13 Unable to Print or Save Images from “Image Viewer”... 15-14
15.14 The “Webpage unavailable while offline” Dialog is 15

Appeared..........................................................................15-15
Troubleshooting

15.1 PC does Not Start
If the PC does not start, check the following:
Is the power cord disconnected? Check that the power cord is firmly connected to the electrical outlet.
Otherwise, your PC may not start. In such cases, turn off the main
power switch, firmly insert the power cord in the outlet, and turn on
the power one more time.
When the main power is supplied, the POWER lamp illuminates in

green.
Is the monitor switch turned If the monitor switch is not turned ON, nothing will be displayed on
ON? the screen even if the PC power switch is turned ON. Turn ON the
monitor switch.
When the monitor power is supplied, the monitor lamp illuminates

in blue.
15
Troubleshooting

15.2 PC is Inoperative
If the PC is inoperative, check the following:
Is the PC frozen? If nothing happens when you press a key or move the mouse, your
PC is frozen. Take the following actions:
1) Press the Delete key while holding down Ctrl and Alt keys to
display the “Windows Task Manager”. Click the “Application” tab
to display a list of currently running applications. If the Status
column of the displayed application list shows “No response”,
select that application and click [Terminate task]. Restart your PC
because Windows may be unstable.
If the mouse is disabled, use the arrow keys, Tab key and Enter
key.
2) If there is no response after performing Step (1) or if your PC

freezes, force shutdown your PC by pressing the Delete key
several times again while holding down Ctrl and Alt keys. Then
restart the PC.
3) If there is no response after performing Step (2), hold down the
PC power button for few seconds to turn OFF the power.
4) If the power still does not turn off, pull out the power cord to turn
OFF the power
All current data is lost when you force shutdown your PC.
If this message displays, there is no recovery method. This

message is not caused by any operational error by the user. It is
displayed because the program could not continue normal
operation.
Force shutdown according to the message displayed in the window.
All current data are lost when you force shutdown your PC.
15
Troubleshooting

15.3 PC does Not Shut down
If the PC does not shut down, check the following:
Is there a cassette in the Image FCR PRIMA Console cannot quit if there is a cassette remaining in
Reader connected to the FCR the Image Reader.
PRIMA Console? Remove the cassette from the Image Reader and quit FCR PRIMA
Console.
Is the PC frozen and If the PC cannot be shutdown, keep pressing the power button for at
inoperative when you try to least 4 seconds. The power will turn off.
shutdown? If the power still does not turn off, pull out the power cord to turn
OFF the power.
If the PC could not shutdown by normal shutdown procedure,

SCANDISK will start automatically next time you turn on the PC.
This will take some time, but normal screen will eventually appear if
there is no problem.
15
Troubleshooting

15.4 Event Indicator is Blinking
If the event indicator is blinking, check the following:
Is the event indicator blinking? If the event indicator is blinking, there is an error.
Check the cause of error as follows and take the appropriate action:
1) Click the indicator of Event.
Indicator of Event
The “Event” window appears.
2) Click the event to be checked and click [Details].
The “Error Detail” window opens.
3) Check the “Detailed Information” and take appropriate action.

“10.7 Verifying Events (Errors, Warnings or Information)”
15
Troubleshooting

15.5 Error Message is Displayed
When an error message displays in the FCR PRIMA Console window, check the contents and take the
appropriate action. Should you encounter any trouble you cannot handle, contact our official dealer.
An example of an error message displayed on the “Warning” dialog and a description of each display
area are given below:
Error message displayed in the “Warning” dialog. (Example 1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
Error message displayed in the “Warning” dialog. (Example 2)
(1)
(2)
(3)
Display Items
Items Contents
(1) Title Display Field The title of an error is displayed.
(2) Message Display Field Displays an error code and a message prompting the user to perform an
operation.
Selection menu is displayed. Select the button of the operation to be performed in

(3) Selection-menu Display
response to the message.
15
Troubleshooting

15.6 Image is Streaked
This section describes the action to take when a streak appears on an image scanned with the Image
Reader.
If the scanner or IP is dirty, a streak may appear as shown below.
Streak
Note that the streak on this example is

enhanced for the sake of clarity.
■ Remedial Action
If a streak appears on the image, clean the scanner and IP.
• Scanner cleaning
Clean the scanner with the “Utilities”.
Scanner Cleaning: ”10.2 Verifying the Status of Image Reader and Cleaning Procedures”
• Remove dirt from the surface of the IP and then wipe with a dry cloth.
If the dirt cannot be removed by dry wiping, wipe the surface using a small amount of dehydrated
ethanol.
The IP should be dried completely before using.
CAUTION
• Be very careful not to damage IPs.
• Never use plastic erasers and other solvents.
• Do not scratch IP surfaces with finger nails.
• Do not use excessive dehydrated ethanol or clean the IP too frequently, otherwise the IP’s
edges may become yellow.
IP cleaning: “Image Reader Operation Manual”.

15
Troubleshooting

when Trying to Operate the Screen
If the “Auto Logoff Setting” of the “User Utilities” is set to “Automatically log off”, FCR PRIMA Console
will log off automatically when it is not used for a predefined period.
A message displays if you try to operate the FCR PRIMA Console after it is logged off automatically.
In such cases, perform the following:
Automatic Logoff: “14.15 Automatically Logoff”
The following message displays Click [OK] to display the “Login” window and log in again.
when you try to operate the FCR
PRIMA Console after it is logged Log in Procedure: “2.5.1 Starting up FCR PRIMA Console”
off automatically.
Not logged on
○Log in and then re-execute.
*Contact our official dealer if the same
symptom recurs even after operation has
been retried.
15
Troubleshooting

15.8 Window Disappears
While operating FCR PRIMA Console, you may accidentally click [X] at the right side of the title bar or a
window may be hidden behind the active window.
In such cases, perform the following:
Did you click [X] on the title bar If you accidentally closed the client application, double-click the
and close the window? client application (FCR Web) icon to start it once more.
“2.5.1 ■Starting up the Client Application”
Is the window hidden behind Window hidden behind another window is displayed minimized on
another window? the taskbar. (Example: ).
Click (Example: )on the taskbar to redisplay the
window.
15
Troubleshooting

15.9 Disk cannot be Removed
Perform the following when the disk cannot be removed:
Did you try to remove the disk On the PC’s control drive, be sure to eject the disk from FCR PRIMA
by pressing the EJECT button Console because the eject button is locked while FCR PRIMA
on disk drive? Console is in operation.
If you use an application other than the FCR PRIMA Console to
eject the disk, the PC may freeze or the disk may become unusable.
Remove Disks: “2.8 ■Ejecting Disk”
Handling Disks: “2.7 Before Using Disks”
15
Troubleshooting

15.10 Toolbar is Not Displayed on “Image
Viewer”
Perform the following if the toolbar disappeared because you changed the “Display Settings” on the
toolbar when operating the “Image Viewer”.
Did you delete the list of “Tab”, Display the “Display Settings” window as shown below and set the
“Group”, and “Tool button” toolbar to display.
displayed in the “Settings for 1) Select “Customize” - “Tool bar” in the “Image Viewer” window,
viewer tool bar”? and the “Set viewer tool bar” window opens.
2) Set the tabs, groups, and tool buttons displayed in the toolbar.
3) Click[OK].
Select “Other” - “Return to the standard settings” to return the

toolbar to the initial condition.
“11.2.5 Display Settings of Toolbar”
15
Troubleshooting

15.11 Study was Scheduled or Registered
but Patient List is Unchanged
Perform the following if the study status on the patient list remains unchanged after scheduling or
registration of study, modification of the study menu, or verification of image processing on “Image
Viewer”.
The display status of the patient Click in the patient list, and update the patient list to the
list may not change immediately latest status.
after scheduling or registration
of study, modification of study
menu, or image processing on
the “Image Viewer”.
15
Troubleshooting

15.12 Unintended Studies Appear on
Patient List
Perform the following if studies appeared on the patient list as a search result is unintended.
Is the search query for patient Check the search query display column for patient list.
list selected properly?
Search study: “4.2 Searching for Patients”
15
Troubleshooting

15.13 Unable to Print or Save Images from
“Image Viewer”
Perform the following if you cannot print, save, or transmit images displayed on the “Image Viewer”.
Are there images to be printed Please register images into “Image cart” before performing printing
or saved registered in the or saving.
“Image Cart” of the “Image
“7.2.2 Starting from the “Image Viewer””
Viewer” window?
“8.2.2 Starting from the “Image Viewer””
15
Troubleshooting

15.14 The “Webpage unavailable while
offline” Dialog is Appeared
Perform the following when “Webpage unavailable while offline” dialog is appeared.
“Webpage unavailable while offline” dialog may be appeared.
■ Actions
• When “Webpage unavailable while offline” dialog is appeared
Check that the LAN cable is firmly connect to the PC and then click [Connect].
• When [Stay Offline] is clicked on “Webpage unavailable while offline” dialog appeared
Close all FCR PRIMA Console windows and select [Start] - [Programs] - [Internet Explorer] to restart
Internet Explorer. Select and uncheck [File] - [Work Offline] from Internet Explorer and then restart
FCR PRIMA Console.
Activate FCR PRIMA Console: “2.5.1 Starting up FCR PRIMA Console”
15
Troubleshooting

15
Troubleshooting

Chapter 16
Daily Inspection and
Maintenance
16.1 Daily Inspections and Maintenances............................... 16-2
16.2 Backing up Information of Patient, Setting, Log,

and Report..........................................................................16-3
16.3 Maintenance Record Sheet............................................... 16-9
16.4 Maintenance and Inspection...........................................16-10
Daily Inspection and Maintenance
16

16.1 Daily Inspections and Maintenances
To maintain the system components in good condition, performs the daily inspections and
maintenances.
As for the daily inspections, make sure that the system starts up normally and communicates properly
with devices connected to the system. Be sure to clean the monitor daily.
Also, back up the patient information and other data at least once a week.
Use the Maintenance Record when performing daily inspections and maintenances.
Fill in the following items in the Maintenance Record:
• Check : Fill in the inspection date and result.
• Cleaning : Fill in the date the monitor was cleaned.
• Backup : Fill in the date the patient information and other data was backed up.
Use the backup disk or USB flash drive for backup.

When performing backup, be sure to check that no storage disk is inserted in the drive.
16

16.2 Backing up Information of Patient,
Setting, Log, and Report
Backs up the data on the PC at least once a week for restoration in case of a server failure.
If the server fails, uses the backup data for restoration.
Uses the PC’s “Backup Utilities” described below for backup and restoration.
■ Operation Windows ● “Select folder” Window (when Backing

up and Collecting Maintenance Logs)
● “Select Server Application Behavior” Dialog
(L)
(A)
(N)
(B)
(M)
● “User authentication” Window ● “Select folder” Window (when Restoring)

(C)
(O)
(D)
(E)
(Q)
● “Main Menu” Window (P)
(F)
● “Browse For Folder” Window
(G)
(H)
(R)

(I)
● “Select Information for Backup” Window

(S)
(J)
16
(K)

● “Restore” Window ■ Starting up the “Backup Utilities”
When you attempt to start the “Backup Utilities”, the
FCR PRIMA Console closes. Check that all of the
windows which started from FCR PRIMA Console
(T) are closed before starting the “Backup Utilities”.
Also check that no one else is using FCR PRIMA
Console.
1. Double-click the server application icon

→→The “Select Server Application Behavior” window
(U)
opens.
● “Collecting Logs for Maintenance 2. Click [Backup Utility] (A) and click [OK] (B).
Purpose” Window
The “Backup Utilities” can be started up from back up

notification message. When you click [OK] on the
backup notification message, the “User authentication”
window opens. The backup notification message can
be set in the “User Utilities”.
“14.8 Backup Notification Settings”
→→A message is displayed and then the “User

authentication“ window opens.
(V)
3. Select the login user name in (C).
(W)
4. Enter the password in (D) and click [OK] (E).
You can continue using FCR PRIMA Console.

“2.5 Starting up and Exiting”
→→When the user is authorized, the “Main Menu”

window opens.
16

■ Backing up
To delete the log information after backup completes,
The following information can be backed up.
put a check mark to “Delete log information after
• Patient information
backup completes”. Log information excluding the IP
• Settings use count is deleted after backup completes.
• Log information
• Report information
Insert a DVD or USB flash drive for backing up 3. Click [Start] (K).
into the drive. →→The “Select folder” window opens.
Display Items
Items Contents
When backing up to a disk:
• Use an unformatted disk or disk containing only Select folder*1*2 Backup destination folder
backup data created according to the procedure
Necessary disk space/ The amount of space
described here.
free space*3 necessary for backup and
FUJIFILM Corporation shall not be responsible for the free space in the
data damage caused by using a disk containing backup destination
data other than backup data. specified at Select folder
Control the disk after backup as backup media. Do field
not store data other than backup data created by
any method other than that described in this
subsection.
• When backing up to a disk, remove the disk by *1 To change the backup destination, click [Browse]
operation from the indicator. (L). When the “Browse For Folder” window opens,
select a folder (R) and then click [OK] (S).
“2.8 Setting up Disks” To backup USB memory, connect the USB memory
to PC and select the USB memory as backup
destination.
1. Click [Backup] (G) in the “Main Menu” *2 The initially displayed folder is a folder in the
window.
connected disk with the name in the form
→→The “Select Information for Backup” window date+time.
opens. For example, if today’s date and time is September
13, 2005 6:50:05, the folder name appear as
2. Put check marks to backup information (J). 20050913185005.
*3 If there is not enough free space in the disk,
Selection Items
replace the disk.
Items Contents
Patient Patient information registered in FCR 4. Check the “Selected folder” (M) and then
information PRIMA Console main unit (PatientData.
click [OK] (N).
cab)
→→A message “Insert the backup disk into the target
Setting Exposure menu settings and image
drive” is displayed.
information processing parameters (MenuData.cab)
System settings and “User Utilities” 5. Insert a disk (or USB flash drive) in the drive
settings (SystemData.cab)
and click [OK].
FCR PRIMA Console user settings
(UserData.cab)
Explanation for the report If the save destination disk does not have sufficient
(ExplanationData.cab) free space, a message is displayed. Click [OK] and
stop backup. Insert a disk with sufficient free space
Setting for the report
(ReportDataSet.cab)
and click [OK] on the “Select Folder” window once 16
more.
Log FCR PRIMA Console log information
information (LogData.cab) →→When backup completes, a message is displayed.
Report Report information along with the image
information (ReportData.cab)

6. Click [OK]. ■ Restoring
→→Returns to “Main Menu” window.
In this case, the patient information and system setting

When backup completes, the BackupInfo.ini file
information can be restored to the point of backup, but
containing the backup status is saved.
changes made after backup are not restored.
BackupInfo.ini file contains the FCR PRIMA Console
version, backup date and time, application name,
backed up file name, and backed up file version. 1. Insert the backup disk (or USB flash drive) to
be used for restoration in the drive.
7. Remove the disk (or USB flash drive) 2. Click [Restore] (G) in the “Main Menu”
containing the backup data.
window.
→→The “Select Folder” window opens.
• Leaving the disk in the drive may result in an error.
Remember to record the backup date and other 3. Click [Browse] (O).
necessary information on the label of the disk (or →→The “Browse For Folder” window opens.
USB flash drive).
• When backup completes, replace with storage disk. 4. Select a folder in the backup disk (R) and
“2.8 Setting up Disks” click [OK] (S).
→→The “Browse For Folder” window opens.
5. Check the selected folder (P) and then click

[OK] (Q).
→→The “Restore” window opens.
6. Select the restore information (T).

Selection Items
Items Contents
Patient Information Restores the patient

information registered in FCR
PRIMA Console main unit
Report Restores the report

Menu Setting Restores the exposure menu

information settings and image
processing parameters
System configuration Restores the system settings

Information and “User Utilities” settings
User Information Restores FCR PRIMA

Console user settings
Explanatory Restores print output

Information description
Report setting Restores the report setting

16
• If the selected folder does not contain the backup
file, “No backup available” is displayed. This item
cannot be restored.
• Backup Information at the bottom of the window
can be used to check the backup date and FCR
PRIMA Console version at the time of backup.

7. Click [Start] (U). ■ Collecting Maintenance Log
In case a machine failure occurs, our official
If no backup file exists, a message is displayed. dealer may ask you to collect the log for
Click [OK] and repeat folder selection. maintenance.
→→When the restoration completes, a message is

displayed. • Perform this operation only when requested by our
official dealer.
8. Click [OK]. • When you collect the log for maintenance, a partial
→→Returns to the “Main Menu” window. log file (Study.txt) containing only the log data
related to personal information is created on the
desktop, allowing you to check whether personal
9. Remove the disk (or USB flash drive) used for information has been deleted by verifying its
restoration.
content. After completion of the check, be sure to
delete the Study.txt file.
• If the log is to be collected by our official dealer,
Leaving the disk in the drive may result in an error. you do not need to perform log collection. In this
case, log will be collected after obtaining your
agreement.
1. Click [Collecting logs for maintenance

purpose] in the “Main Menu” window.
→→The “Collecting Logs for Maintenance Purpose”
window opens.
2. Select the collection method.
Select the [Delete personal information off of the

logs] to delete patient name, patient date of birth,
and user name when saving log.
3. Click [Start].
→→The “Select Folder” window opens.
Display Items

Items Contents
Select folder*1*2 Log save destination folder
Necessary disk space/ The amount of space

free space*3 necessary for saving log
and the free space in the log
save destination specified at
“Select folder” field
*1 To change the backup destination, click [Browse]
16
(L). When the “Browse For Folder window” opens,
select a folder (R) and then click [OK] (S).
*2 The desktop is initially displayed.

*3 If there is insufficient free space, change the save
destination.

4. Check the “selected folder” (M) and then click
[OK] (N).
■ Shutting down the “Backup
Utilities”
→→When log collection completes, a message is
displayed.
1. Click [Finish] ( I ).
5. Click [OK]. →→The “Main Menu” window closes and the “Backup
→→Returns to “Main Menu” window. Utilities” shuts down.
6. Open the Study.txt file on the desktop and

You can continue using FCR PRIMA Console.
check the presence of personal information.
“2.5 Starting up and Exiting”
Open the file with Notepad or Microsoft Excel. If the

[Delete personal information off of the logs] is
selected in step 2., no personal information is
contained in this file.
7. Delete the Study.txt file from the desktop.

16

16.3 Maintenance Record Sheet
We recommend you to periodically check the followings so that device can always operate normally.
Make a copy of this record sheet each time for periodical check.
● Check
Check Description Frequency User Check Result
/
/
Does the system start up normally? Daily
/
/
/
Is the normal communication /
possible between the connected Daily
equipment? /
/
● Cleaning
Equipment to be Cleaned Frequency Date of Cleaning
/
/
Monitor Daily
/
/
● Backup
Backup Item Frequency Backup Date
/
/
Patient information Weekly
/
/
/
/

Setting information Weekly
/
/
/
/
Log information Weekly
/
/
/
/
Report information Weekly
/
/ 16

16.4 Maintenance and Inspection
■ Maintenance and Inspection Items Assigned to Specified Dealer

For periodical inspection of the equipment and necessary arrangements, consults with our official
dealer or local representative.
Items for Maintenance

1. The institution where the equipment is installed is responsible for its use and maintenance.
2. Users or authorized dealers must inspect and maintenance the equipment and parts periodically
because the machine failure and bad effects on images may occur.
Items of maintenance by users
Items of daily and periodic inspection Frequency Effects if no maintenance
1) Normal start up/shut down of the Daily Normal images may not be retrieved
equipment and normal communication
with the connected equipment
2) Clean monitors Daily Difficulty of reading process may occur
3) Back up the data of patient information Weekly System may delete an important data
etc.
Items of maintenance by dealers
Items of daily and periodic inspection Frequency Effects if no maintenance
1) Inspection of an operation log by error By year Operation failure may occur
2) Image confirmation By year The readouts of images may adversely

affect image reading
3) Confirmation of image saving function By year Images may not be saved properly
4) Practice of problem diagnostic tool By year Operation failure may occur
5) Inspection of each unit By year Operation failure may occur
Frequency of periodic maintenance and changing period of periodic exchange parts may different
depends on the amount of use and hours of daily operation.

The maintenance of the equipment by the authorized dealer differs depends on contents of the
maintenance agreement.
For details on the maintenance of the equipment by the authorized dealer, contact us or our authorized
dealer.
See an attached document of this main unit.
16

Appendix A
Main Specifications
A.1 Specifications...................................................................... A-2
A.2 External View and Weight.................................................. A-5
Main Specifications
FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B A-1

A.1 Specifications
The specification and system performance of the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) are shown
below. The specification and system performance of the system may subject to change without prior
notice.
■ PC
PC Power Supply Conditions
(DELL Optiplex 780DT) Input voltage : 115/230VAC
Input current : 55.0A / 2.5A
Frequency : 50Hz / 60Hz
Environmental Conditions
(1) Operating
Temperature : 10°C to 35°C
Humidity : 20%RH to 80%RH (No dew condensation)
(2) Not operating
Temperature : -40°C to 65°C
Spec
Processor : Intel(R) Core(TM)2 Duo E7500/2.93GHz
Chipset : Intel Q45 Express Chipset w/ICH10DO
Memory : 2GB DDR3 Non-ECC SDRAM
System Board
Connectors : PCI Slots x2
Operating
System : Windows Vista(R) Business SP1 (32 bit)
Video Controller : Integrated Intel GMA 4500
External Ports : USB 2.0 x8 (2 Front, 6 Rear)
Network Adapter : 1000 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/10 BASE-T
HDD : 250GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD
Optical Drive : DVD Super Multi Drive
Keyboard USB keyboard
Mouse USB mouse

Main Specifications
A-2 FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B

■ Standard Monitor
17" (1280 x 1024) Electrical
Color LCD monitor Power supply : 100W, 100 to 120 V / 200 to 240 V ±10%
(DELL E170S) Frequency : 50 to 60 Hz
(1) Operating
(2) Not operating
17" (1280 x 1024) Electrical

Color High-contrast LCD Power supply : 100W, 100 to 120 V / 200 to 240 V ±10%
monitor Frequency : 50 to 60 Hz
(FlexScan S1721-SHBK)
(1) Operating
(2) Not operating
22.0" (1920 x 1200) Electrical

(FlexScan S2242W-HBK) Frequency : 50 to 60 Hz
(1) Operating
(2) Not operating
Main Specifications

■ DIN Standard-Compliant Monitor
21.3" (1200 x 1600) Electrical
(RadiForce RX211) Frequency : 50 to 60 Hz
(1) Operating
(2) Not operating
21.3" (1200 x 1600) Electrical

Monochrome LCD monitor Power supply : 100W, 100 to 120 V / 200 to 240 V ±10%
(RadiForce GS220-CL) Frequency : 50 to 60 Hz
(1) Operating
(2) Not operating
21.3" (1536 x 2048) Electrical

Monochrome LCD monitor Power supply : 115W, 100 to 120 V / 200 to 240 V ±10%
(RadiForce GS310-CL) Frequency : 50 to 60 Hz
(1) Operating
(2) Not operating
Main Specifications

A.2 External View and Weight
The external view and weight of the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) are shown below.
Width (mm) Depth (mm) Height (mm) Weight (kg)
PC 114 353 399 Approx. 8.26
Standard Monitor
17" (1280 x 1024)

Color LCD monitor 374.7 140 380.6 Approx. 4.63
(DELL E170S)
17" (1280 x 1024)

Color High-contrast LCD
362 200 280 to 406 Approx. 5.6
monitor
(FlexScan S1721-SHBK)
20.1” (1680 x 1050)

Color LCD monitor 469 208.5 427 to 509 Approx. 9.6
(FlexScan S2031W-HBK)
DIN Standard-Compliant Monitor
21.3" (1200 x 1600)

Color LCD monitor 376 208.5 522.5 to 604.5 Approx. 9.4
(RadiForce RX211)
21.3" (1200 x 1600)

Monochrome LCD
376 208.5 522.5 to 604.5 Approx. 9.9
monitor
(RadiForce GS220-CL)
21.3" (1536 x 2048)

Monochrome LCD
376 208.5 522.5 to 604.5 Approx. 9.9
monitor
(RadiForce GS310-CL)
■ PC
(Unit : mm)
399.0 353.0
114.0
Main Specifications
* The illustration of the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) may differ from the actual external view.

Main Specifications

Appendix Z
Precautions for Exposure
Z.1 Precautions to Take Before Exposure...............................Z-2
Z.2 Precautions to Take in Each Mode.....................................Z-3

Z.2.1 Precautions for Exposure in the AUTO MODE.............Z-3
Z.2.2 Precautions for Exposure in the SEMI-AUTO MODE..Z-6
Z.2.3 Precautions for Exposure in the FIX MODE.................Z-6
Z.3 Other Precautions................................................................Z-7
Z
FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B Z-1
Z.1 Precautions to Take Before Exposure
This section describes precautions to observe before performing exposure.
It is recommended to use Bucky’s device to remove scatter rays and obtain a high-quality image.
When carrying out exposure using a stationary grid, it is recommended to use a 60 lines/cm grid with
fewer artifacts.
Use a grid whose line direction is parallel to the cassette’s vertical direction (between top and bottom).
Green mark
Top
Bottom
Cassette
Z
Z-2 FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B
Z.2 Precautions to Take in Each Mode
This section describes some precautions that must be followed when making radiographic exposures
in each of the following modes: Auto mode, Semi-auto mode, Semi-X mode, and Fix Mode.
Z.2.1 Precautions for Exposure in the AUTO MODE

In the Auto mode, radiographic images that • Do not set the radiation field extremely
interfere with image reading are obtained in small. Be sure to expose X-rays on one
some cases due to variations in multileaf thirds or more of the length of each side
collimator settings on the X-ray exposure unit of the IP.
and/or the effects of scatter rays. If you • Be sure that each side of the radiation
encounter such cases, please contact your field does not overlap with the contrast
local authorized distributor for consultation and medium. Error will occur if they overlap
advice, and make radiographic exposures in a each other.
different mode such as the Semi-auto mode or
This subsection explains precautions to be
the Fix mode.
exercised regarding “Radiation Field and IP
Here are precautions to take in order to obtain Split Pattern Recognition” processing
stable image quality in the Auto mode: (hereafter referred to as PRIEF) which is
1. Radiation Field and IP Split Pattern performed when you make radiographic
Recognition..............................................(1) exposures in the Auto mode.
2. Depiction of the Cervical Region..............(2) The “S” in PRIEF4S and PRIEF1S is a symbol
3. Depiction of HIP JOINT AXL - 2...............(3) to signify that IP-split recognition is possible.
4. Cautions for “PANTOMO” X-ray There are the following four split-IP exposure
Exposures Using a 10”×12” Cassette......(4) patterns:
5. EDR Image Data Analysis........................(5)
(1) Radiation Field and IP Split Pattern

Recognition
• Be sure that the center (25×25 mm)
Full-IP exposure Half-split IP (vertical) Half-split IP (horizontal) Quarter-split IP
of the IP is in the radiation field. If the
IP is split for multiple exposures, each * When making multiple exposures on a split IP, a
center of the split portions must be split portion(s) may be left unexposed.
covered by the radiation field. Guidance as to which to use: PRIEF4S or
PRIEF1S Table Z-1 shows the relationships
among anatomical regions to be radiographed,
radiographic exposure methods, PRIEF4S and
PRIEF1S. Explanations on PRIEF4S and
PRIEF1S are also provided along with
precautions to take with them.
IP center: 25 mm × 25 mm area
(black rectangles in examples above)
located in the center of the IP
Center of the split portion: 25 mm × 25 mm

area (black rectangles in examples above)
located in the center of each split portion.
Z
[Table. Z-1] At-a-glance guide to availability of (2) Depiction of the Cervical Region
PRIEF4S/PRIEF1S for each anatomical region/ • The radiation field must not include the
exposure method
whole head. Be sure to secure transparent
Contrast portions on both sides of the neck.
Plain Tomography
Medium
4S
Head 4S 4S (1 for
pantomography)
Neck 4S 4S 1S
4S
Chest 4S 1
(1 for esophagus)
4S
Use the “Skull, General” menu to include the
Abdomen 4S (1S for stomach 1
and intestines) whole head in the radiation field.
• For exposure of the pharynx or larynx,
Pelvis 4S 4S 1
be sure that the neck comes to the
Upper
4S 4S 1 center of the radiation field so that the
extremity
frontal and lateral orientations can be
Lower
extremity
4S 4S 1 recognized appropriately.
Notes on PRIEF
[PRIEF 4S] Image area
Used, with some exceptions, for both plain and
contrast medium exposure menus, from head Radiation field
to lower extremities.
• The diaphragm shape will be any convex
polygons including rectangle, circle, ellipse,
track, etc. • In pharynx and/or larynx exposure, do
not use lead characters in the oblique
line section.
[PRIEF 1]
Used to tomography menus for chest,
abdomen, pelvis, upper and lower extremities.
• When the IP is not split and the diaphragm is
closed, adjust the shape so that it is parallel
to the IP side.
• When conducting multiple exposures with a (3) Depiction of HIP JOINT AXL - 2
split IP using the PRIEF 1 menu, • Make sure to position the region of
1) Do not close the diaphragm. interest to the slanted-line area
2) Expose all the split portions of the IP. shown below. Do not collimate further
inside.
[PRIEF 1S]
• Positioning should be done so that
Used to neck tomography and stomach
the condyle and the femur run along
contrast medium menus.
the longer edge. (Do not have them

• When the IP is not split and the diaphragm is
positioned against the shorter edge.)
closed, adjust the shape so that it is parallel
to the IP side.
Condyle side 7/12
Femur side
1/12
Z 1/4 1/4

(4) Cautions for “PANTOMO” X-ray Precautions when using the AUTO MODE.
Exposures Using a 10”×12” Cassette Mode type Precautions
• To obtain properly displayed images, As this mode is available on the
set the 10”×12” cassette in the assumption that it extracts
dedicated cassette holder of the information concerning the skin,
exposure unit so that the green mark I secure the positioning so that there
is an area other than the target
on top of the cassette is positioned on where the direct X-rays are
the right side when viewed from the incident.
X-ray tube, as illustrated below. II No special precautions.
Right side III
Be sure to use the Ba contrast
medium.
1. Be sure to secure the positioning
Green mark so that the X-rays are incident
directly in the area outside the
target.
IV
2. As the reading latitude is fixed, it
is necessary to control the tube
voltage as usual according to the
thickness of the target.
10"x12" cassette
As the reading latitude is fixed, it is
• For image output, the “PANTOMO” necessary to control the tube
V
voltage as usual according to the
X-ray exposure menu (M2004) takes
thickness of the target.
only an area of 15×30cm from the
VI No special precautions.
10”×12” exposure area.
If you wish an image be output using VII No special precautions.
the entire 10”×12” area, use the

“PANTOMO-2:T” (7004) exposure
menu.
(5) EDR Image Data Analysis

• Image unevenness appearing when the grid
used for exposure is not correctly positioned in
terms of the bulb, clothes shadow or unevenly
radiated X-ray to the X-ray exposure area can
be referred to as the problems occurring during
the EDR image data analysis, which cause
unstable density on the image. Avoid such
unevenness in the X-ray exposure area as far
as possible.
• If the target includes such materials as
gypsum, denture, etc., stable density may not
be obtained because such materials make it
difficult to analyze EDR image data. In such a
case, use the S-Shift/C-Shift or FIX MODE.
• For multiple exposures with a split IP, make
exposure doses on each portion of the IP as
equal as possible (maximum 1.6 times). In
other words, for multiple exposures, submit

each portion of the IP to the appropriate
exposure dose according to the intended
anatomical region as usual.
Z
Z.2.2 Precautions for Z.2.3 Precautions for
Exposure in the SEMI- Exposure in the FIX
AUTO MODE MODE
The precautions are common to Semi I, II, III or III(**). As reading conditions are fixed, exposure
• Center area of the IP 10 × 10 cm (Semi I) conditions must be controlled in the same way
7 × 7 cm (Semi II) as for conventional X-ray exposure. The reading
5 × 5 cm (Semi III) conditions (sensitivity and latitude) have been
Position the portion you need to display of ten preset according to the relevant menu in the FIX
in each of the 5×5 cm (Semi III (**)) center MODE. Thus, select the exposure conditions
are as of the half-split IPs (both upper and that correspond to that menu.
lower halves and right and left halves) and
the quarter-split IP.
• Never position anything other than the subject in
the above mentioned areas. If anything other
than the subject is positioned in such areas, the
image density will become thinner. In addition, do
not position any metals or artificial bones in such
areas. The image density will become higher if
such an object is positioned in such areas.
• It is necessary to control the tube voltage as

usual according to the subject thickness.
The following precautions should be
observed for Semi IV.
y
b c
a
x
d e
Area Center Coordinate (x:y) cm Size (cm)

a (0, 0) 10×10
b (-5, 7) 6×6
c (5, 7) 6×6
d (-5, -7) 6×6
e (5, -7) 6×6
• Do not position transparent portions (area other

than the subject) in the above mentioned five areas.
• It is necessary to control the tube voltage as
usual according to the subject thickness.
Z The SEMI-AUTO MODE has been preset

around the magnification menu.

Z.3 Other Precautions
Shown below are other precautions to observe when performing exposure.
• When you are changing image processing

parameters, check adequately that such a
change does not affect image reading
adversely. To change standard image
processing parameter settings, verify results
of the changed settings on multiple images
through consultation with the image reading
physician, and then perform exposure.
• When performing exposure of an anatomical
region which is hard to distinguish difference
between the right side and the left side, take
proper measures by, for example, placing
lead characters so that the front and the back
of an image is identified clearly.
Z
Z
Index
Index
FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B 1

Index
A Ruler............................................................. 5-7
Thumbnail Images........................................ 5-7
Add.................................................................. 5-5
Display lined up
Annotation.............................................. 5-18, 6-4
Series Images.............................................. 5-6
Sub-window.................................................. 5-6
C
Consistency check E
Disk.......................................................... 14-37
Edit
History Information................................... 14-40
Annotation.................................................. 5-26
Contrast......................................................... 5-10
Exposure Menus.......................................... 9-5
Control drive.................................................. 2-18 Fixed Phrase................................................ 6-7
Patient Information............................ 9-13, 13-6
D Report........................................................... 6-4
Schema........................................................ 6-7
Delete
User Group Operational Authorities......... 13-13
Annotation.................................................. 5-27
User Information............................ 13-10, 13-16
Exposure Menus.......................................... 9-6
Patient Information..................................... 13-6 Events......................................................... 10-10
Study........................................................ 12-16 Exit
Density.......................................................... 5-10 Client Application........................................ 2-13

Client Utilities.............................................. 13-3
DICOM server................................................. 7-7
Display Setting Function (Main Window).... 11-2
Disk maintenance........................................ 13-20
Exposing/Reading........................................ 3-9
Display/Hide
FCR PRIMA Console.................................. 2-12
100%-Size Image....................................... 5-11
Free Drawing Function............................... 5-29
Annotation.................................................... 5-7
Log off........................................................ 2-13
Attribute Information..................................... 5-7
Server Application...................................... 2-13
AutoFit to Window...................................... 5-11
Shut down.................................................. 2-14
Cine Display Mode....................................... 5-8
Study Utilities.............................................. 12-5
FCR-Menus Window.................................. 11-6
Index
Expose............................................................ 3-5
ID Input Window......................................... 11-4
Exposure menu............................................. 14-5
Magnifying glass......................................... 5-12
Patient Information....................................... 5-7
F
Patient List Window.................................... 11-5
Pixel Scale.................................................. 5-11 Film print.......................................................... 8-7
Reference Line............................................. 5-7
Flow
Refer Window............................................. 11-8
Exposing/Reading........................................ 3-2
2 FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B

Image Storage.............................................. 7-2 M
Print.............................................................. 8-2
Magnifying glass............................................ 5-12
Searching/Referring..................................... 4-2
Magnify/Reduce
Utilizing System............................................ 2-6
Images........................................................ 5-11
Verifying/Processing Images........................ 5-2
Sub-window.................................................. 5-6
Free drawing......................................... 5-28, 6-4
Move.............................................................. 5-12
Free layout...................................................... 8-9
N
G
NAS............................................................... 10-7
General-purpose file format........................... 7-10
Normal drive.................................................. 2-18
H
O
History information...................................... 13-17
Other disk...................................................... 2-17
I Overlay............................................................ 5-7
Image attribute information................ 8-12, 11-12

P
Image cart....................................................... 5-3
Parameter
Image output status....................................... 10-9
DRC (Dynamic Range Control Processing)
Image process................................................. 5-9 Parameters............................................ 5-15
Image Reader........................................ 3-7, 10-4 FCR Image Processing Parameters........... 5-14

GP (Gradation Processing) Parameters..... 5-14
Image storage disk........................................ 2-17
MFP (Multi-objective Frequency Processing)
Image Viewer................................................... 5-3 Parameters............................................ 5-15
Import Preset Setting............................................. 5-16

RP (Spatial Frequency Processing)
DICOM Images........................................... 3-10
Parameters............................................ 5-14
Inactivate/Activate images............................... 9-7
Sensitivity, Latitude..................................... 5-16
Indicators....................................................... 10-2 TAS (Tomographic Artifacts Suppression
Processing) Parameters........................ 5-15
Input format
Patient Information................................... 14-33 Patient Information................................. 3-3, 9-13
Index
Back up...................................................... 16-3

L PDI disk................................................ 2-17, 7-13
Load Preset setting................................................ 5-16

Patient Information................................... 14-33
Lock............................................................... 2-15
Log off............................................................ 2-13

R Backup Notification Setting...................... 14-29
Behavior on Exposing/Reading.................. 11-7
Read................................................................ 3-7
Displaying Order of Exposure Menus......... 9-15
Re-expose....................................................... 9-8
Display Menu Group Setting.................... 14-18
Reference line................................................. 5-7 Display of FCR-Menus Window................. 11-6
Register Display of ID Input Window........................ 11-4
Assigning Preset Keypad Keys................ 14-43 Display of Image Attribute Information..... 11-12
Exposure Menus.......................................... 9-4 Display of Patient List Window................... 11-5
Fixed Phrase................................................ 6-7 Display of Refer Window............................ 11-8
Key Images.................................................. 5-8 Display of Series View.............................. 11-13
Patient Information.............................. 3-3, 13-4 Display of Toolbar..................................... 11-14
Re-exposure Menus..................................... 9-8 Exposure Menu Setting.............................. 14-6
Report........................................................... 6-4 Film Character String Setting................... 14-21
Schema........................................................ 6-7 Font Size (Image Viewer)......................... 11-18
User Information......................................... 13-9 Font Size (Main Window)........................... 11-9
User Marker.............................................. 14-42 Image Deletion Setting............................. 14-28
Utilizing DICOM MWM Server...................... 3-4 Initial Display of Annotation...................... 11-11

Initial Display of Main Window.................... 11-3
Replace
Output Destination Setting....................... 14-23
Display Position............................................ 5-7
Patient Prefix Setting................................ 14-31
Imported Images.......................................... 9-9
Printing/Saving/Transmitting....................... 9-10
Report..................................................... 5-3, 8-13
Report....................................................... 11-15
Back up...................................................... 16-3
Study Menu Setting.................................. 14-14
Print.............................................................. 8-2
User Images............................................. 13-14
S Shut down..................................................... 2-14
Start up
Save
Backup Utilities........................................... 16-4
Annotation.................................................. 5-30
Behavior of Server Application................... 2-11
Image Processing Result........................... 5-30
Client Application........................................ 2-11
Images.......................................................... 7-1
Client Utilities.............................................. 13-3
Schedule an exposure..................................... 3-6
Copy Tool................................................... 2-22
Index
Schema.................................................... 6-2, 6-6 Display Setting Function (Image Viewer). 11-10
Select/Arrange................................................. 5-4 Display Setting Function (Main Window).... 11-2

Editing Function of Study Information.......... 9-2
Set
FCR PRIMA Console.................................... 2-9
Automatic Logoff Setting.......................... 14-41
Free Drawing Function............................... 5-28
Automatic Startup Setting......................... 14-30
Indicators.................................................... 10-3
Automatic Verification Setting................... 14-27
Print Dialogs................................................. 8-4
4 FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B

Save Dialogs................................................ 7-3
Server Application...................................... 2-11
Study Utilities.............................................. 12-5
User Utilities............................................... 14-3
Storage disk.................................................... 7-6
Study menu................................................... 14-5
Study summary............................................... 5-3
Sub-window..................................................... 5-3
Switch.............................................................. 5-5
Thumbnail images........................................... 5-7
Toolbar.................................................. 5-3, 11-14
Version Information......................................... 2-8
Work disk................................................ 2-17, 7-8
Index

FCR Prima PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

FCR Prima PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Safety Information

Taking and Reading

Searching Patients and

Using Report Function

Editing Study Information

Verifying with the Indicators

Changing Display Settings

Using “Study Utilities”

Configuring “Client Utilities”

Setting “User Utilities”

This system is classified as a medical device under EC Directive 93/42/EEC.

Other holders’ trademarks

Copyright © 2009-2010 FUJIFILM Corporation. All rights reserved.

ii FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B

■ Basic Page Organization

3. Select the image (B) to be saved.

Image Storage from Each Window

Save to PDI Disks*1

FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B 7-3

FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B iii

Indicates information that should be noted.

Indicates information that may be helpful.

Indicates an item that provides details of the procedure or related information.

iv FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B

Chapter 1 Safety Information

1.1 Precautions Before Operating This Equipment............................................. 1-2

Chapter 2 Product Overview

2.1 FCR PRIMA Console Highlights........................................................................ 2-2

FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B v

Chapter 3 Taking and Reading X-ray of a Subject

3.1 Flow of Taking and Reading X-ray.................................................................... 3-2

vi FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B

Chapter 4 Searching Patients and Referring Studies

4.1 Flow for Searching / Referring ......................................................................... 4-2

Chapter 5 Verifying and Processing Images

5.1 Flow of Verifying and Processing Images....................................................... 5-2

FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B vii

Chapter 6 Using Report Function

6.1 Outline of “Report” Window.............................................................................. 6-2

viii FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B

Chapter 7 Image Storage from Each Window

7.1 Relationships between Windows and Storage Destinations....................... 7-2

Chapter 8 Image Print from Each Window

8.1 Printing Types and Flow..................................................................................... 8-2

Chapter 9 Editing Study Information

9.1 Starting up the Editing Function....................................................................... 9-2

Chapter 10 Verifying with the Indicators

10.1 Viewing Indicators and Activating Functions............................................... 10-2

FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B xi

Chapter 11 Changing Display Settings of

11.1 Display Settings of the “Main” Window......................................................... 11-2

11.1.7 Display Settings of “Refer” window.................................................... 11-8

xii FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B

FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B xiii

12.1 Functions of “Study Utilities”.......................................................................... 12-2

Chapter 13 Configuring “Client Utilities”

13.1 Setting Items of “Client Utilities”.................................................................... 13-2

xiv FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B

FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B xv

14.1 Setting “User Utilities”...................................................................................... 14-2

xvi FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B

15.1 PC does Not Start.............................................................................................. 15-2

FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440B xvii